Operating Manual - Metronet Telecom

Operating Manual - Metronet Telecom
Operating Manual
Hybrid IP-PBX
Model No.
KX-NS700
Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.
Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
In particular, be sure to read "1.1.1 For Your Safety (Page 14)" before using this product.
KX-NS700: PFMPR Software File Version 004.00000 or later
Manuals and supporting information are provided on the Panasonic Web site at:
http://panasonic.net/pcc/support/pbx/
Document Version 2014-08
Feature Highlights
Feature Highlights
Easy Operation
IP Communication
This PBX supports IP communication using
a variety of IP telephones, such as the KX-NT300/
KX-NT500 series with Self Labeling and/or
Bluetooth wireless headsets, Panasonic IP
Softphones, and SIP phones.
R
A Panasonic telephone that is equipped with
a Navigator Key/Jog Dial and a display helps
you to access desired features easily. Also, you
will be informed of the arrival of an incoming call
or a message waiting by the lamp if it is equipped.
ENTER
IP Proprietary
Telephone
Navigator Key
IP Softphone
SIP phone
Consult your dealer
Jog Dial
Message/Ringer Lamp
1.1 Before Operating the Telephones
(Page 14)
Remote Office
Cellular Phone Features
This PBX supports the use of SIP phones
connected from a remote office over an IP network
through an SBC (session border controller).
SIP phones can be set up by simply connecting
the phones to the LAN at the remote office.
This PBX supports the use of cellular phones
with the PBX. Cellular phones can make and
receive calls as if they were registered
extensions.
IP Network
Consult your dealer
1.5 Cellular Phone Features (Page 183)
Wireless System
Built-in Unified Messaging
This PBX optionally supports a Portable Station
(PS) system. PSs can be used in the PBX
with other wired telephones.
You can set incoming calls to be redirected to
your mailbox to let callers leave voice
messages when you are unable to answer the
phone. You can access your mailbox to listen
to the messages when you are away from the
office as well.
Hello, this
is John Smith.
Please leave
your message.
1.3.79 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode (Page 169)
2
Operating Manual
1.6 Unified Messaging Features (Page 187)
Document Version 2014-08
Feature Highlights
Call Center
Communication Assistant (CA)
This PBX offers a built-in Call Center feature
called Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group.
Incoming calls to an ICD Group can be queued
or redirected to a preprogrammed destination,
answered in order of priority and monitored by
a supervisor extension.
CA Client users can connect to the PBX without
using an external server. CA Client users can
make calls by clicking in a phonebook on their
PC, as well as use many other features.
PC
(Client)
ICD Group
Customers
PC
(Client)
Queuing
1.3.36 ICD GROUP FEATURES (Page 110)
Consult your dealer
CA Call Accounting
This application can calculate call cost estimates
and track call activity for calls that are made
through the PBX. Installing the CA Call Accounting
web server software allows you to access CA Call
Accounting from any PC by using a web client. You
can sort and view, print, or export call information
with the web client. In addition, reports can be
created based on exported data.
PC
(Client)
PC
(Web Server)
PC
(Client)
Consult your dealer
In This Manual,
• The following abbreviations are used:
•
•
APT ® Analog Proprietary Telephone
Display PT ® Proprietary Telephone with a Display
DPT ® Digital Proprietary Telephone
IP-PT ® IP Proprietary Telephone
PS ® Portable Station
PT ® Proprietary Telephone
SIP extension/SIP Extn. ® Extensions of the PBX which uses Session Initiation Protocol for
communication.
SLT ® Single Line Telephone
"PT" is used as a generic term to represent IP-PT, DPT, APT and Display PT.
The following icons are used frequently.
!!
Hints
Document Version 2014-08
Conditions
Operating Manual
3
Feature Highlights
Functional Limitation
Depending on the PBX’s software version, some features may not function. For details about which versions
support these features, consult your dealer.
Notice
•
•
•
–
–
This PBX supports SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) phones. However, some PBX features may not be
available for SIP phones, depending on your telephone type.
Under power failure conditions, the connected telephones may not operate. Please ensure that a separate
telephone, not dependent on local power, is available for emergency use.
Prior to connection of this product, please verify that the intended operating environment is supported.
Satisfactory performance cannot be guaranteed for the following:
interoperability and compatibility with all devices and systems connected to this product
proper operation and compatibility with services provided by telecommunications companies over
connected networks
NOTES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Some optional hardware, software, and features are not available in some areas, or for some PBX models.
Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information.
This manual provides basic information on how you can access commonly used PBX functions with
proprietary telephones (PTs), single line telephones (SLTs), portable stations (PSs), SIP phones, and DSS
Consoles. For detailed information about each feature or setting, refer to the Feature Manual or PC
Programming Manual.
In this manual, several kinds of PTs appear, as follows:
– IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
– Digital Proprietary Telephone (DPT)
– Analog Proprietary Telephone (APT)
– Proprietary Telephone with a Display (Display PT)
"PT" is used as a generic term to represent all of these PTs. If a PBX feature only supports specific PTs,
such as IP-PTs, the available telephone types are clearly indicated.
IP-PTs/SIP extensions may become busy and you may not be able to make or receive calls, depending
on the network status.
The contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version, as indicated on the cover of
this manual. To confirm the software version of your PBX, refer to the PC Programming Manual.
Product specifications are subject to change without notice.
The preset melodies in this product are used with permission of © 2010 Copyrights Vision Inc.
Notes for SIP Phone Users
Before using a SIP phone, please read the following notes.
For All SIP phone users
A tone may not be heard during an operation depending on the type of SIP phone being used. The following
operation is an example. However, for KX-UT series SIP phones, a tone may be heard depending on the
system settings. For details, consult your administrator.
4
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
Feature Highlights
[Example]
Account Code Entry
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
(Account)
account code
OR
4
Press Account or
enter 49.
Off-hook.
D.Tone
9
Enter account code
(max. 10 digits).
Enter #.
SIP phone users will
not hear this tone.
outside
phone no.
Dial outside
phone number.
Seize a CO line before entering
an outside phone number.
For KX-UT series SIP phone users
a. Operations that use feature numbers are limited. Also, flexible buttons are only available for certain
KX-UT series SIP phone models. Refer to the telephone types displayed at the top left of each operation.
b. A maximum of 32 digits can be input on a KX-UT series SIP phone at one time, including feature numbers,
etc.
c. To execute certain operations, you may be required to press the ENTER button on a KX-UT series SIP
phone during the operation.
The following 5 operations are examples.
[Examples]
Automatic Line Access
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
For KX-UT series:
Press ENTER.
(L-CO)
OR
9
Off-hook.
Document Version 2014-08
Press L-CO or
enter automatic
line access number.
outside
phone no.
Dial outside phone
number.
Talk.
Operating Manual
5
Feature Highlights
To call with a verification code
PIN: Personal Identification Number
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
4
Enter
Off-hook.
verification code PIN
7
verification code
Enter
47.
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Enter verification code
PIN (max. 10 digits).
.
Enter verification code
(max. 4 digits).
For KX-UT series:
Press ENTER.
desired
phone no.
Dial desired
phone number.
If a wrong verification code PIN is
entered, you hear an alarm tone.
Seize a CO line before entering
an outside phone number.
To transfer to an outside party using the PBX service
For KX-UT series:
Press ENTER.
SIP Extn.
During a conversation
CO line
C.Tone
OR
HOLD
*
outside
phone no.
KX-UT series
only.
KX-UT series:
Press TRANSFER.
Other than KX-UT series:
Press HOLD.
Seize CO line.
Dial outside phone
number.
Talk.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted
(KX-UT series only).
To establish a conference call
KX-UT series
For KX-UT series:
Press ENTER.
During a conversation
C.Tone
Press CONFERENCE.
desired
phone no.
Dial desired phone
number.
Seize a CO line before dialing
an outside phone number.
6
Operating Manual
C.Tone
Talk to the
new party.
Press CONFERENCE.
Talk with multiple
parties.
For KX-UT670:
Press Start Conference.
Document Version 2014-08
Feature Highlights
To set/cancel Call Forwarding
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0
Both Calls
OR
7
1
1
2
Outside Calls
OR
2
Off-hook.
Enter
71.
0
Intercom Calls
Enter 0 to 2 as
you desire.
3
4
5
Cancel
All Calls
Busy
No Answer
Busy/No Answer
Enter required
number.
After entering 0 for "Cancel",
for KX-UT series:
Press ENTER.
Go on-hook.
For "Cancel", go on-hook
directly after entering 0.
destination
extension no.
For KX-UT series:
Press ENTER.
OR
CO line
access no.
outside
phone no.
C.Tone
(max. 32 digits)
Enter destination extension number.
Or enter CO line access number
and then outside phone number.
Enter #.
On-hook.
For KX-UT series:
max. 26 digits
For non-KX-UT series SIP phone users
a. The following features are available for SIP phone users:
– Making calls
– Answering calls
– Holding calls
– Transferring calls (You cannot go on-hook before the transferred party answers.)
b. The available operations using feature numbers are limited. Refer to the telephone types displayed at the
top left of each operation.
c. The tones listed in "5.4.1 Tone" are not available for SIP phone users. Tones or the tone types may vary
depending on the type of telephone being used. For example, when you put a call on hold, a specific tone
for the SIP phone may be heard, or no tone may be heard.
d. Any number pressed while hearing a Busy/DND/Reorder tone, such as the feature number to activate
Automatic Callback Busy, will be ignored.
e. The operations for SIP phones may differ from the steps in this manual, and may vary depending on the
type of telephone being used.
f. To execute an operation, some SIP phones may require that the OK button is pressed after pressing all
the buttons of the operation.
Notes for KX-NT300 Series, KX-NT500 Series, and KX-UT Series Users
If the primary PBX to which your telephone is connected fails, the extension may automatically switch its
connection to a secondary PBX.
• The time required to switch to the secondary PBX or back to the primary PBX is different depending on
the type of your telephone.
• When the extension switches its connection to the secondary PBX, your call will be disconnected if you
are on a call.
• Even if the primary PBX becomes available again, your telephone will not reconnect to it if you are on a
call.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
7
Feature Highlights
•
For KX-NT300 series and KX-NT500 series users, if background music (BGM) is being played through
your telephone while it is connected to the secondary PBX, it will not reconnect to the primary PBX when
it becomes available.
Notes for KX-NT543, KX-NT546, and KX-NT560 IP-PT Users
•
While using a KX-NT543, KX-NT546, or KX-NT560 IP-PT in ECO mode, IP network transmission speed
is relatively slow and the secondary Ethernet port cannot be used. To disable ECO mode, consult your
dealer.
Trademarks
•
•
•
•
Microsoft and Outlook are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use
of such marks by Panasonic Corporation is under license.
All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
Open Source Software
This product uses Open Source Software. For details, click the Information button in Web Maintenance
Console.
8
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 Operation ................................................................................................13
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1.4
1.1.5
1.1.6
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
1.3.6
1.3.7
1.3.8
1.3.9
1.3.10
1.3.11
1.3.12
1.3.13
1.3.14
1.3.15
1.3.16
1.3.17
1.3.18
1.3.19
1.3.20
1.3.21
1.3.22
1.3.23
1.3.24
1.3.25
1.3.26
1.3.27
1.3.28
1.3.29
1.3.30
1.3.31
1.3.32
1.3.33
1.3.34
1.3.35
1.3.36
1.3.37
1.3.38
1.3.39
1.3.40
Before Operating the Telephones .................................................................................14
For Your Safety ..............................................................................................................14
Important Safety Instructions ..........................................................................................18
Precautions ....................................................................................................................19
Data Security ..................................................................................................................19
F.C.C. REQUIREMENTS AND RELEVANT INFORMATION ........................................20
Before Operating the Telephones ..................................................................................22
Basic Operations .............................................................................................................32
Making Calls ...................................................................................................................32
Answering Calls ..............................................................................................................34
Telephone Features and Operation ...............................................................................36
Absent Message .............................................................................................................36
Account Code Entry .......................................................................................................37
Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice ........................................................................................38
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) .............................................................................38
BGM (Background Music) ..............................................................................................40
Call Hold .........................................................................................................................40
Call Monitor ....................................................................................................................44
Call Park .........................................................................................................................45
Call Pickup .....................................................................................................................46
Call Splitting ...................................................................................................................48
Call Transfer ...................................................................................................................51
CALL WAITING FEATURES ..........................................................................................55
Call Waiting Tone ...........................................................................................................62
Character Entry ..............................................................................................................62
Conference .....................................................................................................................65
Conference, Unattended ................................................................................................70
Conference Group Call ...................................................................................................72
Data Line Security ..........................................................................................................78
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) .............................................................................79
DND (Do Not Disturb) .....................................................................................................82
Door Open ......................................................................................................................85
Doorphone Call ..............................................................................................................86
EFA (External Feature Access) ......................................................................................87
Executive Busy Override ................................................................................................88
Extension Dial Lock ........................................................................................................90
Extension Feature Clear .................................................................................................91
Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number) ............................................................92
External Relay ................................................................................................................94
External Sensor ..............................................................................................................94
FWD (Call Forwarding) ...................................................................................................94
Hands-free Answerback ...............................................................................................103
Hands-free Operation ...................................................................................................104
Headset Operation .......................................................................................................105
HOSPITALITY FEATURES ..........................................................................................108
Hot Line ........................................................................................................................108
ICD GROUP FEATURES .............................................................................................110
ICD Group Features—Call Log History for ICD Group .................................................110
ICD Group Features—Incoming Call Queue Monitor ...................................................111
ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out ..........................................................................112
ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out Monitor and Remote Control ............................115
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
9
Table of Contents
1.3.41
1.3.42
1.3.43
1.3.44
1.3.45
1.3.46
1.3.47
1.3.48
1.3.49
1.3.50
1.3.51
1.3.52
1.3.53
1.3.54
1.3.55
1.3.56
1.3.57
1.3.58
1.3.59
1.3.60
1.3.61
1.3.62
1.3.63
1.3.64
1.3.65
1.3.66
1.3.67
1.3.68
1.3.69
1.3.70
1.3.71
1.3.72
1.3.73
1.3.74
1.3.75
1.3.76
1.3.77
1.3.78
1.3.79
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.5
1.5.1
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.2
1.6.3
1.6.4
1.6.5
1.6.6
10
ICD Group Features—Manual Queue Redirection .......................................................117
ICD Group Features—Supervisory ..............................................................................117
Message Waiting ..........................................................................................................119
Mute .............................................................................................................................122
Off-hook Monitor ...........................................................................................................123
OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement) .........................................................................123
One-numbered extension .............................................................................................124
One-touch Dialing .........................................................................................................125
Paging ..........................................................................................................................125
Paralleled Telephone ...................................................................................................128
PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number)
Extension ......................................................................................................................129
Printing Message ..........................................................................................................132
Privacy Release ...........................................................................................................133
Private Network Features—CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) .................133
Private Network Features—CLIR (Calling Line Identification Restriction) ....................134
Private Network Features—COLP (Connected Line Identification Presentation) ........135
Private Network Features—COLR (Connected Line Identification Restriction) ...........135
Private Network Features—TIE Line Access ...............................................................136
Quick Dialing ................................................................................................................137
Redial, Last Number .....................................................................................................137
Room Status Control ....................................................................................................137
Self Labeling (KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
only) ..............................................................................................................................140
Speed Dialing, Personal ...............................................................................................142
Speed Dialing, System .................................................................................................143
SVM (Simplified Voice Message) .................................................................................144
TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station) ...................................................................154
Timed Reminder ...........................................................................................................154
Time Service ................................................................................................................156
Verification Code Entry .................................................................................................157
VOICE MAIL FEATURES .............................................................................................157
Voice Mail Features—LCS (Live Call Screening) .........................................................158
Voice Mail Features—Two-way Record .......................................................................160
Voice Mail Features—Voice Mail Integration ...............................................................161
Wake-up Call ................................................................................................................163
Walking COS ................................................................................................................164
Walking Extension ........................................................................................................165
Walking Extension, Enhanced ......................................................................................166
Whisper OHCA .............................................................................................................168
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode ........................................................................................169
Display Features ...........................................................................................................170
Call Log, Incoming ........................................................................................................170
Call Log, Outgoing ........................................................................................................173
Directories ....................................................................................................................176
System Feature Access ...............................................................................................178
Cellular Phone Features ...............................................................................................183
Cellular Phone Features ...............................................................................................183
Unified Messaging Features ........................................................................................187
What is the Unified Messaging system? ......................................................................187
Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox ................................................................188
Message Playback and Related Features ....................................................................198
Sending Messages .......................................................................................................206
Transferring Calls .........................................................................................................216
Other Features .............................................................................................................224
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
Table of Contents
1.6.7
Quick Reference ...........................................................................................................241
2 Manager Operation ..............................................................................245
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
Manager Service Features ............................................................................................246
Dial Tone Transfer ........................................................................................................246
External BGM (Background Music) ..............................................................................246
OGM (Outgoing Messages) .........................................................................................246
Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection) Monitor
Release ........................................................................................................................248
Remote Extension Dial Lock ........................................................................................249
Time Service Mode Control ..........................................................................................249
Configuring Unified Messaging Features ...................................................................251
System Manager Features ...........................................................................................251
Message Manager Features ........................................................................................264
3 Customizing Your Phone & System ...................................................281
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.2
3.2.1
Personal Programming .................................................................................................282
Programming Information .............................................................................................282
Personal Programming .................................................................................................282
Programming Feature Clear .........................................................................................291
Customizing the Buttons ..............................................................................................293
System Programming Using Web Maintenance Console .........................................299
User Programming .......................................................................................................299
4 Customizing Extensions and the System–for Managers .................325
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
Manager Programming .................................................................................................326
Programming Information .............................................................................................326
Manager Programming .................................................................................................326
Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control ..............................................................................328
5 Appendix ...............................................................................................337
5.1
5.1.1
5.2
5.2.1
5.3
5.3.1
5.4
5.4.1
List of Operations by Telephone Type ........................................................................338
List of Operations by Telephone Type .........................................................................338
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................344
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................344
Feature Number Table ..................................................................................................347
Feature Number Table .................................................................................................347
Tone ................................................................................................................................355
Tone .............................................................................................................................355
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
11
Table of Contents
12
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
Section 1
Operation
This section shows you step by step how to use each
feature. Read this chapter to become familiar with the
many useful features of this PBX.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
13
1.1.1 For Your Safety
1.1 Before Operating the Telephones
1.1.1 For Your Safety
To prevent personal injury and/or damage to property, be sure to observe the following safety precautions.
The following symbols classify and describe the level of hazard and injury caused when this unit is
operated or handled improperly.
WARNING
This notice means that misuse could result in death
or serious injury.
CAUTION
This notice means that misuse could result in injury
or damage to property.
The following types of symbols are used to classify and describe the type of instructions to be
observed.
This symbol is used to alert users to a specific operating procedure that must not be performed.
This symbol is used to alert users to a specific operating procedure that must be followed in
order to operate the unit safely.
14
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.1.1 For Your Safety
WARNING
For All Telephone Equipment
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Do not allow rain to fall on the product or expose the product to moisture. Do not let water, oils, or other
liquids to splash onto the product. Such conditions can lead to fire or electric shock, and may impair the
performance of the product.
Do not place the product on an unstable or uneven surface. If the product were to fall over, it may cause
injury or damage to the product.
Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate the product where the power cord may be
stepped on or tripped on.
Do not supply power to a combination of devices that exceeds the total rated capacity of the wall outlets
or extension cables used. If outlets, power strips, extension cords, etc. are used in a manner that exceeds
their rated capacity, they emit large amounts of heat, which could cause a fire.
The product must only be installed and serviced by qualified service personnel. The product should be
used as-is from the time of purchase; it should not be disassembled or modified. Disassembly or
modification can cause a fire, electric shock, or damage to the product.
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.
Products that require a power source should only be connected to the type of electrical power supply
specified on the product label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your
dealer or local power company.
For safety purposes some products are equipped with a grounded plug. If you do not have a grounded
outlet, please have one installed. Do not bypass this safety feature by tampering with the plug.
Regularly clean dust off of all equipment. Excessive amounts of dust can lead to fire or electric shock, and
may impair the performance of the product.
Unplug the product from the wall outlet and contact your dealer in the following cases:
a. When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.
b. If liquid has been spilled into the product.
c. If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
d. If the product does not operate according to the operating instructions. Adjust only the controls that are
explained in the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage
and may require service by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal operation.
e. If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
f. If product performance deteriorates.
For the PBX
•
Do not insert foreign objects of any kind into this product, as they may touch dangerous voltage points or
short out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
15
1.1.1 For Your Safety
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
16
Do not pull, bend, rest objects on, or chafe the power cord and plug. Damage to the power cord or plug
can cause fire or electric shock.
Do not attempt to repair the power cord or plug. If the power cord or plug is damaged or frayed, contact
an authorized Panasonic Factory Service Center for a replacement.
When mounting the PBX on a 19-inch rack, only use the 19-inch rack mounting equipment (attachment
bracket, screws) made for use with the PBX.
If damage to the unit exposes any internal parts, disconnect the power supply cord immediately and return
the unit to your dealer.
Unplug this unit from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise. These
conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an authorized
Panasonic Factory Service Center.
This unit is equipped with a grounded plug. For safety reasons this plug must only be connected to a
grounded outlet that has been installed according to applicable regulations.
Plug the power cord firmly into an AC outlet. Otherwise, it can cause fire or electric shock.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.1.1 For Your Safety
CAUTION
For All Telephone Equipment
•
•
The product should be kept free of dust, moisture, high temperature (more than 40 °C [104 °F]), and
vibration, and should not be exposed to direct sunlight.
Unplug the product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Wipe the product with a soft cloth. Do not clean
with abrasive powders or with chemical agents such as benzine or thinner. Do not use liquid cleaners or
aerosol cleaners.
For the PBX
•
•
•
•
•
•
To reduce the risk of fire, use only No.26 AWG or larger (e.g., 24 AWG) UL Listed or CSA Certified
Telecommunication Line Cord.
When relocating the equipment, first disconnect the telecom connection before disconnecting the power
connection. When the unit is installed in the new location, reconnect the power first, and then reconnect
the telecom connection.
The power supply cord is used as the main disconnect device. Ensure that the AC outlet is located near
the equipment and is easily accessible.
Slots and openings in the front, back and bottom of the cabinet are provided for ventilation; to protect it
from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked
by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface while in use. The product should never
be placed near or over a radiator or other heat source. This product should not be placed in a sealed
environment unless proper ventilation is provided.
When this product is no longer in use, make sure to detach it from the rack.
To protect this unit from static electricity, do not touch any external connectors of the unit.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
17
1.1.2 Important Safety Instructions
Notice
For All Telephone Equipment
• Read and understand all instructions.
• When using a Panasonic proprietary telephone (PT), use only the correct Panasonic handset.
For the PBX
• Keep the unit away from heating appliances and devices that generate electrical noise such as
fluorescent lamps, motors and televisions. These noise sources can interfere with the performance of
the PBX.
• If you are having problems making calls to outside destinations, follow this procedure to test the CO
lines:
1. Disconnect the PBX from all CO lines.
2. Connect known working single line telephones (SLTs) to those CO lines.
3. Make a call to an external destination using those SLTs.
If a call cannot be carried out correctly, there may be a problem with the CO line that the SLT is
connected to. Contact your telephone company.
If all SLTs operate properly, there may be a problem with your PBX. Do not reconnect the PBX to the
CO lines until it has been serviced by an authorized Panasonic Factory Service Center.
Note
For All Telephone Equipment
• Never attempt to insert wires, pins, etc. into the vents or holes of the product.
1.1.2 Important Safety Instructions
When using your telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce the risk
of fire, electric shock and injury to persons, including the following:
• Do not use the product near water, for example, near a bathtub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub,
in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.
• Avoid using wired telephones during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from
lightning.
• Do not use a telephone in the vicinity of a gas leak to report the leak.
• Rack Mount Instructions—The following or similar rack-mount instructions are included with the installation
instructions:
a. Elevated Operating Ambient—If installed in a closed or multi-unit rack assembly, the operating ambient
temperature of the rack environment may be greater than room ambient. Therefore, consideration should
be given to installing the equipment in an environment compatible with the maximum ambient temperature
(Tma) specified by the manufacturer.
b. Reliable Earthing—Reliable earthing of rack-mounted equipment should be maintained. Particular attention
should be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit (e.g., use of power
strips).
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
18
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.1.4 Data Security
1.1.3 Precautions
Notice for users in California
This product contains a CR coin cell lithium battery that
contains perchlorate material—special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
1.1.4 Data Security
In order to use the PBX safely and correctly, the Security Requirements below must be observed. Failure to
do so may result in:
• Loss, leakage, falsification or theft of user information.
• Illegal use of the PBX by a third party.
• Interference or suspension of service caused by a third party.
What is User Information?
User Information is defined as:
1. Information stored in the System Memory:
System data, error data and activation key files.
2. Information sent from the PBX to a PC or a USB memory device:
System data, sound files for MOH (Music on Hold) and OGM (Outgoing Messages), and activation key
files.
Requirements
1. The System Memory contains software for all the processes of the PBX and all the customer data.
Therefore, do not allow unauthorized access to prevent data leakage.
2. Always make backups of data stored in the System Memory and/or perform regular system data backups
to a USB memory device or a NAS. For details, consult your dealer.
3. To prevent illegal access from the Internet, activate a Firewall.
4. To avoid unauthorized access and possible abuse of the PBX, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping the password secret.
b. Selecting a complex, random password that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing your password regularly.
5. Perform the following when sending the PBX for repair or handing it over to a third party.
a. Make a backup of data stored in the System Memory.
6. When user information is sent from the PBX to a PC or a USB memory device, the confidentiality of that
information becomes the responsibility of the customer. Before disposing of the PC or the USB memory
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
19
1.1.5 F.C.C. REQUIREMENTS AND RELEVANT INFORMATION
device, ensure that data cannot be retrieved from it by formatting the hard disk and/or rendering it physically
unusable.
1.1.5 F.C.C. REQUIREMENTS AND RELEVANT INFORMATION
1. Notification to the Telephone Company
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
20
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On
the side of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format
US: ACJIS04BKX-NS700. If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company.
Installation must be performed by a qualified professional installer. If required, provide the telephone
company with the following technical information:
• Telephone numbers to which the system will be connected
• Make: Panasonic
• Model: KX-NS700
• Certification No.: found on the side of the unit
• Ringer Equivalence No.: 0.4B
• Facility Interface Code: 02LS2
• Service Order Code: 9.0F
• Required Network Interface Jack: RJ45S
Ringer Equivalence Number (REN)
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that may be connected to a telephone line. Excessive
RENs on a telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call. In most
but not all areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0). To be certain of the number of devices
that may be connected to a line, as determined by the total RENs, contact the local telephone company.
The REN for this product is part of the product identifier that has the format US: ACJIS04BKX-NS700. The
digits represented by 04 are the REN without a decimal point (e.g., 04 is a REN of 0.4). For earlier products,
the REN is separately shown on the label.
Incidence of Harm to the Telephone Lines
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will notify you in advance
that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. But if advance notice isn’t practical, the
telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to
file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
Changes in Telephone Company Communications Facilities, Equipment, Operations and
Procedures
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations or procedures that could
affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens the telephone company will provide advance notice
in order for you to make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service.
Trouble with this equipment
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, for repair or warranty information, please see the attached
warranty, which includes the Service Center Directory. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone
network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is
resolved.
Connection to Party Line
Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public
service commission or corporation commission for information.
Combined Use with Alarm Equipment
If your home has specially wired alarm equipment connected to the telephone line, ensure the installation
of this equipment does not disable your alarm equipment. If you have questions about what will disable
alarm equipment, consult your telephone company or a qualified installer.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.1.5 F.C.C. REQUIREMENTS AND RELEVANT INFORMATION
Note
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference
to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
CAUTION
•
•
Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate this device.
When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to emergency numbers:
1. Remain on the line and briefly explain to the dispatcher the reason for the call before hanging up.
2. Perform such activities in the off-peak hours, such as early morning hours or late evenings.
The software contained in the ARS and TRS features to allow user access to the network must be
upgraded to recognize newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed
into service.
Failure to upgrade the on-premise PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognize the new codes as they
are established will restrict the customer and users of the PBX from gaining access to the network and
to these codes.
KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
21
1.1.6 Before Operating the Telephones
1.1.6 Before Operating the Telephones
What Kind of Telephone Can Be Used?
You can use the following types of telephone with this PBX:
• Panasonic IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT)
(e.g., KX-NT300 series, KX-NT500 series)
• Panasonic Digital Proprietary Telephone (DPT)
(e.g., KX-T7600 series, KX-DT300 series, KX-DT500 series)
• Panasonic Analog Proprietary Telephone (APT)
(e.g., KX-T7700 series)
• Panasonic Portable Station (PS)
(e.g., KX-TD7696, KX-WT125)
• SIP phone
(e.g., KX-UT series SIP phones, Third party SIP phones)
• Single Line Telephone (SLT)
(e.g., rotary pulse telephone)
Which features are available depend on the type of telephone being used. If you are using a Panasonic
telephone with a special feature button such as
or a display or both, you can follow the operations using
the buttons or displayed messages for easy programming.
If you use a large display telephone (e.g., KX-NT346 or KX-T7636), you can follow the displayed messages
to use the features. If your telephone does not have feature buttons and/or a display, you may operate the
PBX by entering a feature number instead. Follow the operation for your type of telephone.
•
If you use a Panasonic
proprietary telephone which does
not have feature buttons, you
may change one of the unused
flexible buttons to a feature
button. Refer to
"3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons".
Registration for your Portable Station (PS)/SIP Phone
Your PS or SIP phone must be registered with the PBX and assigned an extension number before initial use,
through system programming. To confirm the extension number of your PS, refer to "Your extension
information" in "3.1.2 Personal Programming". For SIP phone users, follow the instructions for your phone.
Feature Numbers
To use certain features, you need to enter specified feature numbers (and an additional parameter, if required).
There are two types of feature numbers as follows:
• Flexible feature number
• Fixed feature number
Fixed feature numbers cannot be changed. However, you can change the flexible numbers to other numbers
for easier use. In this manual, the default numbers (factory installed) are used for operations.
(half-shaded key). Use the new programmed number if you have changed
A flexible number is shown as
the feature number. Write the new number in the "Feature Number Table" (Appendix).
22
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.1.6 Before Operating the Telephones
If you use a single line telephone which does not have the " " or "#" keys;
it is not possible to access features that have " " or "#" in their feature numbers.
Tone
You will hear various tones, during or after an operation, for confirmation. Refer to "5.4.1 Tone" (Appendix).
Display
In this manual, "the display ..." refers to the display of a Panasonic telephone. If your telephone is not a
Panasonic display telephone, the message will not be displayed. If you use a Panasonic display telephone,
the display helps you confirm the settings. Some telephones also give you easy access to features. Messages
are displayed according to the feature used. By pressing the corresponding button on the side or at the bottom
of the display, or by pressing the Navigator Key, you can access various features. Furthermore, depending on
the display telephone used, you can operate features or make calls using the displayed message. Refer to
"1.4 Display Features".
Your Extension Number
If you use a Panasonic display proprietary telephone, you can check your own extension number on the display.
Press the TRANSFER button or Soft (S1) button while on-hook.
ECO mode
If you use a KX-NT543, KX-NT546, or KX-NT560 IP-PT in ECO mode, the "ECO" icon is shown on the display
during programming mode (refer to "3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons"). For more information, consult your
dealer.
Using a Navigator Key/Jog Dial/Volume Key
The Navigator Key can be used for the display contrast and the volume control or you can search for desired
items on the display. Press the Navigator Key/Volume Key or rotate the Jog Dial in the desired direction.
The contrast or the volume level and the items will change as follows:
Navigator Key
Up
Up
Up
(Level increases)
(Level increases)
(Level increases)
Left
ENTER
Right
Left
Right
Left
Right
Down
Down
Down
(Level decreases)
(Level decreases)
(Level decreases)
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
23
1.1.6 Before Operating the Telephones
Jog Dial
Volume Key
Up
(Level increases)
Left
(counter-clockwise)
Level decreases
Up
(Level increases)
Right
(clockwise)
Level increases
Down
(Level decreases)
Down
(Level decreases)
Examples
The displays and the illustrations shown as examples are from a telephone connected to the PBX.
Restrictions
Some features may be restricted at your extension depending on system programming and the type of
telephone being used.
24
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.1.6 Before Operating the Telephones
Icon Descriptions
The following icons show you the feature availability, notes and action to use the features.
This feature cannot be used with a
single line telephone.
(CO)
OR
9
See "Programming" for Related
Programming if necessary.
desired no.
OR
8
CO line
group no.
Off-hook (One of the following).
• Lift the handset.
• Press the SP-PHONE button.
• Press the MONITOR button.
(To start talking, lift the
handset.)
• Press TALK button.
Press the Call button on the
Doorphone.
On-hook (One of the following).
• Hang up.
• Press the SP-PHONE button.
• Press the MONITOR button.
• Press CANCEL button.
Press the hookswitch lightly.
Press the corresponding feature
button on the proprietary telephone
or KX-UT series SIP phone.
Talk or make an
announcement.
Enter the required number.
<Example>
You will hear a busy,
confirmation, dial, ring or
ringback tone.
B. Tone: Busy Tone
C. Tone: Confirmation Tone
D. Tone: Dial Tone
R. Tone: Ring Tone
R. B. Tone: Ringback Tone
account code
Enter the account code.
extension no.
phone no.
HOLD
Document Version 2014-08
Seize a CO line (One of the
following).
• Press the CO button.
• Dial automatic line access
number 9.
• Dial CO line group access
number and CO line group
number.
Dial an extension number.
Dial the telephone number.
Press the HOLD button on your SIP
phone.
outside
phone no.
dial key
REDIAL
Dial outside phone number.
Press any dial key (0–9,
, #).
Press the REDIAL button on
your SIP phone.
Operating Manual
25
1.1.6 Before Operating the Telephones
When You Use a Panasonic Proprietary Telephone or KX-UT Series SIP
Phone
Panasonic proprietary telephones and KX-UT series SIP phones have useful feature buttons that simplify some
operations. For details, refer to the "Location of Controls" or equivalent section in the documentation for your
phone.
Customized Buttons
If the term is in parentheses like (Account) in this manual, it means a flexible button has been made into an
"Account" button. For more information, refer to "3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons" when using a PT or PS, or
"Customizing the Flexible Buttons" when using Web Maintenance Console.
Note
For KX-UT series SIP phone users:
• KX-UT113/KX-UT123: Customized buttons are not available.
• Other than KX-UT113/KX-UT123: The following buttons can be customized:
–
–
–
–
–
Single-CO (S-CO)
DN
One-touch Dialing
Log-in/Log-out
DSS
Button
26
–
–
–
–
Headset
Wrap-up
Call Park
Call Park (Automatic Park Zone)
Feature
Loop-CO (L-CO)
Used to access an idle CO line for making outside calls.
Incoming outside calls from any CO line arrive at this button.
Group-CO (G-CO)
Used to access an idle CO line in a specified CO line group for making
outside calls.
Incoming calls from CO lines in the assigned CO line group arrive at this
button.
Single-CO (S-CO)
Used to access a specified CO line for making or receiving outside calls.
Direct Station Selection
(DSS)
Used to access an extension with one touch.
It is also possible to be changed to the other feature button.
For KX-UT series SIP phones (except KX-UT113/KX-UT123), unlike a
One-Touch button, this type of button cannot be used to dial feature
numbers.
One-touch Dialing
Used to access a desired party or system feature with one touch.
Incoming Call Distribution
Group (ICD Group)
Used to access a specified incoming call distribution group for making or
receiving calls.
Message
Used to leave a message waiting indication or call back the party who left
the message waiting indication.
Message for Another
Extension
Used to have a Message button for another extension.
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND)—Both
calls
Used to forward all calls to a specified destination or refuse.
FWD/DND—Outside calls
Used to forward CO line calls to a specified destination or refuse.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.1.6 Before Operating the Telephones
Button
Feature
FWD/DND—Intercom calls
Used to forward intercom calls to a specified destination or refuse.
Group FWD—Both calls
Used to forward all the calls to your group to a specified destination.
Group FWD—Outside calls
Used to forward the CO line calls to your group to a specified destination.
Group FWD—Intercom calls
Used to forward the intercom calls to your group to a specified destination.
Account
Used to enter an account code.
Conference
Used to establish a multiple party conversation.
Terminate
Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without hanging
up.
External Feature Access
(EFA)
Used to access special features offered by a host PBX or a telephone
company.
Call Park
Used to park or retrieve a call in a preset parking zone.
Call Park (Automatic Park
Zone)
Used to park a call in an idle parking zone automatically.
For KX-UT series SIP phones (except KX-UT113/KX-UT123), pressing
this button selects an idle parking zone from among the Call Park (preset
parking zone) buttons configured on the phone. Set both the Call Park
(Automatic Park Zone) button and the Call Park (preset parking zone)
button.
Call Log
Used to show the incoming call information.
Call Log for ICD Group
Used to have a Call Log button for incoming call distribution group.
Log-in/Log-out
Used to switch between the log-in and log-out mode.
Log-in/Log-out of a specified
group
Used to have a Log-in/Log-out button for another incoming call distribution
group.
Log-in/Log-out for all groups
Used to have a Log-in/Log-out button for all groups.
Hurry-up
Used to transfer the longest waiting call in the queue of an incoming call
distribution group to the overflow destination.
Wrap-up
Used to switch the wrap-up status, Ready and Not Ready mode.
System Alarm
Used to confirm a PBX error.
Time Service (Day/Night/
Lunch/Break)
Used to switch the time service mode.
Answer
Used to answer an incoming call.
Release
Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation or to complete
a Call Transfer.
Toll Restriction (TRS)
Used to change the toll restriction level of other extension users
temporarily.
Calling Line Identification
Restriction (CLIR)
Used to switch between the CLIP and CLIR services.
Connected Line Identification
Restriction (COLR)
Used to switch between the COLP and COLR services.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
27
1.1.6 Before Operating the Telephones
Button
28
Feature
Headset
Used to talk using the headset.
Time Service Switching Mode
(Automatic/Manual)
Used to switch the time service mode, Automatic or Manual.
Two-way Record
Used to record a conversation into your own mailbox.
Two-way Transfer
Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specific extension.
One-touch Two-way Transfer
Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specific extension with
one touch.
Live Call Screening (LCS)
Used to monitor your own voice mailbox while an incoming caller is leaving
a message and, if desired, intercept the call.
Voice Mail Transfer
Used to transfer a call to the mailbox of a specified extension. Also used
to access the Unified Messaging system or the voice mail features of a
VPS with one touch.
Network Direct Station
Selection (NDSS)
Used to access an extension connected to other PBXs in the network with
one touch.
CTI
Used to access CTI features.
Check-in
Used to switch the room status of extensions from Check-out to Check-in.
Check-out
Used to switch the room status of extensions from Check-in to Check-out.
Cleaned-up
Used to switch the room status of extensions between Ready and Not
Ready.
Primary Directory Number
(PDN)
Used to make and receive both outside and intercom calls.
Secondary Directory Number
(SDN)
Used to show the current status of another extension, call the extension,
and pick up or transfer calls to it.
Directory Number (DN)
(KX-UT series SIP phones
[except KX-UT113/
KX-UT123] only)
Used to make intercom or outside calls.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.1.6 Before Operating the Telephones
How to Follow the Steps
An example of system operation is shown below.
Calling Another Extension
Feature title
Intercom Call
Telephone types
The abbreviations of
telephone types
are explained in
"Telephone types in
procedures" below.
PT and SLT Extn.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP
extension no.
OR
(DSS)
Off-hook.
Dial extension number
or press DSS.
Talk.
Operation steps
The description of the
icons are explained on
"Icon Descriptions".
The DSS button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: The extension is idle.
Red on: Your or another extension is using the line.
Conditions
To call using a directory, refer to "1.4.3 Directories".
Hints
For quick operation
If you are an operator or dial some extensions frequently, DSS buttons are useful.
Hands-free Operation
You can make an intercom call and have a conversation in hands-free mode using the SPPHONE button (refer to "1.3.32 Hands-free Operation").
Customizing Your Phone
3.1.2 Personal Programming—Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing
Select the seized line when going off-hook.
3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Direct Station Selection (DSS) button.
Programming References: The related or required programming is noted.
Telephone types in procedures
The following abbreviations are displayed at the top left of each procedure and indicate which types of
telephones support the operation. However, in some cases a specific model number is given instead (e.g.,
KX-UT136, KX-UT series).
Abbreviation
PT
Telephone Type
Proprietary Telephone (e.g., KX-NT300 series, KX-NT500 series,
KX-NT265, KX-T7700 series)
DPT
Digital Proprietary Telephone (e.g., KX-T7600 series, KX-DT300 series,
KX-DT500 series)
Display PT
Proprietary Telephone with a Display (e.g. KX-NT346, KX-NT546,
KX-DT346, KX-DT546, KX-T7636)
PS
Document Version 2014-08
Portable Station (e.g., KX-TD7696, KX-WT125)
Operating Manual
29
1.1.6 Before Operating the Telephones
Abbreviation
30
Telephone Type
SIP Extn.
SIP phone (e.g., KX-UT series SIP phones, Third party SIP phones)
SLT
Single Line Telephone
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.1.6 Before Operating the Telephones
Connection Example
This diagram shows you a connection example.
Telephone Company
IP-PBX
SLT
ITSP*1
Network
Private
IP Network
Fax Machine
WAN
PC
DCE*2
(e.g., ADSL
Modem)
Router
CS
PS
Remote PC
Doorphone & Door Opener
APT
IP-PT
External Sensor
IP Softphone,
CA*3 Client PC
SIP Phone
DPT
BGM/Music On Hold (MOH)
DSS
Console
DSS
Console
CTI Server
IP-CS
PS
Voice Processing
System
Pager/ Amplifier
Speaker
PC
*1
*2
*3
ITSP: Internet Telephony Service Provider
DCE: Data Circuit Terminating Equipment
CA: Communication Assistant
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
31
1.2.1 Making Calls
1.2 Basic Operations
1.2.1 Making Calls
–
–
–
Intercom Call
Operator Call
Calling an Outside Party
Intercom Call
You can call another extension user.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
extension no.
OR
(DSS)
OR
Off-hook.
(SDN)
*
Talk.
Dial extension number,
or press DSS or SDN.
•
•
•
•
•
The DSS button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: The extension is idle.
Red on: Your or another extension is using the line.
* You have to press the SDN button once or twice depending on the mode of the SDN button.
For details, refer to "1.3.51 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory
Number) Extension".
To call using a directory, refer to "1.4.3 Directories".
For quick operation
If you are an operator or dial some extensions frequently, DSS buttons are useful.
Hands-free Operation
You can make an intercom call and have a conversation in hands-free mode using the
SP-PHONE button (refer to "1.3.32 Hands-free Operation").
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Personal Programming—Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing
•
32
Select the seized line when going off-hook.
3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Direct Station Selection (DSS) button.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.2.1 Making Calls
Operator Call
You can call an extension or a group assigned as the operator.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0
Off-hook.
Enter 0.
Calling an Outside Party
You have to seize a CO line before dialing an outside phone number because external calls are made via your
PBX.
Select one of the following methods:
Automatic Line Access
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
(L-CO)
outside
phone no.
OR
9
Off-hook.
Press L-CO or
enter automatic
line access number.
Dial outside
phone number.
Talk.
CO Line Group Access
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
(G-CO)
OR
8
Off-hook.
Document Version 2014-08
CO line
group no.
Press G-CO or enter CO line
group access number and then
CO line group number (2 digits).
outside
phone no.
Dial outside phone
number.
Talk.
Operating Manual
33
1.2.2 Answering Calls
S-CO Line Access
PT/PS/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
outside
phone no.
(S-CO)
Off-hook.
•
•
•
•
•
Press S-CO.
Dial outside
phone number.
Talk.
Each of the S-CO button or G-CO button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: The line is idle.
Red on: The line is in use.
You may be restricted from making a call to the specified outside party. To make a call, refer
to "1.3.69 Verification Code Entry" or "1.3.75 Walking COS".
To confirm number before dialing, you can enter a phone number and confirm it on the
display and then go off-hook. (Predialing)
To make a call to another party without going on-hook, press the FLASH/RECALL button.
It will re-access the CO line and provide external dial tone. Pressing the Terminate button
will provide intercom dial tone. You can dial the new phone number without going on/off-hook.
Hands-free Operation
You can make an outside call and have a conversation in hands-free mode using the
SP-PHONE button (refer to "1.3.32 Hands-free Operation").
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Personal Programming—Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing
•
Select the seized line when going off-hook.
3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Loop-CO (L-CO) button, a Group-CO (G-CO) button, a Single-CO (S-CO)
button or a Terminate button.
1.2.2 Answering Calls
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Off-hook.
34
Operating Manual
Talk.
Document Version 2014-08
1.2.2 Answering Calls
•
You can select one of the following methods to answer calls:
– Lift the handset to receive the preferred line.
(Default: Ringing line is selected.)
– Press the SP-PHONE button.
(Refer to "1.3.32 Hands-free Operation".)
– Press the flashing CO, INTERCOM, ICD Group, PDN, SDN, or DN button directly.
– Press the Answer button.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Personal Programming—Preferred Line Assignment—Incoming
•
Select the seized line when going off-hook.
Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice
Select the alerting method, either ring or the other party’s voice.
3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit an Incoming Call Distribution Group (ICD Group), Primary Directory Number
(PDN), or Secondary Directory Number (SDN) button.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
35
1.3.1 Absent Message
1.3 Telephone Features and Operation
1.3.1 Absent Message
You can show the reason you do not answer, if the caller uses a Panasonic display proprietary telephone.
There are eight preprogrammed messages and one for your personal message (16 characters). The selected
message is shown on the display of your telephone. For callers using KX-UT series SIP phones, the message
will not be shown on their display.
Message no.
Message (Example)
1
Will Return Soon
2
Gone Home
3
At Ext %%%% (Extension number)
4
Back at %%:%% (Hour:Minute)
5
Out until %%/%% (Month/Day)
6
In a Meeting
7
8
9
A message assigned for each extension.
(Personal Absent Message)
To set
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Off-hook.
#
7
5
Enter
750.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Will Return Soon
Gone Home
At Ext %%%% +
Back at %%:%% +
Out until %%/%% +
In a Meeting
Extension no.
Hour : Minute
Month / Day
Enter required number.
C.Tone
Enter #.
On-hook.
To cancel
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Off-hook.
36
Operating Manual
7
5
Enter
750.
0
0
Enter 0.
C.Tone
On-hook.
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.2 Account Code Entry
•
Enter the desired value in the "%" positions. You must enter the correct number of characters
as represented by the "%" using 0 to 9 or .
The preprogrammed messages can be changed through system programming.
To create your personal message (Message no. 9), refer to "3.1.2 Personal Programming".
•
•
1.3.2 Account Code Entry
You may give a specified account code to extension users and check their telephone usage. You can specify
an account code for each client and check the call duration.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
(Account)
account code
OR
4
Off-hook.
D.Tone
9
Press Account or
enter 49.
Enter account code
(max. 10 digits).
Enter #.
outside
phone no.
Dial outside
phone number.
Seize a CO line before entering
an outside phone number.
•
•
•
•
•
A Panasonic proprietary telephone extension user can enter an account code during a
conversation and when hearing reorder tone after the other party hangs up.
Account codes may use the digits "0" through "9".
Depending on the settings of your PBX, you may be required to enter an account code to
make an outside call.
If you enter the wrong code, press the " " key and re-enter the account code.
For your convenience, you can store the code with the phone number in the memory (e.g.,
Speed Dialing).
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit an Account button.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
37
1.3.4 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
1.3.3 Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice
The caller can alternate the alerting method, either ring or
voice, when making an intercom call.
On the other hand, any extension can set the alerting
method, either ring or voice, when receiving an intercom call.
Ringing (Default): You can call the other party with a ring
tone.
Voice-calling: You can talk to the other party immediately
after confirmation tone.
Ring
Ring
Hello
OR
To change the method
PT/SLT/PS
After dialing
C.Tone
Enter
.
•
•
•
Talk.
Voice-calling from a SIP extension is not available.
If the called party uses a SIP extension, single line telephone (SLT) or portable station (PS),
Voice-calling is not available.
This feature is not available when the called party’s telephone is in the Voice Call Deny mode.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Personal Programming—Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice
Select the alerting method, either ring or the other party’s voice.
1.3.4 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
If a dialed extension or a desired CO line is busy, you can set the telephone to receive callback ringing:
• when a dialed extension becomes idle.
• when your desired CO line that is in use by another extension becomes idle.
You cannot set Automatic Callback Busy for a busy party outside of the PBX.
When you answer the callback ringing:
• For an outside call: The line is seized.
• For an intercom call: The called extension starts ringing automatically.
38
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.4 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
To set (for both extension and CO line)
PT/SLT/PS
While hearing a busy tone
6
C.Tone
On-hook.
Enter 6.
To answer the callback ringing from an idle extension
PT/SLT/PS
While hearing a callback ringing
R.B.Tone
Talk.
Off-hook.
To answer the callback ringing from an idle CO line
PT/SLT/PS
While hearing a callback ringing
outside
phone no.
Off-hook.
•
Talk.
Dial outside
phone number.
If you do not answer the callback ringing within 10 seconds, this feature will be canceled.
Automatic Callback Busy Cancel
PT/SLT/PS
4
Off-hook.
Document Version 2014-08
Enter
6
46.
C.Tone
On-hook.
Operating Manual
39
1.3.6 Call Hold
1.3.5 BGM (Background Music)
You can listen to the background music through your telephone speaker while on-hook.
An external music source, such as a radio, can be connected.
If your extension becomes busy (off-hook, making or receiving a call etc.), the music
stops temporarily. When you go back on-hook, the music starts again.
To select and set/cancel
PT
BGM no.
7
Off-hook.
•
Enter
5
1
OR
0
Cancel
C.Tone
Enter BGM number
(1 digit) or 0 to cancel.
751.
On-hook.
System programming may be required for some IP-PT users to listen to background music.
1.3.6 Call Hold
There are two types of hold. The difference between them is whether other people can retrieve your held call
(Regular Hold) or not (Exclusive Call Hold). As they can be alternated, ask your manager what the current
mode is.
•
For users of non-KX-UT series SIP phones:
The holding operation for SIP extension users may differ from the steps in this section, and
may vary depending on the type of telephone being used.
Call Hold
PT/PS
During a conversation
OR
C.Tone
5
0
Press HOLD, or press TRANSFER and
then enter 50.
40
Operating Manual
C.Tone
On-hook.
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.6 Call Hold
SLT
During a conversation
5
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
Enter
0
50.
C.Tone
On-hook.
SIP Extn.
During a conversation
OR
HOLD
Press HOLD.
Document Version 2014-08
On-hook.
Operating Manual
41
1.3.6 Call Hold
Call Hold Retrieve
PT/SLT/PS
At the holding extension (Call Hold Retrieve)
(CO)
OR
OR
5
Off-hook.
0
A confirmation
tone is heard.
Press flashing CO or INTERCOM,
or enter 50.
Talk.
To retrieve an outside call from another extension—only Regular Hold
(Call Hold Retrieve–Specified with a held line number)
(CO)
OR
5
Off-hook.
3
Press CO, or enter
held line no.
A confirmation
tone is heard.
Talk.
53 and then held line number (3 digits).
To retrieve an intercom call or outside call from another extension—only Regular Hold
(Call Hold Retrieve–Specified with a holding extension number)
(DSS)
5
1
OR
holding
extension no.
Off-hook.
42
Operating Manual
Enter
51.
Press DSS or dial
holding extension
number.
C.Tone
Talk.
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.6 Call Hold
SIP Extn.
At the holding extension (Call Hold Retrieve)
(S-CO)
OR
(DN)
OR
OR
HOLD
Off-hook.
Talk.
KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670:
Press flashing S-CO or DN.
Other than KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670:
Press HOLD.
To retrieve an outside call from another extension—only Regular Hold
(Call Hold Retrieve–Specified with a held line number)
5
Off-hook.
Enter
held line no.
3
A confirmation
tone is heard.
Dial held line number (3 digits).
53.
Talk.
To retrieve an intercom call or outside call from another extension—only Regular Hold
(Call Hold Retrieve–Specified with a holding extension number)
5
Off-hook.
Document Version 2014-08
Enter
1
51.
holding
extension no.
Dial holding extension
number.
C.Tone
Talk.
Operating Manual
43
1.3.7 Call Monitor
•
For PT users: The CO or INTERCOM button light shows the current status as follows:
– Regular Hold mode
Flashing green slowly: Your held call
Flashing red: Another extension’s held call
– Exclusive Call Hold mode
Flashing green moderately: Your held call
Red on: Another extension’s held call
For KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 SIP phone users: The S-CO button light
shows the current status as follows:
– Regular Hold mode
Flashing green slowly: Your held call
Flashing red: Another extension’s held call
If a call is not retrieved within a specified time, you will hear an alarm as a reminder (Hold
Recall).
If an outside call is not answered within a specified time, it is automatically disconnected.
Hold Mode Change (PT only)
After pressing the HOLD button, if you press the HOLD button again, the status switches
from the Regular Hold mode to the Exclusive Call Hold mode or from the Exclusive Call Hold
mode to the Regular Hold mode.
•
•
•
•
If Automatic Call Hold has been preprogrammed, you can put the current call on hold
automatically by pressing another CO, ICD Group, INTERCOM, or DN button to make or
answer another call.
For the Call Hold Retrieve operation using a PDN/SDN button, refer to "1.3.51 PDN (Primary
Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension".
•
1.3.7 Call Monitor
A preprogrammed extension user can listen to the ongoing conversation of a busy extension user.
After pressing a DSS button, you can check the caller information of the call to another extension on the display.
Then, you can choose to monitor the call, if necessary.
To monitor
PT/SLT/PS
(DSS)
A busy tone is heard and the caller
information of the call to another
extension is displayed.
OR
5
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
Off-hook.
B. Tone
OR
Monitoring starts
C.Tone
Enter 5.
extension no.
Press red DSS, PDN, or SDN, or dial extension number.
•
44
SIP phone users cannot use this feature, but they can be monitored by other extensions.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.8 Call Park
1.3.8 Call Park
You can put a call on hold in a common parking zone of the PBX so that any extension can retrieve the parked
call. You can use this feature as a transferring feature.
A call can be put into either a specified parking zone (Specified) or any idle parking zone (Auto). If a Call Park
button and Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) button have been established, you can select either way to park
by simply pressing the corresponding button.
When a call is parked automatically, or more than one call has been parked at the same time, you need to
specify the parking zone number to retrieve the required call.
To set
PT/PS/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
During a conversation
(Call Park)
Press Call Park.
PT/PS
During a conversation
parking zone no. Specified
5
2
OR
C.Tone
Auto
Press TRANSFER.
Enter
52.
Enter a specified parking
zone number (2 digits) or press
to park at an idle parking zone
automatically.
On-hook.
If you hear a busy tone, enter another
parking zone number or press again.
SLT
During a conversation
5
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
Enter
2
52.
parking zone no.
C.Tone
Enter a specified parking
zone number (2 digits).
On-hook.
If you hear a busy tone, enter another
parking zone number.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
45
1.3.9 Call Pickup
Call Park Retrieve
PT/PS/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
(Call Park)
Press a flashing Call Park.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
5
Off-hook.
Enter
•
•
•
•
•
•
2
52.
stored parking
zone no.
Dial stored parking
zone number (2 digits).
C.Tone
Talk.
If a call is parked automatically, confirm the parking zone number on the display.
If a call is not retrieved within a specified time, you will hear an alarm as a reminder
(Call Park Recall).
If an outside call is not answered within a specified time, it is automatically disconnected.
For SIP phone users: Any SIP phone user can retrieve a parked call, but only
KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 SIP phone users can put a call into a
parking zone.
The Call Park button light shows the current status as follows:
Flashing red (for PT): You or another extension has a call parked.
Flashing red (for KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670): Another extension
has a call parked.
Flashing green (for KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670): You have a call
parked.
If you hear a reorder tone when retrieving a parked call, there is no held call. Confirm
the stored parking zone number.
After you park a call, you can perform other operations.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Call Park button or Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) button.
1.3.9 Call Pickup
–
–
–
46
Call Pickup
Call Pickup Group Monitor
Call Pickup Deny
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.9 Call Pickup
Call Pickup
You can answer an incoming call that is ringing at another extension or group from your phone without leaving
your desk.
The following types of pickup are available:
Group Call Pickup: Picks up a call within your group.
Directed Call Pickup: Picks up a specified extension’s call.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
4
0
group no.
Group
OR
C.Tone
4
Off-hook.
1
extension no.
Directed
Talk.
Enter 40 and then group number (2 digits).
Or enter 41 and then extension number.
Caller Information Display before Call Pickup using DSS button
Depending on system programming, you can confirm the caller information of a call to another extension using
the DSS button before picking up the call. Pressing the corresponding DSS button will call the extension
receiving the call rather than picking up the call. While hearing the busy tone, you can check the caller
information on the display. You can pick up the call by pressing the same DSS button again.
PT/PS
(DSS)
A busy tone is heard and the caller
information of the call to another
extension is displayed.
Press flashing DSS.
Off-hook.
•
(DSS)
Press DSS again.
Talk.
If you receive a call waiting tone, you can ask a third party to pick up your second call
with Directed Call Pickup.
Call Pickup Group Monitor
Depending on system programming, PT users such as colleagues can view the caller information of a call to
another extension which belongs to the same call pickup group. The user can view the caller’s information on
the LCD while their PT is idle. You can pick up the call by pressing the ANSWER soft button.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
47
1.3.10 Call Splitting
To pickup a call
PT
While displaying monitoring information for a call pickup group
ANSWER
Talk.
Press ANSWER.
•
Available telephones are as follows:
– IP-PTs*1
– DPTs*1
*1
•
Except models with a single line display.
While the caller information is displayed on the LCD, going off-hook will not answer the call.
Call Pickup Deny
You can deny or allow other people to pick up your calls.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
1
7
Off-hook.
Enter
2
720.
0
Deny
OR
0
Allow
Enter 1 to deny
or 0 to allow.
C.Tone
On-hook.
1.3.10 Call Splitting
When talking to one party while the other party is on hold, you can swap the calls back and forth (alternately).
•
48
KX-UT series SIP phone users: You cannot leave the conversation and let the two remaining
parties talk.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.10 Call Splitting
To alternate between the parties leaving one party on hold temporarily
PT/PS/KX-UT series
During a conversation
(DSS)
OR
C.Tone
extension no.
Press
TRANSFER.
Press DSS or dial the other
party's extension number.
Talk to the
other party.
Press
TRANSFER.
For KX-UT670:
Press Swap.
Talk to the
original party.
The other party will be on hold.
SLT
During a conversation
extension no.
C.Tone
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
Dial the other party's
extension number.
Talk to the
other party.
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
Talk to the
original party.
The other party will be on hold.
KX-UT113/KX-UT123
During a conversation
C.Tone
Press HOLD.
extension no.
Dial the other
party's extension
number.
Talk to the
other party.
Press HOLD.
Talk to the
original party.
The other party will be on hold.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
49
1.3.10 Call Splitting
KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
During a conversation
C.Tone
Press HOLD.
extension no.
Dial the other
party's extension
number.
Talk to the
other party.
Press HOLD.
This step can be omitted if Automatic
Call Hold is enabled on your telephone.
(DN)
OR
(S-CO)
Talk to the
original party.
Press the flashing DN
or S-CO.
The other party will be on hold.
To leave the conversation and then let the two parties talk
PT/PS
During a conversation
(DSS)
OR
C.Tone
Press
TRANSFER.
extension no.
Press DSS or dial the other
party's extension number.
Talk to the
other party.
Press
TRANSFER.
On-hook.
SLT
During a conversation
OR
OR
C.Tone
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
50
Operating Manual
extension no.
Dial the other party's
extension number.
Talk to the
other party.
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
On-hook.
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.11 Call Transfer
1.3.11 Call Transfer
–
–
–
Transferring to an Extension in the PBX
Transferring to an Outside Party Using the PBX Service
Transferring to an Outside Party Using the SIP Service
•
•
You can transfer a held call without talking, and go on-hook even if the transferred party
does not answer the call.
If a transferred call is not answered within a specified time, it will ring at a
preprogrammed extension, if set, or at your extension again. If you are off-hook at that
time, you will hear an alarm tone. If an outside call is not answered within a specified
time, it is automatically disconnected.
For users of non-KX-UT series SIP phones:
– Even if your telephone has a TRANSFER button, you cannot use it to transfer calls.
Please make sure to use the HOLD button.
– The transfer operation for SIP Extension users may differ from the steps in this
section, and may vary depending on the type of telephone being used.
– Blind Transfer
Blind Transfer may be available on your phone. For details about using Blind
Transfer, refer to the documentation for your SIP phone. (This feature is not
available when transferring to an outside party using the SIP service.)
Transferring to an Extension in the PBX
To transfer
PT/PS
During a conversation
(DSS)
C.Tone
OR
extension no.
On-hook.
Talk.
Press TRANSFER.
Press DSS or dial
extension number.
This step can be omitted.
SLT
During a conversation
C.Tone
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
extension no.
Dial extension
number.
Talk.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
51
1.3.11 Call Transfer
SIP Extn.
During a conversation
OR
C.Tone
HOLD
*
extension no.
KX-UT series
only.
KX-UT series:
Press TRANSFER.
Other than KX-UT series:
Press HOLD.
•
•
•
Dial extension number.
Talk.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted
(KX-UT series only).
* For SIP phone users, instead of going on-hook, if you press the TRANSFER button
(KX-UT series [except KX-UT670]), Transfer Cancel button (KX-UT670) once, or the
HOLD button (non-KX-UT series) once or twice (depending on the telephone being
used), you can return to the held call. The call with the transferred party will be
disconnected.
For all types of telephone users, if the call is not transferred within a specified time, you
will hear an alarm (Transfer Recall).
For the transfer operation using an SDN button, refer to "1.3.51 PDN (Primary Directory
Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension".
To transfer with one touch (One-touch Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation with an outside party
(DSS)
Press DSS.
Talk.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted.
•
52
Operating Manual
System programming is required to use the One-touch Transfer feature during a
conversation with an extension.
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.11 Call Transfer
Transferring to an Outside Party Using the PBX Service
Some extensions may be restricted from performing this feature.
PT/PS
During a conversation
CO line
C.Tone
Press TRANSFER.
Seize CO line.
outside
phone no.
Dial outside
phone number.
Talk.
On-hook.
Talk.
On-hook.
SLT
During a conversation
CO line
C.Tone
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
Seize CO line.
outside
phone no.
Dial outside
phone number.
SIP Extn.
During a conversation
OR
HOLD
KX-UT series:
Press TRANSFER.
Other than KX-UT series:
Press HOLD.
Document Version 2014-08
C.Tone
CO line
*
outside
phone no.
KX-UT series
only.
Seize CO line.
Dial outside phone
number.
Talk.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted
(KX-UT series only).
Operating Manual
53
1.3.11 Call Transfer
•
•
•
* For SIP phone users, instead of going on-hook, if you press the TRANSFER button
(KX-UT series [except KX-UT670]), Transfer Cancel button (KX-UT670) once, or the
HOLD button (non-KX-UT series) once or twice (depending on the telephone being
used), you can return to the held call. The call with the transferred party will be
disconnected.
Time limit
Both the caller and the transferred party will hear an alarm tone fifteen seconds before
a specified time period, and the call will be disconnected.
To return to the held call before the destination answers, press the TRANSFER
button, corresponding CO, ICD Group, INTERCOM, or DN button, or the hookswitch.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Direct Station Selection (DSS) button.
Transferring to an Outside Party Using the SIP Service
To transfer a call with announcement (Attended Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation
TRANSFER
C.Tone
Press TRANSFER.
CO line
outside
phone no.
Seize CO line.
Dial outside phone
number.
Talk.
On-hook.
SLT
During a conversation
C.Tone
Press Recall/hookswitch.
54
Operating Manual
CO line
Seize CO line.
outside
phone no.
Dial outside phone
number.
Talk.
On-hook.
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.12 CALL WAITING FEATURES
To transfer a call without announcement (Blind Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation
TRANSFER
6
C.Tone
Press
TRANSFER.
Enter
outside
phone no.
1
61.
Dial outside phone
number.
Enter #.
On-hook.
SLT
During a conversation
C.Tone
6
Enter
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
•
•
1
61.
outside
phone no.
Dial outside phone
number.
Enter #.
On-hook.
The availability of this feature depends on your SIP service provider.
You cannot return to the held call after dialing the destination’s number.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a One-touch Dialing button, store the Blind Transfer feature number.
1.3.12 CALL WAITING FEATURES
–
–
–
Call Waiting (BSS [Busy Station Signaling])
Answering Call Waiting in the PBX
Answering Call Waiting from the Telephone Company
Call Waiting (BSS [Busy Station Signaling])
For a caller
You can inform a busy extension user that your call is waiting.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
55
1.3.12 CALL WAITING FEATURES
To send a call waiting
PT/SLT/PS
While hearing a busy tone
1
Enter 1.
•
•
Depending on the type of the other party’s telephone, you may be able to talk to the
other party using the speaker and the microphone (Off-hook Call Announcement
[OHCA]), or you can send a call announcement through the handset (Whisper OHCA),
if they are having another conversation using the handset. For more details on each
feature, refer to "1.3.13 Call Waiting Tone", "1.3.46 OHCA (Off-hook Call
Announcement)", or "1.3.78 Whisper OHCA".
Depending on system programming and the called extension’s setting, a call waiting
tone may be sent automatically without performing the operation above.
For a called extension
A call waiting notification is sent to the busy extension user to notify him or her that a new incoming call is
waiting. The extension can then answer the second call by either disconnecting the current call or placing it
on hold.
One of the following notification methods can be assigned for each extension, depending on the type of
telephone being used. (Default: Call Waiting Tone)
• Call Waiting Tone: A call waiting tone is heard through the built-in speaker of PT or handset of SLT (®
1.3.13 Call Waiting Tone).
• Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA): The caller’s voice is heard through the built-in speaker (®
1.3.46 OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement)).
• Whisper OHCA: The caller’s voice is heard through the handset (® 1.3.78 Whisper OHCA).
Answering Call Waiting in the PBX
During a conversation, a call waiting tone or voice announcement through the speaker or the handset occurs
when an outside call has been received or another extension is letting you know a call is waiting. You must
activate this feature to use it. (Default: Call Waiting Tone)
You can answer the second call by disconnecting (1) or holding (2) the current call.
1. To disconnect the current call and then talk to the new party
PT/SLT/PS/KX-UT series
While hearing a tone
On-hook.
56
Operating Manual
Off-hook.
Talk to the
new party.
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.12 CALL WAITING FEATURES
2. To hold the current call and then talk to the new party
PT/PS
(CO)
While hearing a tone
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
Press HOLD.
Talk to the
new party.
(SDN)
OR
Disregard this step if both
parties are extensions.
Press CO, ICD Group,
PDN, SDN, or INTERCOM.
SLT
While hearing a tone
0
5
Press Recall/hookswitch.
Enter
50.
C.Tone
Talk to the
new party.
KX-UT113/KX-UT123
While hearing a tone
C.Tone
Press HOLD.
Document Version 2014-08
Talk to the new party.
Operating Manual
57
1.3.12 CALL WAITING FEATURES
KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
While hearing a tone
(DN)
C.Tone
OR
(S-CO)
Press HOLD.
Talk to the new party.
Press the flashing DN,
or S-CO.
After talking to the new party (second call), you can disconnect (2.1) or hold (2.2) it and then retrieve
the first call.
2.1 To disconnect the second call and then talk to the original party
PT/PS
During a conversation
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
On-hook.
Off-hook.
Talk to the
original party.
(SDN)
OR
Press CO, ICD Group, PDN,
SDN, or INTERCOM.
KX-UT113/KX-UT123
During a conversation
On-hook.
58
Operating Manual
Off-hook.
Press HOLD.
Talk to the
original party.
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.12 CALL WAITING FEATURES
KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
During a conversation
(DN)
OR
(S-CO)
Off-hook.
On-hook.
Talk to the
original party.
Press the flashing DN or S-CO.
PT/SLT/PS
During a conversation
0
5
On-hook.
Off-hook.
Enter
C.Tone
Talk to the
original party.
50.
2.2 To hold the second call and then talk to the original party
After holding it, you can talk to the original party. Then, you can disconnect it and then talk to the new party
again.
PT/PS
During a conversation
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
Press HOLD.
(SDN)
OR
Press CO, ICD Group,
PDN, SDN, or INTERCOM.
Disregard this step if both
parties are extensions.
Talk to the
original party.
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
OR
On-hook.
Off-hook.
Talk to the
new party.
Press CO, ICD Group,
PDN, SDN, or INTERCOM.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
59
1.3.12 CALL WAITING FEATURES
KX-UT113/KX-UT123
During a conversation
Press HOLD.
Talk to the
original party.
On-hook.
Off-hook.
Press HOLD.
Talk to the
new party.
KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
During a conversation
(DN)
OR
(S-CO)
Press HOLD.
Press the flashing DN or S-CO.
Talk to the
original party.
(DN)
OR
(S-CO)
On-hook.
Off-hook.
Press the flashing DN or S-CO.
Talk to the
new party.
SLT
During a conversation
0
5
C.Tone
Press Recall/hookswitch.
Enter
Talk to the
original party.
50.
5
On-hook.
60
Operating Manual
Off-hook.
Enter
0
50.
C.Tone
Talk to the
new party.
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.12 CALL WAITING FEATURES
•
•
Depending on the type of your telephone, you may be able to talk to the other party
using the speaker and the microphone (Off-hook Call Announcement [OHCA]), or you
can receive an announcement through the handset (Whisper OHCA), if you are having
a conversation using the handset. For more details on each feature, refer to "1.3.13 Call
Waiting Tone", "1.3.46 OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement)", or "1.3.78 Whisper
OHCA".
The caller’s name or number is displayed for five seconds in fifteen second intervals
while waiting to be answered.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Personal Programming—Call Waiting Tone Type Selection
If you select "Tone 1", you will hear the same tone for Call Waiting from an outside party
and an extension. If you select "Tone 2", you will hear different tones for Call Waiting
from an outside party and an extension.
15 s
Default
(Tone 1)
5s
Special Tones
(Tone 2)
OR
•
Only tone 1 is available for KX-UT series SIP phones.
Answering Call Waiting from the Telephone Company
This is an optional telephone company service. You can receive a call waiting tone with the caller’s name or
telephone number information. For details, consult your telephone company.
PT/PS/KX-UT series
While hearing a tone
PT/SLT/PS
While hearing a tone
OR
OR
OR
6
0
(EFA)
Press FLASH/RECALL
or EFA.
•
•
•
Document Version 2014-08
Press TRANSFER
or Recall/hookswitch.
Enter
60.
To return to the original party, repeat the operation.
In this case, the FLASH/RECALL button on a proprietary telephone or KX-UT series
SIP phone must be set to External Feature Access (EFA) mode through system
programming.
The caller’s telephone number will not be displayed on telephones or wireless phones
connected to SLT ports.
Operating Manual
61
1.3.14 Character Entry
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit an External Feature Access (EFA) button.
1.3.13 Call Waiting Tone
During a conversation, you can be informed of a waiting call with a call waiting tone through the built-in speaker
of your PT or the handset of your SLT.
To set/cancel for intercom calls (Manual Call Waiting)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0
7
3
1
1
Off-hook.
Enter
No call
OR
Tone
C.Tone
On-hook.
Enter 0 or 1.
731.
To set/cancel for outside calls (Automatic Call Waiting)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0
7
3
2
OR
1
Off-hook.
Enter
732.
No tone
Tone
Enter 0 or 1.
C.Tone
On-hook.
•
To change the tone from a PT, refer to "3.1.2 Personal Programming".
•
For information about answering a waiting call, refer to "1.3.12 CALL WAITING
FEATURES".
1.3.14 Character Entry
You can enter the following characters. The tables show you the characters available for each button. Table
1 or Table 2 can be programmed.
62
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.14 Character Entry
Table 1 (Standard mode)
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
63
1.3.14 Character Entry
Table 2 (Option mode)
<Example> To enter "Ann"
n
A
2
6
(5 times)
n
6
OR
(5 times)
Note
•
To erase the character on the cursor, press CLEAR.
•
To move the cursor to the left, press
.
•
To move the cursor to the right, press
. When entering two or more characters that use the same
•
•
64
button consecutively (e.g. "G" and "I"), you must press this button or the FWD/DND button after entering
the first character.
If the SELECT button is pressed, the characters for each button will be displayed in reverse order.
To toggle between Table 1 and Table 2 when using a KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321)/
KX-NT500 series telephone, press the leftmost soft button.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.15 Conference
1.3.15 Conference
–
–
Conference
Leaving Three-party Conference
Conference
You can add one or more parties to your conversation.
•
For KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 SIP phone users:
When you press the CONFERENCE/CONF/Conference button for the first time to
establish a conference call, the DN/S-CO button for the call will turn off and a new DN
button will light green for the conference call. Even if you add more parties, only the
newly lit DN button is lit up for the call.
To establish a conference call
PT/PS
During a conversation
OR
C.Tone
Press CONF
or TRANSFER.
desired
phone no.
Dial desired
phone number.
C.Tone
Talk to the
new party.
Talk with
multiple parties.
Press CONF.
Seize a CO line before dialing
an outside phone number.
KX-UT series
During a conversation
C.Tone
Press CONFERENCE.
desired
phone no.
Dial desired phone
number.
Seize a CO line before dialing
an outside phone number.
Document Version 2014-08
C.Tone
Talk to the
new party.
Press CONFERENCE.
Talk with multiple
parties.
For KX-UT670:
Press Start Conference.
Operating Manual
65
1.3.15 Conference
PT/PS
During a conversation
desired
phone no.
Press TRANSFER.
Dial desired
phone number.
3
Talk to the
new party.
Press TRANSFER.
C.Tone
Enter 3.
Seize a CO line before dialing
an outside phone number.
Talk with multiple parties.
SLT
During a conversation
desired
phone no.
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
Dial desired
phone number.
3
Talk to the
new party.
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
C.Tone
Enter 3.
Seize a CO line before dialing
an outside phone number.
Talk with multiple parties.
66
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.15 Conference
To establish a conference call when receiving a call from an outside party during a two-party
conversation
PT/PS
(CO)
During a conversation
OR
(ICD Group)
(CO)
OR
OR
Press HOLD.
(PDN)
OR
(PDN)
OR
OR
(SDN)
(SDN)
Talk to the
new party.
Press the flashing CO,
PDN, or SDN.
OR
Press CONF
or TRANSFER.
Press the flashing CO, ICD Group,
PDN, SDN, or INTERCOM
corresponding to the
original party.
OR
C.Tone
3
Talk to the
original party.
Press CONF, or press TRANSFER
and then enter 3.
Talk with
multiple parties.
To add four or more parties to a conference
PT/PS/KX-UT series
During a conversation
To continue
desired
phone no.
Press CONF.
Dial desired
phone number.
Seize a CO line before dialing
an outside phone number.
Document Version 2014-08
C.Tone
Talk.
Press CONF.
Talk.
For KX-UT670:
Press Start Conference.
Operating Manual
67
1.3.15 Conference
To add another party on hold to a conference
PT/PS
During a 3- to 7-party conference
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
C.Tone
OR
(PDN)
Press CONF.
OR
Press CONF.
Talk with
multiple parties.
(SDN)
Press the flashing CO, ICD Group,
PDN, or SDN corresponding to
the party on hold.
To talk to two parties alternately in a three-party conversation
PT/PS
During a conversation
Press TRANSFER.
SLT
During a conversation
Press Recall/hookswitch.
68
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.15 Conference
To disconnect one party and then talk to the other in a three-party conversation
PT/PS
During a conversation
(CO)
OR
(ICD Group)
*
OR
(PDN)
OR
Press TRANSFER once
or twice to establish a
conversation with the
party to be disconnected.
The other party will be put on hold.
•
•
•
•
•
•
(SDN)
Press
FLASH/RECALL.
Talk.
OR
Press the flashing CO, ICD Group,
PDN, SDN, or INTERCOM
corresponding to the original party.
* In this case, the FLASH/RECALL button on a proprietary telephone must be set to
Flash/Recall mode through system programming.
During a three-party conversation, pressing the TRANSFER button or Recall/
hookswitch alternates between the two other parties in the conversation.
You can have a conference with a maximum of eight parties (comprising intercom or
CO lines) simultaneously.
During a conversation involving four or more parties, you cannot disconnect one party
and maintain the conversation with the other parties.
Non-KX-UT series SIP phone users cannot originate a conference call, but can be
added as a member.
When a KX-UT series SIP phone user originates a conference call and one of the other
parties leaves the conference, the KX-UT series SIP phone user will still be able to talk
to the remaining party but will not be able to hold the call.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Conference button.
Leaving Three-party Conference
The person who originated a conference with two other parties can leave the conference, and allow the other
parties to continue the conversation.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
69
1.3.16 Conference, Unattended
To leave a conference involving at least one other extension
PT/SLT/PS/KX-UT series
During a three-party conference
On-hook.
To leave a conference involving two outside parties
PT/PS
During a three-party conference
On-hook.
Press TRANSFER.
SLT
During a three-party conference
Press Recall/hookswitch.
•
On-hook.
To leave a conference call involving two outside parties and have the conversation continue,
your extension must be enabled to transfer calls to CO lines through COS programming.
1.3.16 Conference, Unattended
The person who originated a conference can leave the conference, and allow the other parties
to continue the conversation.
•
70
Operating Manual
KX-UT series SIP phone users: If you originated a conference, you cannot leave the
conference and allow the other parties to continue the conversation. When you go
on-hook, the conference is terminated and the other parties are disconnected.
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.16 Conference, Unattended
To leave a conference
PT/PS
During a 3- to 7-party conference
Press CONF.
On-hook.
To return while others are talking
PT/PS
OR
OR
(CO)
(ICD Group)
OR
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
Press flashing green CO, ICD Group, PDN, SDN, or INTERCOM.
To complete a conversation
PT/PS
During a conversation
On-hook.
•
Time limit
Both parties will hear an alarm tone before a specified timeout. The originating extension user
will hear an alarm tone before timeout. The call is disconnected when the timer runs out
unless the originating extension returns to the conference.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Conference button.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
71
1.3.17 Conference Group Call
1.3.17 Conference Group Call
You can call multiple parties, assigned as members of a group (conference group), and establish a multiple
party conversation with the called parties. You can make a conference group call to both extensions and CO
lines (including analog lines). The following two modes are available:
• Conference Mode: the called parties can join the conversation automatically. (
Conference Mode)
• Broadcast Mode: the called parties can hear the caller’s voice announcement, and then be allowed to
Broadcast Mode)
join the conversation by the caller. (
•
•
•
If you dial a conference group number that is in use for another conversation, you will hear
a busy tone and cannot establish a multiple party conversation.
If you fail to seize idle CO lines necessary for all members assigned in the conference group,
you will hear a reorder tone and cannot make a conference group call.
When making a conference group call to an outside party, the CLIP number for that call will
be the one you select for making calls to a CO line. Refer to "1.3.54 Private Network
Features—CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)".
Conference Mode
If this mode is selected through system programming, the called parties can join the conversation simply by
going off-hook. The caller can end the conversation with a specific party manually.
To make/answer a conference group call
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Caller
3
Enter
Off-hook.
2
32.
Wait for an
answer.
*
conference
group no.
entry code
Dial conference
group number
(1 digit).
Enter entry code
(max. 8 digits).
C.Tone
Talk.
Enter #.
A multiple party
conversation
is now established.
Any Telephone
Called Party
The telephone
rings.
Off-hook.
72
Operating Manual
Talk.
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.17 Conference Group Call
•
•
•
•
•
•
* If you do not enter an entry code when making the conference group call, extensions/outside
telephones can join the conversation without needing to enter an entry code.
Entry codes can consist of the digits "0" through "9". When " " is used for an entry code, no
one can join a conversation that is already in progress. " " must be used by itself (i.e., you
may not combine it with numeric digits). For details, refer to "
Join After Time Out".
A conversation can be established with a maximum of 8 parties (including the caller).
If the Hands-free Answerback feature is enabled, the called extension can answer the
conference group call without going off-hook. KX-UT series SIP phones do not support the
Hands-free Answerback feature for a conference group call.
With PTs and KX-WT125/KX-TCA185/KX-TCA285/KX-TCA385 PSs, a conference group
call can be automatically answered without going off-hook. This mode is selected through
system programming.
If using an SLT or SIP phone, the caller can only originate a conference group call and cannot
control the called parties’ call status manually.
For a caller
To end a conversation with a specific party
PT/PS
During a conversation
To end a conversation with a specific party
(DSS)
Press DSS.
To end a conversation with the party who
joined the conversation last
Press TRANSFER.
To disconnect the party who joined the
conversation last from the conference group call
Press FLASH/RECALL.
•
In this case, the FLASH/RECALL button must be set to Flash/Recall mode through system
programming.
Broadcast Mode
If this mode is selected through system programming, the caller can call multiple parties in a conference group,
make a voice announcement, and then establish a multiple party conversation with the called parties. This
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
73
1.3.17 Conference Group Call
conversation will be heard by all called parties. Called parties can listen to the announcement simply by going
off-hook. They can send a notification tone if they want to join the conversation.
To make/answer a conference group call
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Caller
3
Enter
Off-hook.
2
32.
Wait for an
answer.
*
conference
group no.
entry code
Dial conference
group number
(1 digit).
Enter entry code
(max. 8 digits).
C.Tone
Enter #.
Announce.
Any Telephone
Called Party
The telephone
rings.
Off-hook.
•
•
•
•
•
* If you do not enter an entry code when making the conference group call, extensions/outside
telephones can join the conversation without needing to enter an entry code.
Entry codes can consist of the digits "0" through "9". When " " is used for an entry code, no
one can join a conversation that is already in progress. " " must be used by itself (i.e., you
may not combine it with numeric digits). For details, refer to "
Join After Time Out".
With PTs and KX-WT125/KX-TCA185/KX-TCA285/KX-TCA385 PSs, a conference group
call can be automatically answered without going off-hook. This mode is selected through
system programming.
If the Hands-free Answerback feature is enabled, the called extension can answer the
conference group call without going off-hook. KX-UT series SIP phones do not support the
Hands-free Answerback feature for a conference group call.
If using an SLT or SIP phone, the caller can only originate a conference group call and cannot
control the called parties’ call status manually.
For a caller
74
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.17 Conference Group Call
To make a conversation with a specific party
PT/PS
During an announcement
(DSS)
Press DSS.
To make a conversation with a party in the group’s preassigned order
PT/PS
During an announcement
Press CONF.
•
When you press the CONFERENCE/CONF/Conference button after pressing a DSS Key,
you will make a conversation with the party who registered after the current party on call in
the Conference Group.
To end a conversation with a specific party
PT/PS
During a conversation
To end a conversation with a specific party
(DSS)
Press DSS.
To end a conversation with the party who
joined the conversation last
Press TRANSFER.
To disconnect the party who joined the
conversation last from the conference group call
Press FLASH/RECALL.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
75
1.3.17 Conference Group Call
•
In this case, the FLASH/RECALL button must be set to Flash/Recall mode through system
programming.
If the maximum number of parties who can actively participate in the conversation is set to
32 through system programming, the keys on the conference originator’s telephone (DSS,
CONFERENCE, TRANSFER, FLASH, etc.) will not function.
•
For a called extension
To send a notification tone to the caller and join a conversation
PT/SLT/PS
Called Party
During an announcement
(DSS)
Press DSS
corresponding
to the caller.
OR
Wait for reply.
Talk.
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
PT/PS
Caller
During an announcement
A notification tone
occurs, and the display
shows the called party's
information.
(DSS)
Press
corresponding
DSS.
Talk.
Introduce the called party to
the conversation.
•
A maximum of 32 parties (including the caller) can join the conference. Also, depending on
system settings, a maximum of 32 parties (including the caller) can join the conversation.
•
Push-to-Talk for PT/SLT/PS users
If the Broadcast Mode and this mode are selected through system programming, the called
PT/SLT/PS users can join the conversation by pressing any dial key (0–9, , #) during the
voice announcement.
By assigning PSs with the Hands-free Answerback feature enabled to a conference group,
the caller can create a wireless paging system. All of the called PS users, with the Hands-free
Answerback feature enabled, will hear the voice announcement. Then, any PS user can
respond by pressing any dial key, and their reply will be heard by all of the called parties.
76
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.17 Conference Group Call
Join After Time Out
Extensions or outside telephones can join the multiple party conversation that has been already started using
this feature. For example, if the conference group members fail to answer when a conference group call is
made, they can join the multiple party conversation later using this feature. They can join the conversation from
outside telephones (through DISA or TIE Line) or extensions. This feature is available for both modes:
Conference Mode and Broadcast Mode.
For security reasons, you can set a specific entry code for the conference group call. To join the conversation,
extensions/outside telephones have to enter the same entry code. Therefore, you have to inform the parties
to be added to the conversation of the entry code in advance.
For an extension originating the conversation
To make a conference group call with an entry code
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
3
Off-hook.
Enter
2
32.
conference
group no.
Dial conference
group number (1 digit).
entry code
*
Enter entry code
(max. 8 digits).
Wait for an
answer.
C.Tone
Enter #.
Document Version 2014-08
Talk.
Operating Manual
77
1.3.18 Data Line Security
For an extension joining the conversation
To join a conversation with an entry code
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
3
Enter
Off-hook.
conference
group no.
2
32.
Enter #.
Dial conference
group number (1 digit).
entry code
*
Enter entry code
(max. 8 digits).
C.Tone
Enter #.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Talk.
* If you do not enter an entry code when making the conference group call, extensions/outside
telephones can join the conversation without needing to enter an entry code.
Entry codes can consist of the digits "0" through "9". When " " is used for an entry code, no
one can join a conversation that is already in progress.
When you are using an outside telephone (through DISA or TIE Line), it is possible to join
the conversation after accessing your extension using Walking COS.
Extensions/outside telephones can join the conversation using this feature only when the
conference group call has already been established between the extension originating a
conversation and at least one member.
To join a conversation that is already in progress, extensions/outside telephones must be
using an idle extension with no held calls.
If a conversation has reached the maximum number of participants, this feature cannot be
used to join the conversation.
Starting a Conference Group Call using Hands-free Answerback
If the Hands-free Answerback feature is enabled with at least one conference group member,
the call can be automatically answered and the conversation begins with only one participant
(the caller). Then, up to 6 participants can use the Join After Time Out feature to join the
conversation.
1.3.18 Data Line Security
You can protect the line against audible notification tones, such as a call waiting tone during a conversation.
Set this feature if your extension has a data communication device, such as a PC or fax machine connected
to ensure secure data transmission.
78
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.19 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
To set/cancel
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
1
7
Off-hook.
Enter
3
730.
0
Set
OR
0
Cancel
Enter 1 to set
or 0 to cancel.
C.Tone
On-hook.
1.3.19 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
–
Calling through DISA
Calling through DISA
When outside callers access extensions in the PBX, a
prerecorded message greets the caller and gives information
about how to access an extension. You do not need the
operator’s assistance.
You may be able to access system features or call an outside
party with your password depending on the security mode.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
79
1.3.19 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
To call an extension
From Outside Telephone
PIN: Personal Identification Number
In No Security Mode/Trunk Security Mode
DISA
phone no.
desired
extension no.
R.B.Tone &
DISA message
Off-hook.
Dial desired
extension number.
Dial DISA
phone number.
In All Security Mode*
DISA
phone no.
Off-hook.
your
extension no.
4
R.B.Tone &
DISA message
OR
verification
code
Enter
Dial DISA
phone number.
7
47.
Dial your extension number,
or enter and then verification
code.
extension PIN
OR
verification code PIN
Enter extension PIN or
verification code PIN
(max.10 digits).
80
Operating Manual
C.Tone &
D.Tone
desired
extension no.
Dial desired
extension number.
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.19 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
To call an outside party
From Outside Telephone
PIN: Personal Identification Number
In No Security Mode
DISA
phone no.
Off-hook.
outside
phone no.
R.B.Tone &
DISA message
Dial outside
phone number.
Dial DISA
phone number.
Seize a CO line before dialing
an outside phone number.
In Trunk Security Mode/All Security Mode*
DISA
phone no.
Off-hook.
your
extension no.
4
R.B.Tone &
DISA message
Enter
Dial DISA
phone number.
7
OR
verification
code
47.
Dial your extension number,
or enter and then verification
code.
extension PIN
OR
outside
phone no.
C.Tone &
D.Tone
verification code PIN
Enter extension PIN or
verification code PIN
(max.10 digits).
Dial outside
phone number.
Seize a CO line before dialing
an outside phone number.
•
* Callers from preprogrammed outside numbers can access the PBX through DISA without
a password (extension PIN/verification code PIN) (DISA Automatic Walking COS).
When making an outside call using Walking COS through DISA, the CLIP number for that
call will be that of the extension seized by Walking COS.
•
To retry
From Outside Telephone
To dial a different number during a conversation with an outside party or
while hearing the ringback, reorder, or busy tone
DISA
message
Enter
.
phone no.
Dial phone number.
Dial a line access number as the first
digit when calling an outside party.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
81
1.3.20 DND (Do Not Disturb)
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made using the CO-to-CO Line Call
feature of DISA.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Enabling DISA security (CO Line Security or All Security).
b. Keeping your passwords (verification code PIN/extension PIN) secret.
c. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
d. Changing PINs regularly.
•
•
Time Limit
Both parties will hear an alarm tone fifteen seconds before the specified time limit. To extend,
press any dial button except .
If Built-in Automated Attendant service is set, you can access the desired extension
simply by pressing a single digit (0–9) from the options given the prerecorded message.
1.3.20 DND (Do Not Disturb)
–
–
–
DND (Do Not Disturb)
DND Override
Switching FWD/DND Status Using Fixed FWD/DND Button
DND (Do Not Disturb)
You can set this feature to prevent incoming calls from ringing at your extension. This can be useful, for
example, when you are in a meeting or busy.
To set/cancel
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0
Both Calls
OR
7
1
1
OR
2
Off-hook.
Enter
•
82
71.
Outside Calls
Intercom Calls
Enter 0 to 2 as you desire.
1
Set
OR
0
Cancel
Enter 1 to set
or 0 to cancel.
C.Tone
On-hook.
When using a proprietary telephone, you can set or cancel DND by pressing the FWD/DND
button (fixed button) instead of " 710"
When using a KX-UT series SIP phone (except KX-UT670), you can also press the FWD/
DND button and then press up or down with the Navigator Key to set or cancel Do Not Disturb
for all calls. For KX-UT670, there is no physical FWD/DND button on the phone. For details,
refer to the documentation for your phone.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.20 DND (Do Not Disturb)
•
•
•
For KX-UT series SIP phones (except KX-UT670), when Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb
is enabled, FWD/DND appears on the display in stand-by mode. For KX-UT670, when Call
Forwarding or Do Not Disturb is enabled, a status icon appears on the display. For details,
refer to the documentation for your phone.
The FWD/DND button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Both features are not set.
Flashing red slowly: FWD mode
Red on: DND mode
For KX-UT series SIP phones, you can see the current status on the display.
The system has two modes: (1) FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode and (2) FWD/DND Setting
Mode. Ask your manager what mode your system is in if you are not sure.
For KX-UT series SIP phones, only FWD/DND Setting Mode is supported.
(1) When in FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode:
Pressing the FWD/DND button (fixed button) while in idle status will cycle the setting as shown
below:
FWD
DND
Off
(2) When in FWD/DND Setting Mode:
Pressing the FWD/DND button (fixed button) while in idle status allows you to switch the
FWD/DND status and set the FWD destination (refer to "
Switching FWD/DND Status
Using Fixed FWD/DND Button").
Note
A FWD/DND button (customized button) is always in FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode: the
mode cannot be changed.
•
•
•
•
•
If your extension has set this feature, a calling extension will hear DND tone.
If this feature is set, the Call Forwarding (FWD) feature does not work.
Specified extensions can override this feature and call DND extensions (DND Override).
When making a call using an SDN button to a PDN extension with DND set, this feature will
temporarily be deactivated.
When intercom calls are set to be handled differently from outside calls (DND set/cancel),
we recommend establishing buttons for both FWD/DND—Outside calls and FWD/
DND—Intercom calls, because:
a. the light patterns of the FWD/DND—Both calls button (including FWD/DND button [fixed
button]) will indicate the setting for either outside calls or intercom calls, but not both.
Note
The DND icon on PS display reflects the setting for outside calls only.
b. pressing the FWD/DND—Both calls button (including FWD/DND button [fixed button])
will not change the FWD or DND mode for intercom calls and outside calls separately.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit FWD/DND (Both calls, Outside calls, Intercom calls) buttons.
DND Override
The preprogrammed extension can call someone who has set the DND feature.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
83
1.3.20 DND (Do Not Disturb)
To call
PT/SLT/PS
1
extension no.
DND Tone
Off-hook.
Dial extension
number.
•
R.B.Tone
Enter 1.
Talk.
SIP phone users cannot use DND Override to call someone who has set the DND
feature, but can let other extensions call them using DND Override when the DND
feature is set.
Switching FWD/DND Status Using Fixed FWD/DND Button
Using a proprietary telephone (PT) or KX-UT series SIP phone (except KX-UT670), you can
easily switch the FWD/DND status for outside/intercom calls without clearing any FWD
destination that was set previously.
•
For KX-UT670 SIP phone users: There is no physical FWD/DND button on the phone.
To set and clear the FWD/DND status, refer to the documentation for your phone.
To switch the FWD/DND status for outside calls
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
The current FWD/DND status
for outside calls is displayed.
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
Press the fixed FWD/DND
button again to switch the status.
To switch the FWD/DND status for intercom calls
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
2
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
84
Operating Manual
Enter 2.
The current FWD/DND status
for intercom calls is displayed.
Press the fixed FWD/DND
button again to switch
the status.
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.21 Door Open
To set and clear FWD/DND for outside/intercom calls
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
Outside Calls*
1
OR
Intercom Calls
2
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
0
Enter 1 or 2.
Press STORE.
FWD/DND off
OR
1
DND on
Press STORE
to set.
Enter 0 or 1.
A confirmation tone will
be heard.
•
* This step can be omitted.
To set and clear FWD/DND for all calls
KX-UT113/KX-UT123/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248
While on-hook
FWD/DND Off
: FWD/DND off
OR
Do Not Disturb : DND on
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
Press UP or DOWN with
the Navigator Key
to select the desired item.
Press ENTER to set.
A confirmation tone will
be heard.
1.3.21 Door Open
A preprogrammed extension can open a door from the extension.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
85
1.3.22 Doorphone Call
From a preprogrammed extension
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
5
Off-hook.
Enter
5
doorphone no.
Enter doorphone
number (2 digits).
55.
C.Tone
On-hook.
From any extension while talking to the doorphone
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
5
C.Tone
On-hook.
Enter 5.
•
The door open will be triggered for a specified time period.
1.3.22 Doorphone Call
Preprogrammed extensions or an outside party can receive a call from a doorphone, and talk to the person
through the doorphone.
To call from the doorphone
Doorphone
C.Tone
Press doorphone
button.
86
Operating Manual
Talk.
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.23 EFA (External Feature Access)
To answer a call from the doorphone
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Off-hook.
•
•
For KX-UT series SIP phone users: If the doorphone number and name are stored in the
phonebook of your phone, the doorphone information is displayed on your phone when a call
arrives from the doorphone.
For KX-UT670 SIP phone users: The video feed from a network camera can be displayed
on your phone’s display when a call arrives from a doorphone and the following settings are
configured on your phone:
– The network camera is registered to a contact.
– The doorphone number is registered to the contact, and "Doorphone" is selected as the
label for the phone number.
For details about the settings, refer to the documentation for your phone.
To call the doorphone
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
3
Off-hook.
•
Enter
1
31.
doorphone no.
Enter doorphone
number (2 digits).
C.Tone
Talk.
If no one answers a doorphone call within a specified time period, the call is canceled.
1.3.23 EFA (External Feature Access)
You can access special features (e.g., Call Waiting offered by a host PBX or telephone company. This feature
is only effective for an outside call.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
87
1.3.24 Executive Busy Override
<Example> To hold the current call and then talk to the new party
PT/PS/KX-UT series
SLT
During a conversation with an outside party
During a conversation with an outside party
OR
6
desired service
code
(EFA)
0
desired service
code
OR
6
0
Press FLASH/RECALL or EFA.
Or press TRANSFER and
then enter 60.
Enter desired
service code.
Press Recall/
hookswitch.
Enter
60.
Enter desired
service code.
For KX-UT series,
press FLASH/RECALL.
•
In this case, the FLASH/RECALL button on a proprietary telephone or KX-UT series SIP
phone must be set to External Feature Access (EFA) mode through system programming.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit an External Feature Access (EFA) button.
1.3.24 Executive Busy Override
–
–
Executive Busy Override
Executive Busy Override Deny
Executive Busy Override
A preprogrammed extension can call someone who is busy on the telephone and establish a three-party
conversation. After pressing a DSS button, you can check the caller information of the call to another extension
on the display before establishing a three-party conversation.
88
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.24 Executive Busy Override
To join an intercom call
PT/SLT/PS
Party joining the call
A busy tone is heard and the caller
information of the call to another
extension is displayed.
(DSS)
OR
3
(SDN)
OR
C.Tone
B. Tone
extension no.
Off-hook.
Talk.
Enter 3.
Press red DSS or SDN, or dial extension number.
A three-party conversation
is now established.
Parties in the conversation
During a conversation
C.Tone
Talk.
To join an outside call
PT/PS
Party joining the call
3
(CO)
OR
B. Tone
C.Tone
(SDN)
Enter 3.
Off-hook.
Talk.
Press red CO or SDN.
A three-party conversation
is now established.
Parties in the conversation
During a conversation
C.Tone
Talk.
•
•
•
SIP phone users cannot use this feature, but other extensions can call them using Executive
Busy Override.
To join another conversation, you must have Executive Busy Override enabled at your
extension through COS programming.
It is possible for an originating extension to leave a three-party conversation with an outside
party and let the two other parties talk by simply going on-hook.
For the originating extension
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
89
1.3.25 Extension Dial Lock
To talk to each party alternately
PT/PS
During a conversation
To continue
Talk to the
other party.
Press TRANSFER.
Executive Busy Override Deny
A preprogrammed extension user can prevent his calls from being interrupted by another extension user
(Default: Allow other users to interrupt calls).
To set
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
1
7
Off-hook.
3
Enter
3
Prevent
OR
0
Allow
C.Tone
On-hook.
Enter 1 to prevent
or 0 to allow.
733.
1.3.25 Extension Dial Lock
You can lock your extension so that other users cannot make unauthorized outside calls.
This feature is also known as Electronic Station Lockout.
To lock
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
7
7
1
C.Tone
Off-hook.
90
Operating Manual
Enter
77.
Enter 1.
On-hook.
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.26 Extension Feature Clear
To unlock
PIN: Personal Identification Number
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
7
Off-hook.
•
•
•
Enter
7
77.
0
extension PIN
Enter 0.
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
C.Tone
On-hook.
If you forget the extension PIN or cannot unlock your extension, consult your manager.
The manager can clear your extension PIN, or unlock your extension. Then, you can set the
new PIN and unlock your extension by entering it.
If your extension is locked by this feature, it cannot perform the following operations:
– Making outside calls
– Changing the call forwarding destination
If you do not set extension PIN, you cannot lock and unlock your extension.
To make an outside call while your extension is locked
PIN: Personal Identification Number
PT/SLT/PS
4
Enter
Off-hook.
7
47.
your
extension no.
extension no.
extension PIN
Dial your
extension number.
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
C.Tone &
D.Tone
If the wrong extension PIN is
entered, you hear an alarm tone.
•
desired
phone no.
extension no.
Dial desired
phone number.
Seize a CO line before entering
an outside phone number.
After you make an outside call, Extension Dial Lock is automatically activated again.
1.3.26 Extension Feature Clear
You can reset the settings of the following features on your extension to the default settings with one operation.
This feature is also known as Station Program Clear.
•
Document Version 2014-08
For KX-UT series SIP phone users: You can reset the settings of the following features
on your extension.
– Message Waiting
– Call Forwarding (FWD)
– Timed Reminder
– Do Not Disturb (DND)
– Call Waiting
– Data Line Security
– Log-in/Log-out
Operating Manual
91
1.3.27 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)
Features
*1
Default Setting
Hot Line*1
Off
Message Waiting—(All the messages that have been left by other extension users)
Off
Call Pickup Deny
Allow
Call Forwarding (FWD)*1
Off
Absent Message
Off
Paging Deny
Allow
Timed Reminder
Cleared
Do Not Disturb (DND)*1
Off
Call Waiting*1
Enable—Tone
Executive Busy Override
Allow
BGM
Off
Data Line Security
Off
Paralleled Telephone
The telephone in
parallel rings.
Log-in/Log-out
Log-in
These features may not be reset, depending on system programming.
To reset
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
7
Enter
Off-hook.
•
9
790.
0
C.Tone
On-hook.
After performing Extension Feature Clear, the setting of Call Waiting becomes
"Enable—Tone". In this case, dial tone 2 will be heard when you go off-hook.
1.3.27 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)
You can assign a password to each extension.
The following features require an extension PIN.
1. Screening calls (1.6 Unified Messaging Features—1.6.6 Other Features—
Live Call Screening
(LCS), 1.3.71 Voice Mail Features—LCS (Live Call Screening))
2. Prohibiting other people from seeing your personal speed dialing directory, call log, and SVM log (Display
Lock)
3. Using the same settings as your extension at other extensions (1.3.76 Walking Extension)
92
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.27 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)
4. Remote Control Operation (1.3.75 Walking COS)
5. Extension Dial Lock Clear
To set
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Off-hook.
PIN: Personal Identification Number
7
9
Enter
799.
1
9
extension PIN
Enter 1.
#
same
extension PIN
#
Enter #.
Enter same extension
PIN (max. 10 digits).
Enter #.
Enter extension
PIN (max. 10 digits).
C.Tone
On-hook.
To cancel
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Off-hook.
PIN: Personal Identification Number
7
9
Enter
799.
9
0
stored
extension PIN
Enter 0.
Enter stored
extension PIN.
C.Tone
On-hook.
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers your
password (extension PIN).
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping your PIN secret.
b. Selecting a complex, random PIN that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing your PIN regularly.
•
•
•
Valid numbers for an extension PIN are "0" through "9".
If the wrong extension PIN is entered for a preprogrammed number of times, the PIN is
locked.
If you forget your extension PIN or your extension PIN is locked, your manager can clear the
extension PIN and extension PIN lock.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
93
1.3.30 FWD (Call Forwarding)
1.3.28 External Relay
Preprogrammed extensions can switch on a relay (e.g., alarm) connected to the PBX.
To switch on the relay
PT/SLT/PS
5
Enter
Off-hook.
•
6
56.
relay no.
C.Tone
Enter relay number
(2 digits).
On-hook.
The relay will be switched off after a specified time period.
1.3.29 External Sensor
Preprogrammed extensions can receive an alert call from an external sensor (e.g., security alarm) connected
to the PBX.
To answer a sensor call
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
D.Tone
Off-hook.
•
On-hook.
If you do not answer a sensor call within a specified time period, the sensor call will stop.
Dial Tone Definitions
• 5.4 Tone
1.3.30 FWD (Call Forwarding)
–
–
–
94
FWD (Call Forwarding)
Remote FWD
FWD/DND Settings Using Fixed FWD/DND Button
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.30 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD (Call Forwarding)
You can have your incoming calls forwarded to a specified
destination.
All Calls:
All calls are forwarded. Preset extensions may also forward from
their own receiving group.
Busy:
All calls are forwarded when your extension is busy.
No Answer:
All calls are forwarded when you do not answer the call within a
specified time period.
Busy/No Answer (BSY/NA):
All calls are forwarded when you do not answer within a specified
time period or when your extension is busy.
Follow Me (From):
If you fail to set the above-mentioned "All Calls" to forward before
you leave your desk, you can set the same feature from the
destination extension.
•
Incoming calls can be forwarded up to four times.
•
•
You can set the UM group’s floating extension number as a forward destination.
You can set the floating extension number of a voice mail group or the SVM feature as a
forward destination.
You can set your cellular phone as the forward destination.
Boss & Secretary feature
The extension which has been set as the destination can call the forwarding extension.
•
•
<Example>
Call
Forwarding
extension
Document Version 2014-08
Forward
set
destination
Operating Manual
95
1.3.30 FWD (Call Forwarding)
To set/cancel
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0
Both Calls
OR
7
1
1
Outside Calls
OR
Intercom Calls
2
Off-hook.
Enter
Enter 0 to 2 as
you desire.
71.
0
Cancel
2
All Calls
3
Busy
4
No Answer
5
Busy/No Answer
Enter required
number.
For "Cancel", go on-hook
directly after entering 0.
destination
extension no.
OR
outside
CO line
phone no.
access no.
(max. 32 digits)
Enter destination extension number.
Or enter CO line access number
and then outside phone number.
C.Tone
Enter #.
On-hook.
To set Follow Me from another extension
PT/SLT/PS
0
Both Calls
OR
7
1
1
2
Off-hook.
Enter
your
extension no.
Dial your
extension number.
•
96
Outside Calls
OR
Follow Me
Follow Me Cancel
Intercom Calls
Enter 0 to 2 as
you desire.
71.
7
8
Enter 7 or 8.
C.Tone
On-hook.
When using a proprietary telephone, you can set or cancel Call Forwarding by pressing the
FWD/DND button (fixed button) instead of " 710".
When using a KX-UT series SIP phone (except KX-UT670), you can also press the FWD/
DND button and then press up or down with the Navigator Key to set or cancel Call
Forwarding for all calls. For KX-UT670, there is no physical FWD/DND button on the phone.
For details, refer to the documentation for your phone.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.30 FWD (Call Forwarding)
To set the timer for "No Answer" and "Busy/No Answer"
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
7
1
Enter
Off-hook.
time
3
713.
C.Tone
On-hook.
Enter time
(seconds [2 digits]).
Call Forwarding (FWD) for your Incoming Call Distribution Group
ICD Group: Incoming Call Distribution Group
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
4
Both Calls
1
OR
7
1
5
Enter
71.
Set
OR
OR
6
Off-hook.
Outside Calls
0
Cancel
Intercom Calls
Enter 4 to 6 as
you desire.
Enter 1 to set
or 0 to cancel.
OR
outside
CO line
phone no.
access no.
(Max. 32 digits)
Document Version 2014-08
Enter ICD Group
extension number.
For "Cancel", go on-hook
directly after entering ICD
Group extension number.
destination
extension no.
Enter destination extension number.
Or enter CO line access number
and then outside phone number.
ICD Group
extension no.
C.Tone
Enter #.
On-hook.
Operating Manual
97
1.3.30 FWD (Call Forwarding)
•
•
•
•
For KX-UT series SIP phones (except KX-UT670), when Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb
is enabled, FWD/DND appears on the display in stand-by mode. For KX-UT670, when Call
Forwarding or Do Not Disturb is enabled, a status icon appears on the display. For details,
refer to the documentation for your phone.
The FWD/DND button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Both features are not set.
Flashing red slowly: FWD mode
Red on: DND mode
For KX-UT series SIP phones, you can see the current status on the display.
The Group FWD button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: No set
Flashing red slowly: FWD mode
The system has two modes: (1) FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode and (2) FWD/DND Setting
Mode. Ask your manager what mode your system is in if you are not sure.
For KX-UT series SIP phones, only FWD/DND Setting Mode is supported.
(1) When in FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode:
Pressing the FWD/DND button (fixed button) while in idle status will cycle the setting as shown
below:
FWD
DND
Off
(2) When in FWD/DND Setting Mode:
Pressing the FWD/DND button (fixed button) while in idle status allows you to switch the
FWD/DND status and set the FWD destination (refer to "
FWD/DND Settings Using Fixed
FWD/DND Button").
Note
A FWD/DND button (customized button) is always in FWD/DND Cycle Switch Mode: the
mode cannot be changed.
•
•
Transferred outside calls are also forwarded to the destination assigned for outside calls.
When intercom calls are set to be handled differently from outside calls (forwarding type,
forward destination), we recommend establishing buttons for both FWD/DND—Outside calls
and FWD/DND—Intercom calls, and/or Group FWD—Outside calls and Group
FWD—Intercom calls, because:
a. the light patterns of the FWD/DND—Both calls button (including FWD/DND button [fixed
button]) and the Group FWD—Both calls button will indicate the setting for either outside
calls or intercom calls, but not both.
Note
The FWD icon on PS display reflects the setting for outside calls only.
b. pressing the FWD/DND—Both calls button (including FWD/DND button [fixed button]) or
the Group FWD—Both calls button will not change the FWD or DND mode for intercom
calls and outside calls separately.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit FWD/DND (Both calls, Outside calls, Intercom calls) buttons, or Group FWD
(Both calls, Outside calls, Intercom calls) buttons.
98
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.30 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Remote FWD
Using a proprietary telephone (PT), you can easily switch the FWD status of another
phone. First, the extension that will allow remote forwarding operation must specify an
extension to perform remote forwarding. Then, the extension to perform remote
forwarding can assign a Group FWD button for this purpose. The forwarding status of
the target extension can be checked via the LED of the button. This feature allows users
to forward calls to themselves from another extension.
To set/cancel (Remote FWD setting)
PT
On the other
extension
While on-hook
(Group FWD)
The forwarding status of the
target extension changes
accordingly.
FWD status
changed remotely
Press Group FWD.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit Group FWD (Both calls, Outside calls, Intercom calls) buttons.
FWD/DND Settings Using Fixed FWD/DND Button
Using a proprietary telephone (PT) or KX-UT series SIP phone (except KX-UT670), you can
easily switch the FWD/DND status, and set the forward destination for outside/intercom calls
with the FWD/DND button (fixed button). For PT users, it is also possible to set outside
telephone numbers (e.g., your cellular phone) as forward destinations for up to 4 Virtual PSs*
in an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group, to ring together with other ICD group members
for calls to the group.
The following settings are available:
•
•
•
Switching the FWD/DND status and setting FWD destination for outside/intercom calls
Timer for "No Answer" and "Busy/No Answer"
Forwarding status (on/off) and outside destinations to ring in parallel for outside calls for up to 4 virtual PSs
in an ICD group
* Virtual PS
A virtual PS is a dedicated
extension number assigned to a
non-existent portable station (PS)
to allow access to outside
destinations such as a cellular
phone.
3 Talk
2 Forward to
outside destination
Extn. 101
Document Version 2014-08
1 Dials 301
Virtual PS
(Extn. No. 301)
Operating Manual
99
1.3.30 FWD (Call Forwarding)
•
For KX-UT670 SIP phone users: There is no physical FWD/DND button on the phone. To
set and clear the FWD/DND status, refer to the documentation for your phone.
To switch FWD/DND status for outside calls
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
The current FWD/DND status
for outside calls is displayed.
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
Press the fixed FWD/DND
button again to switch the status.
To switch FWD/DND status for intercom calls
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
2
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
•
100
Enter 2.
The current FWD/DND status
for intercom calls is displayed.
Press the fixed FWD/DND
button again to switch
the status.
When you switch the FWD/DND status, any FWD destination that was set previously is not
cleared.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.30 FWD (Call Forwarding)
To set and clear FWD/DND for outside/intercom calls
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
1
Outside Calls*
OR
2
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
Intercom Calls
Enter 1 or 2.
0
1
Press STORE.
FWD/DND off
DND on
Enter 0 or 1.
OR
2
3
4
5
FWD–All Calls
FWD–Busy
FWD–No Answer
FWD–Busy/No Answer
destination
extension no.
OR
CO line
access no.
outside
phone no.
Press STORE
to set.
(max. 32 digits)
Enter 2 to 5.
•
Enter destination extension number,
or CO line access number and then
outside phone number.
A confirmation tone will
be heard.
* This step can be omitted.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
101
1.3.30 FWD (Call Forwarding)
To set and clear FWD/DND for all calls
KX-UT113/KX-UT123/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248
While on-hook
: FWD/DND off
FWD/DND Off
Do Not Disturb : DND on
OR
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
destination
extension no.
FWD(All) : FWD–All Calls
FWD(BSY) : FWD–Busy
FWD(NA) : FWD–No Answer
FWD(B/NA) : FWD–Busy/No Answer
OR
outside
phone no.
CO line
access no.
#
(max. 32 digits)
Press UP or DOWN with
the Navigator Key
to select the desired item.
Enter destination extension number,
or CO line access number
and then outside phone number.
Enter #.
Press ENTER
to set.
A confirmation tone will
be heard.
To set the timer for "No Answer" and "Busy/No Answer"
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
time
3
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
Enter 3.
Press STORE.
*
Enter time
(seconds [0–120]).
Press STORE
to set.
A confirmation tone will
be heard.
•
102
* You can enter the time as a 1–3 digit number. For example, 15 seconds can be entered as
"15" or "015".
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.31 Hands-free Answerback
To set forwarding status and outside destinations to ring in parallel for outside calls to an
ICD group
PT
While on-hook (when in FWD/DND Setting Mode)
4
5
6
7
Press the fixed
FWD/DND button.
Virtual PS 1
Virtual PS 2
Virtual PS 3
Virtual PS 4
Enter 4 to 7.
Press STORE.
To cancel ringing
0
FWD off
Enter 0.
OR
To set ringing
1
FWD–All Calls
CO line
access no.
outside
phone no.
(max. 32 digits)
Enter 1.
•
•
Enter CO line access number
and then outside phone number.
Press STORE
to set.
A confirmation tone will
be heard.
Only one extension assigned as member 1 in each ICD group can perform the settings for
virtual PSs.
It is possible to switch the forwarding status (on/off) of a virtual PS by entering the number
(4–7) of that extension, then pressing the fixed FWD/DND button, instead of pressing the
AUTO DIAL/STORE button.
1.3.31 Hands-free Answerback
You can answer an incoming call without going off-hook as soon as the line is connected.
When an intercom call arrives, you will hear the caller talking without the phone ringing. When
an outside call arrives, you will hear the caller talking after a preprogrammed number of rings.
Hands-free Answerback for outside calls requires System Programming.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
103
1.3.32 Hands-free Operation
To set/cancel
PT/KX-UT113/KX-UT123/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248
While on-hook
Press
AUTO ANS.
•
•
•
PT users: The AUTO ANS button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Not set
Red on: Set
KX-UT series SIP phone (except KX-UT670) users: When Hands-free Answerback is set,
the AUTO ANS icon appears on the display.
PS and KX-UT670 users: Refer to the documentation for your phone.
1.3.32 Hands-free Operation
You can have a conversation in hands-free mode using the SP-PHONE button.
To make/answer a call
PT/KX-UT series
Press SP-PHONE.
•
•
104
When performing hands-free operation:
– If it is difficult to hear the other party’s voice,
Increase the volume using the Navigator Key, Jog Dial, or Volume Key.
– If the other party has difficulty hearing you,
Decrease the volume.
– If the other party reports that your voice echoes,
Use the telephone in a room that has curtains, carpeting or both.
– If parts of the conversation cannot be heard,
If you and the other party speak at the same time, parts of your conversation may be lost.
To avoid this, try to speak alternately.
KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248 users can have a conversation in hands-free mode by
pressing the flashing CO or DN button.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.33 Headset Operation
1.3.33 Headset Operation
–
–
Headset Operation
Answer/Release Button
Headset Operation
You can have a conversation using a headset.
In this case, you must select "Headset on" in programming mode or set the Headset button
on (red) in advance. However, for the KX-UT113/KX-UT123, Headset mode is enabled
automatically when a headset is connected to the headset jack of the telephone.
This feature is also known as Handset/Headset Selection.
To talk using the headset
PT/KX-UT series
Press SP-PHONE.
To use the handset during a conversation using the headset
PT/KX-UT series
Off-hook.
To talk in hands-free mode during a conversation using the headset
PT/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
(Headset)
Press red Headset.
•
The Headset button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Headset mode off
Red on: Headset mode on
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
105
1.3.33 Headset Operation
•
For KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321)/KX-NT560/KX-DT343/KX-DT346/KX-UT248
telephone users:
– With KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321)/KX-NT560/KX-DT343/KX-DT346/KX-UT248
telephones, you can use a Bluetooth wireless headset registered on your extension as
a headset.
– Operating Distance
Please keep the telephones with connected Bluetooth Modules, 3 m (9 ft 10 in) or more
apart from each other. Also, if a Bluetooth headset is in use near a telephone with a
connected Bluetooth Module, other than the one it is registered to, noise may be heard.
Move away from the telephone and closer to the one it is registered to, to improve the
signal.
– Noise
Signals are transmitted between this module and the Bluetooth headset using radio
waves. For maximum distance and noise free operation, it is recommended that the
module is situated away from electrical appliances such as faxes, radios, PCs, or
microwaves.
• Systems using the 2.4 GHz ISM (Industrial, Scientific and Medical) band may interfere
with this product. Examples of such systems are cordless telephones, wireless LAN,
Home RF, microwave ovens and other ISM devices. These systems may cause minor
noise.
•
For KX-UT248 and KX-NT560 telephone users:
– You may not be able to use all of the functionality available on a Bluetooth headset. For
example, redialing will not work with a REDIAL button on a Bluetooth headset, and, during
hands-free mode, you cannot switch the call to the Bluetooth headset through headset
operation.
•
For KX-NT500 series (except KX-NT551), KX-DT543, KX-DT546, KX-UT133, KX-UT136,
KX-UT248, and KX-UT670 telephone users:
– You can use Electric Hook Switch (EHS) headsets. For the latest information about
headsets that have been tested with this unit, consult your dealer.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Personal Programming—
Select the equipment to use.
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Headset button.
Headset Operation
Answer/Release Button
Customized Answer and Release buttons can make using a headset much easier. You can
answer incoming calls or disconnect the line with these buttons.
Some DSS Consoles have fixed ANSWER and RELEASE buttons.
106
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.33 Headset Operation
To answer
PT
(Answer)
Talk.
Press Answer.
To transfer a call
PT
During a conversation
(DSS)
TRANSFER
OR
The called
party answers.
(Release)
desired
phone no.
Press TRANSFER.
Press Release.
Press DSS or dial desired
phone number.
Seize CO line before
dialing outside phone number.
To talk to a waiting caller
PT
While hearing a call waiting tone
(Answer)
Press Answer.
Talk.
To transfer an outside call to an extension with a one-touch operation
PT
During a conversation
(DSS)
The called
party answers.
Press DSS.
(Release)
Press Release.
The other party is placed on hold and the
destination extension is called immediately.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
107
1.3.35 Hot Line
To end a conversation
PT
During a conversation
(Release)
Press Release.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit an Answer button or a Release button.
1.3.34 HOSPITALITY FEATURES
In a hotel-type environment, an extension assigned as a hotel operator can be used to view and set the
check-in/check-out/cleaned-up (Ready or Not Ready) status of each guest room extension. This allows the
hotel operator to manage guests and rooms with just a telephone. In addition, the hotel operator can set timed
reminders remotely for guest rooms.
•
Note:
Hospitality features cannot be used at the same time as the Supervisory Monitor (ACD)
Control feature. (Refer to "4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control".) For details, consult
your system administrator.
Features
Description
Room Status Control
An extension assigned as a hotel operator can set the check-in/check-out/
cleaned-up (Ready or Not Ready) status of rooms remotely.
(® 1.3.61 Room Status Control)
Remote Wake-up Call
A hotel operator can set a timed reminder for a room remotely.
(® 1.3.74 Wake-up Call)
1.3.35 Hot Line
You can make an outside call simply by going off-hook if you have preprogrammed your phone.
This feature is also known as Pickup Dialing.
108
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.35 Hot Line
To store a phone number
PT/SLT/PS
7
Off-hook.
Enter
4
0
2
Enter 2.
740.
desired
phone no.
Enter desired
phone number
(max. 32 digits).
C.Tone
On-hook.
Enter #.
Enter CO line access number
before outside phone number.
To set/cancel
PT/SLT/PS
1
Off-hook.
7
4
Enter
740.
0
Set
OR
0
Cancel
Enter 1 to set
or 0 to cancel.
C.Tone
On-hook.
To dial
PT/SLT/PS
Off-hook.
•
•
•
To call another party, dial the desired party’s phone number before the preprogrammed
number is dialed.
You should assign the intercom line as the seized line when going off-hook. (Preferred Line
Assignment—Outgoing)
It is possible to increase the delay before Hot Line is activated through system programming.
This can be useful if you require more time after going off-hook to dial another telephone
number or extension number.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Personal Programming—Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing
Select the seized line when going off-hook.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
109
1.3.37 ICD Group Features—Call Log History for ICD Group
1.3.36 ICD GROUP FEATURES
An incoming call distribution (ICD) group is a group of extensions assigned through system programming to
receive calls (for example, as a call center). The PBX has several features that support using extensions in
ICD groups, as follows:
Features
Description
Log-in/Log-out
You can log in to or out of an ICD group, to control whether you receive calls
from the group.
(® 1.3.39 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out)
Supervisory Features
An extension assigned as a supervisor (supervisor extension) can monitor
and control the status of each member within the ICD group, using a 6-line
display PT.
(® 1.3.42 ICD Group Features—Supervisory)
Manual Queue
Redirection (Hurry-up
Transfer)
You can forward the longest waiting call in the queue of calls to the ICD
group to a preprogrammed destination manually.
(® 1.3.41 ICD Group Features—Manual Queue Redirection)
Call Forwarding (FWD) for
your ICD Group
You can set a forward destination for your ICD group.
(® Call Forwarding (FWD) for your Incoming Call Distribution Group)
1.3.37 ICD Group Features—Call Log History for ICD Group
An extension assigned as a supervisor (supervisor extension) can confirm the incoming call
log for the incoming call distribution (ICD) group.
To perform this operation, the supervisor has to enter incoming call queue monitoring mode
first.
To enter incoming call queue monitoring mode
6-Line Display PT
7
Off-hook.
Enter
3
9
ICD Group
extension no.
C.Tone
Enter ICD Group
extension number.
739.
Group Monitor On
On-hook.
110
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.38 ICD Group Features—Incoming Call Queue Monitor
To confirm the Call Log History
6-Line Display PT
While the display is in incoming call queue monitoring mode
JAN.31
08:13AM
601:Sales Section
Waiting Calls Now:
Max. Waiting Time:
EXIT
LOG
FRI
00006
02'18
SPRVS
Press "LOG".
Since
JAN.29
Total Calls
Overflow Calls
Lost Calls
Average Waiting
EXIT
09:10AM
: 00996
: 00131
: 00039
: 01'06
CLEAR
Confirm the Call Log History.
To clear Call Log History
6-Line Display PT
While the Call Log History is displayed
Since
JAN.29
Total Calls
Overflow Calls
Lost Calls
Average Waiting
EXIT
:
:
:
:
09:10AM
00996
00131
00039
01'06
CLEAR
Press "CLEAR".
•
•
If the accumulated data exceeds the maximum number that can be displayed (99999),
"****" is shown on the display. To reinitialize the display, clear the Call Log History.
For information about other supervisory features, refer to "1.3.42 ICD Group
Features—Supervisory".
1.3.38 ICD Group Features—Incoming Call Queue Monitor
An extension assigned as a supervisor (supervisor extension) can monitor the status of
waiting calls to be answered in the queue for an incoming call distribution (ICD) group.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
111
1.3.39 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
To monitor the waiting call status
6-Line Display PT
7
Off-hook.
Enter
3
9
ICD Group
extension no.
C.Tone
Enter ICD Group
extension number.
739.
JAN.31
08:13AM
601:Sales Section
Waiting Calls Now:
Max. Waiting Time:
Group Monitor On
On-hook.
EXIT
LOG
FRI
00006
02'18
SPRVS
Confirm the status of queued calls.
•
If an ICD group has an overflowed call, the display shows the status automatically.
•
For information about other supervisory features, refer to "1.3.42 ICD Group
Features—Supervisory".
1.3.39 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
You can control your status in an incoming call distribution
(ICD) group. When in the Log-out mode, incoming calls to
the group will not ring at your extension. When you return,
calls will again ring at your extension. (Default: Log-in)
Even if your extension is logged-in, you can have a
specified time period (wrap-up time) when you will not
receive calls after completing a previous call. This time can
be used for you to write a report and so on.
You can also manually select "Not Ready" mode to
temporarily leave an ICD group.
Log-out
Log-in
Talk.
Ready
Wrap-up
112
Operating Manual
Not Ready
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.39 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
To set Log-in/Log-out
ICD Group: Incoming Call Distribution Group
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0
7
Off-hook.
3
Enter
ICD Group
extension no.
6
Log-out
OR
1
Log-in
Enter 0 or 1.
736.
Specified
OR
C.Tone
All
Enter ICD Group
extension number or
On-hook.
.
ICD Group: Incoming Call Distribution Group
PT/PS
While on-hook
ICD Group
extension no.
(Log-in/Log-out)
Specified
OR
All
Press Log-in/Log-out.
Enter ICD Group extension
number or .
KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
While on-hook
(Log-in/Log-out
for all groups)
OR
(Log-in/Log-out
of a specified group)
Press Log-in/Log-out for all groups
or Log-in/Log-out of a specified group.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
113
1.3.39 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
PT/PS
While on-hook
(Log-in/Log-out
of a Specified Group)
Press Log-in/Log-out of a Specified Group.
To enter/leave Not Ready mode
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
1
7
Off-hook.
Enter
3
735.
5
Not Ready
OR
0
Ready
Enter 1 or 0.
C.Tone
On-hook.
To set/cancel Not Ready mode or to leave Wrap-up mode (To enter Ready mode)
PT/PS/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
While on-hook
(Wrap-up)
Press red or flashing red Wrap-up.*
114
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.40 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out Monitor and Remote Control
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
* The status will be as follows:
Ready ® Not Ready
Not Ready ® Ready
Wrap-up ® Not Ready
The Log-in/Log-out of a specified group button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Log-in mode
Red on: Log-out mode
The Wrap-up button alternates the setting of Wrap-up mode, Not Ready mode or Ready
mode.
The Wrap-up button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Ready mode
Red on: Not Ready mode
Flashing red: Wrap-up mode
In Wrap-up mode/Not Ready mode, your extension does not receive calls through any group,
even if it belongs to multiple groups.
The last remaining logged-in extension may not be allowed to log out, depending on system
programming.
The Supervisor extension can control the Log-in/Log-out status of other extensions.
For more information, refer to "1.3.40 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out Monitor and
Remote Control".
For information about other ICD group features, refer to "1.3.36 ICD GROUP FEATURES".
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Log-in/Log-out button, a Log-in/Log-out of a specified group button or a
Wrap-up button.
1.3.40 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out Monitor and Remote
Control
An extension assigned as a supervisor (supervisor extension) can monitor the Log-in/Log-out
status of incoming call distribution (ICD) group members with the lights of corresponding DSS
buttons. The supervisor extension can change the Log-in/Log-out status of an extension by
pressing the corresponding DSS button.
To perform this operation, the supervisor has to enter incoming call queue monitoring mode
first.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
115
1.3.40 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out Monitor and Remote Control
To enter incoming call queue monitoring mode
6-Line Display PT
7
Off-hook.
Enter
3
9
ICD Group
extension no.
C.Tone
Enter ICD Group
extension number.
739.
Group Monitor On
On-hook.
To monitor the Log-in/Log-out status
6-Line Display PT
While the display is in incoming call queue monitoring mode
JAN.31
08:13AM
601:Sales Section
Waiting Calls Now:
Max. Waiting Time:
EXIT
LOG
FRI
00006
02'18
SPRVS
Press "SPRVS".
•
While in Log-in/Log-out monitoring mode, the lights of DSS buttons for the ICD group
members indicate their status as follows:
Off: Out of the ICD group.
Green on: Log-in mode (Ready). The extension user is ready to answer calls.
Flashing Green: Log-in mode (Not Ready). The extension user is not ready to answer calls.
Red on: Log-out mode.
To change the Log-in/Log-out mode
6-Line Display PT
While monitoring the Log-in/Log-out status
(DSS)
Press desired DSS.
116
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.42 ICD Group Features—Supervisory
•
Depending on the current status of the ICD group member, pressing the DSS button changes
the status as follows:
Log-in mode (Not Ready) ® Log-in mode (Ready)
Log-in mode (Ready) ® Log-out mode
Log-out mode ® Log-in mode (Ready)
•
For information about other supervisory features, refer to "1.3.42 ICD Group
Features—Supervisory".
1.3.41 ICD Group Features—Manual Queue Redirection
When your incoming call distribution (ICD) group is busy and other outside calls arrive, the
arriving calls are put in a waiting queue.
Extensions can check the status of the queue with the Hurry-up button light, and forward the
longest waiting call in the queue to a preset destination manually.
This feature is also known as Hurry-up Transfer.
To forward the waiting call
PT/PS
(Hurry-up)
Press red or flashing red Hurry-up.
•
The Hurry-up button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: No waiting call.
Red on: Some calls are waiting.
Flashing red: The number of calls exceeds the manual queue redirection level.
•
For information about other ICD group features, refer to "1.3.36 ICD GROUP FEATURES".
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Hurry-up button.
1.3.42 ICD Group Features—Supervisory
An extension assigned as a supervisor (supervisor extension) can monitor and control the status of other
members in an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group using a 6-line display PT, as follows:
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
117
1.3.42 ICD Group Features—Supervisory
Features
Description
Incoming Call Queue
Monitor
The supervisor extension can monitor the status of calls waiting in the queue
to be answered.
(® 1.3.38 ICD Group Features—Incoming Call Queue Monitor)
Log-in/Log-out Monitor
and Remote Control
The supervisor extension can monitor the Log-in/Log-out status of the ICD
group members with the lights of corresponding DSS buttons. The
supervisor extension can change their Log-in/Log-out status by pressing
the corresponding DSS button.
(® 1.3.40 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out Monitor and Remote
Control)
Call Log History
The supervisor extension can confirm the incoming call log for the ICD
group.
(® 1.3.37 ICD Group Features—Call Log History for ICD Group)
Using these features, for example, if extension 101 is logged out but the user is at his/her extension, and
Incoming Call Queue Monitor shows that a call is waiting in the queue, the supervisor extension can change
the status of extension 101 to Log-in. The waiting call will then be automatically directed to that extension.
118
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.43 Message Waiting
The following chart shows the flow of supervisory displays and access operations:
Initial Display
JAN.31
PROG
08:10AM
INFO
RING
FRI
MENU
739
"EXIT"
ICD Group
extension
no.
Incoming Call
Queue Monitor
JAN.31
08:10AM
FRI --- Date and time
601:Sales Section
--- Floating extension number/name of ICD group
Waiting Calls Now: 00006 --- The number of queued calls
Max. Waiting Time: 02'18 --- The longest queuing time
EXIT
LOG
SPRVS
"SPRVS"
"LOG"
Call Log History
Since JAN.29
Total Calls
Overflow Calls
Lost Calls
Average Waiting
EXIT
09:10AM
00996
00131
00039
01'06
CLEAR
:
:
:
:
"EXIT"
"EXIT"
--- Monitoring starting date and time
--- Total number of incoming calls
--- Total number of overflowed calls
--- The number of lost calls
--- Average queuing time
Log-in/Log-out Monitor
JAN.31
08:10AM
FRI
601:Sales Section
Waiting Calls Now: 00006
Max. Waiting Time: 02'18
EXIT
With
The lights of DSS buttons for the ICD group members
indicate their Log-in/Log-out status as follows:
OFF: Out of the ICD group.
Green on: Log-in mode (ready to answer calls).
Flashing green: Log-in mode (not ready to answer calls).
Red on: Log-out mode.
•
For information about other ICD group features, refer to "1.3.36 ICD GROUP FEATURES".
1.3.43 Message Waiting
For an extension leaving a message waiting indication
When the called extension is busy or does not answer your call, you can
leave a notification so that the called party may call you back.
For an extension receiving a message waiting indication
As a message receiver, the Message button light or Message/Ringer
Lamp lets you know that a call has been received. If you receive
notification, you can call back the caller by a simple operation.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
119
1.3.43 Message Waiting
For an extension leaving a message waiting indication
To leave a message waiting indication
PT/SLT/PS
When the called extension is busy or does not answer
OR
4
C.Tone
On-hook.
Press MESSAGE
or enter 4.
To leave/cancel a message waiting indication
PT/SLT/PS/SIP
PT and SLT Extn./KX-UT series
1
7
Off-hook.
120
Operating Manual
Enter
0
70.
Leave
OR
0
Cancel
Enter 1 to leave
or 0 to cancel.
desired
extension no.
Enter desired
extension number.
C.Tone
On-hook.
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.43 Message Waiting
For an extension receiving a message waiting indication
To check the left message and call back
PT/PS
While on-hook
Press MESSAGE
until the desired
extension appears.
Talk.
Off-hook.
To call back
PT/SLT/PS
OR
7
0
Press MESSAGE or enter
Off-hook.
2
70 and then 2.
Talk.
KX-UT series
While on-hook
Press MESSAGE.
Off-hook.
Talk.
SIP Extn.
7
Enter
Off-hook.
•
Document Version 2014-08
0
70.
2
Enter 2.
Talk.
Performing this operation after receiving multiple waiting indications will call back the
extension that left the most recent message waiting indication.
Operating Manual
121
1.3.44 Mute
To clear message waiting indications left on your extension
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
7
Enter
Off-hook.
•
•
•
•
•
•
0
0
Enter 0.
70.
your
extension no.
Dial your
extension number.
C.Tone
On-hook.
The Message button light or Message/Ringer Lamp shows the current status as follows:
Off: No message
Red on: You have a message
The display shows the messages starting with the most recent call.
At a called extension, the MESSAGE button allows you to clear message waiting indications
if you do not want to call the callers back. To clear, press the MESSAGE button and then
press the soft button. This operation cannot be performed using KX-UT series SIP phones.
On your PT, you can establish one or more Message for Another Extension buttons.
These buttons can accept the message waiting notification of other extensions or various
incoming call distribution groups.
In other words, you can monitor the message waiting notifications of other telephones.
A single line telephone extension user will receive a special dial tone as message waiting
notification when going off-hook.
The message waiting lamp of a single line telephone can also let you know that you have a
message in the same way as the Message button.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Message button or Message for Another Extension button.
1.3.44 Mute
You can disable the microphone or the handset to consult privately with others in the room
while listening to the other party on the phone through the speaker or the handset.
To set/cancel
PT/KX-UT series
During a conversation
VOICE CALL
OR
OR
MUTE
Press MUTE.
122
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.46 OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement)
•
•
•
The AUTO ANS/MUTE or VOICE CALL/MUTE button light for PTs, or the SP-PHONE button
light for KX-UT series SIP phones shows the current status as follows:
Off: Normal
Flashing red: Mute
If mute is used during OHCA, it will become Handset Mute.
PS users: Refer to the documentation for your phone.
1.3.45 Off-hook Monitor
You can let other people in the room listen to the conversation through the speaker while
continuing the conversation using the handset.
To set/cancel
PT/KX-UT series
During a conversation using the handset
Press SP-PHONE.
•
•
The SP-PHONE button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: The voice is heard through the handset.
On: The voice is heard through the speaker and the handset.
This feature is only available with certain proprietary telephones, and requires system
programming.
1.3.46 OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement)
During a conversation, you can be informed of a waiting call with a voice announcement. You can hear the
caller’s voice through the built-in speaker, and talk to the caller while the current call is continued using the
handset.
To set/cancel for intercom calls (Manual Call Waiting)
PT
0
7
Off-hook.
Document Version 2014-08
Enter
3
731.
1
No call
OR
2
OHCA
Enter 0 or 2.
C.Tone
On-hook.
Operating Manual
123
1.3.47 One-numbered extension
•
•
•
•
OHCA is only available with certain digital proprietary telephones.
OHCA is not available for outside calls; only call waiting tone can be set (refer to "1.3.13 Call
Waiting Tone").
A PDN extension can only receive OHCA or Whisper OHCA from the corresponding SDN
extension. When a call is made from another extension, a PDN extension will receive a call
waiting tone. (® 1.3.51 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory
Number) Extension)
For information about answering a waiting call, refer to "1.3.12 CALL WAITING
FEATURES".
1.3.47 One-numbered extension
Two telephones connected to the PBX can be set to share 1 extension number, and both telephones can be
set to ring (One-numbered Extension feature). You can choose whether the sub extension associated with the
main extension will ring when an incoming call is received.
To set
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
4
Off-hook.
Enter
8
48.
1
extension no.
Enter 1.
Enter extension number
of the paired telephone.
C.Tone
On-hook.
To cancel
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
4
Off-hook.
124
Operating Manual
Enter
8
48.
0
Enter 0.
C.Tone
On-hook.
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.49 Paging
To pickup call during conversation
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
(DSS)
OR
4
1
C.Tone
extension no.
Talk.
Off-hook.
Press lit DSS of the paired telephone.
Or enter 41 and then dial extension
number of the paired telephone.
1.3.48 One-touch Dialing
You can store a phone number into the flexible button for one-touch operation.
PT/PS/KX-UT133/KX-UT136/KX-UT248/KX-UT670
(One-touch
Dialing)
Off-hook.
Press One-touch
Dialing.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a One-touch Dialing button, store the desired phone number or feature number.
1.3.49 Paging
–
–
–
Group Paging
Paging and then Transferring a Call
Paging Deny
Group Paging
You can make a voice announcement to proprietary telephones or external speakers or both in the preset
group simultaneously. A person who has been paged can answer the page at any extension.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
125
1.3.49 Paging
To page
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
3
Off-hook.
•
Enter
paging group
no.
3
Dial paging group
number (2 digits).
33.
Wait for an
answer
C.Tone
Announce.
Talk.
If the group which you paged is already being used for paging, you hear a busy tone.
To answer
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
4
Off-hook.
Enter
3
C.Tone
Talk.
43.
KX-UT series
dial key
Press any dial key (0–9, , #).
•
•
•
126
Talk.
The following are extensions that cannot receive a paging announcement:
– Portable station
– Single line telephone
– Proprietary telephone that is ringing or busy
– Proprietary telephone in Paging Deny mode
– Proprietary telephone in DND mode
– Non-KX-UT series SIP phone
System programming may be required for some IP-PT users to receive paging
announcements.
Even if the announcement is not paging your extension, you can answer it, if it is paging your
group.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.49 Paging
Paging and then Transferring a Call
You can transfer a call after making paging announcements.
PT/SLT/PS
During a conversation
OR
OR
3
Press TRANSFER or
Recall/hookswitch.
Enter
paging group
no.
3
C.Tone
Announce.
Dial paging group
number (2 digits).
33.
The other party is
placed on hold.
Wait for an
answer
Talk.
On-hook.
The held party and the paged extension are
connected and start a conversation.
SIP Extn.
During a conversation
OR
3
OR
OR
3
paging group
no.
HOLD
Enter
KX-UT series:
Press TRANSFER.
33.
Dial paging group
number (2 digits).
Other than KX-UT series:
Press HOLD.
The other party is placed on hold.
Wait for an
answer.
C.Tone
Talk.
Announce.
•
On-hook.
The held party and the paged extension
are connected and start a conversation.
After you go on-hook, the caller can talk to the person who answers the page.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
127
1.3.50 Paralleled Telephone
Paging Deny
You can set your extension not to receive paging announcements.
PT/KX-UT series
1
7
Off-hook.
Enter
2
1
Deny
OR
0
Allow
C.Tone
On-hook.
Enter 1 or 0.
721.
1.3.50 Paralleled Telephone
A digital proprietary telephone extension user can choose whether the single line telephone
connected in parallel will ring or not, when an incoming call is received.
(Default: Ring)
DPT
1
3
Enter
Off-hook.
•
•
128
9
39.
Ring
OR
0
No ring
Enter 1 to ring
or 0 not to ring.
C.Tone
On-hook.
Even if "No ring" is selected, calls can be made and answered on the single line telephone
by lifting the handset.
If you go off-hook while your paralleled telephone is in use, the call will switch over to
you.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.51 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
1.3.51 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory
Number) Extension
Primary Directory Number (PDN) buttons and Secondary Directory Number (SDN) buttons
are useful when extension users will handle calls for other extensions. For example, a
secretary or multiple secretaries can handle calls and check the call status of a boss or multiple
bosses. The functions of PDN and SDN buttons are as follows:
PDN button: This button can be used to make and receive all calls (including both outside
and intercom calls). Having multiple PDN buttons allows multiple calls to be queued at the
extension. Extensions that have a PDN button are called PDN extensions.
SDN button: The light of an SDN button displays the current call status of the registered
extension, similar to a DSS button. In addition, this button can be used to perform the following
operations:
• call the PDN extension (
SDN Direct Dial)
• answer calls ringing at the PDN extension
Call Hold and Call Hold
• hold calls and retrieve calls held by the PDN extension (
Retrieve)
• transfer calls to the PDN extension (
Call Transfer Using SDN Button)
Extensions that have an SDN button are called SDN extensions.
•
•
•
•
•
The extension that is registered as the destination of an SDN button must have at least one
PDN button.
One extension can have up to 8 PDN buttons.
An extension can have only one SDN button for each PDN extension.
A PDN extension can only receive OHCA or Whisper OHCA from the corresponding SDN
extension. When a call is made from another extension, a PDN extension will receive a call
waiting tone.
The button light of each PDN/SDN button shows the current status as follows:
Light Pattern
Off
PDN Button Status
SDN Button Status
The PDN extension is idle.
Green on
The extension is on a call using the PDN
button.
The extension is on a call using an SDN
button.
Flashing green
slowly
A call is on hold at the PDN extension
(Regular Hold).
A call answered with the SDN button is
on hold (Regular Hold).
Flashing green
moderately
A call is on hold temporarily or on
Exclusive Call Hold.
A call answered with the SDN button is
on hold temporarily or on Exclusive Call
Hold.
Flashing green
rapidly
The PDN extension is receiving an
incoming call.
An SDN extension is receiving a Hold
Recall or callback ringing from a call
answered with the SDN button.
Red on
A corresponding SDN extension is
using the line.
The corresponding PDN extension or
another corresponding SDN extension
is using the line.
Flashing red
slowly
A corresponding SDN extension is
holding a call.
Another corresponding SDN extension,
or the PDN extension itself, is holding a
call.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
129
1.3.51 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
Light Pattern
Flashing red
rapidly
PDN Button Status
SDN Button Status
The PDN extension is receiving an
incoming call to an incoming call
distribution (ICD) group.
The corresponding PDN extension is
receiving an incoming call.
SDN Direct Dial
Using an SDN button, you can easily call the corresponding PDN extension. SDN buttons are in one of two
modes depending on system programming, and the operation procedure differs as follows:
Enhanced DSS Key Mode
PT/PS
(SDN)
Off-hook.
Talk.
Press corresponding
SDN.
Standard SDN Key Mode
PT/PS
(SDN)
Off-hook.
•
•
•
D.Tone
Press corresponding
SDN.
(SDN)
Press the SDN again.
Talk.
When performing SDN Direct Dial to call the corresponding PDN extension, the SDN button
light shows the current status of the destination extension as follows:
Green on: You are using the line.
Red on: The line is being used. (The PDN extension, or another SDN extension when multiple
extensions have SDN buttons to a same PDN extension, is using the line.)
Even if a PDN extension has set Do Not Disturb (DND), you can call the extension as normal
by pressing the SDN button.
When an SDN button is in Standard SDN Key Mode, you can dial a telephone number while
hearing a dial tone, instead of pressing the SDN button again. Depending on system
programming, your call will be made using either your normal calling privileges (Class of
Service) or those of the corresponding PDN extension (SDN Walking COS).
Call Hold and Call Hold Retrieve
You can put calls answered with a PDN or SDN button on hold normally (1.3.6 Call Hold).
You can also retrieve a call held at your extension/another extension with a simple operation, regardless of
the call type.
130
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.51 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
Call Hold Retrieve
PT/PS
To retrieve a call at the holding extension
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
Off-hook.
Press flashing green
PDN or SDN.
Talk.
To retrieve a call from another extension—only Regular Hold
(PDN)
OR
(SDN)
Off-hook.
Press flashing red
PDN or SDN.
Talk.
•
If a call is not retrieved within a specified time, you will hear an alarm as a reminder (Hold
Recall).
If an outside call is not answered within a specified time, it is automatically disconnected.
•
If Automatic Call Hold has been preprogrammed, you can put the current call on hold
automatically by pressing another PDN button to make or answer another call.
Call Transfer Using SDN Button
You can transfer a call to a PDN extension with a simple operation using a corresponding SDN button.
To transfer a call to a PDN extension
PT/PS
During a conversation
*
(SDN)
Press SDN.
Talk.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
131
1.3.52 Printing Message
•
•
System programming is required to use this feature during a conversation with an extension.
* When an SDN button is in Standard SDN Key Mode, you have to press the SDN button
twice to transfer the call, unless you used that SDN button to answer an incoming call.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Personal Programming—Preferred Line Assignment—Incoming
Select the seized line when going off hook.
• 3.1.2 Personal Programming—Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing
Select the seized line when going off-hook.
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Primary Directory Number (PDN) or Secondary Directory Number (SDN)
button.
1.3.52 Printing Message
You can record a variety of information from your extension using up to 8 preprogrammed messages. Message
information from all extensions is recorded with the PBX. For example, it is possible to use this feature as a
time card by selecting preprogrammed "sign in" and "sign out" messages.
In a hotel-type environment, this feature can be used to record room information from a room extension.
For a list of preprogrammed messages, consult your dealer.
To record
PT/SLT
Off-hook.
•
7
6
Enter
761.
Enter message
number (1–8).
parameter
*
Enter parameter
if required.
C.Tone
Enter #.
On-hook.
1
0300
message no.
parameter
(Snack charge)
#
When a preprogrammed message is selected, detailed information is recorded automatically,
as shown below:
Date
Time
02/02/00 10:45AM
132
message no.
* Depending on the content of the selected message, you may be required to enter a numeric
parameter, such as a price or time. Enter the correct number of characters as required for
the message. For information about required parameters, consult your dealer.
<Example>
If "Snack %%.%%" has been programmed as message number 1 (for recording charges for
room snacks consumed), hotel employees would enter data as in the example below using
the room extension:
761
•
1
Operating Manual
Ext
1234
CO
Dial Number
Snack 03.00
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.54 Private Network Features—CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
1.3.53 Privacy Release
You can let a third party join your current outside call and establish a three-party conversation.
You can also leave the conversation and then let the two other parties talk.
To let a third party join your conversation and establish a three-party conversation
PT/PS
Your extension (on the outside call)
Wait for an answer.
To prolong, press
the S-CO again.
(S-CO)
C.Tone
Press green
S-CO.
Other extension
Talk.
The S-CO button will flash
at all extensions that have
that S-CO button.
A three-party conversation
is now established.
(S-CO)
C.Tone
Press the flashing
S-CO within 5 seconds.
•
•
Off-hook.
Talk.
Only an S-CO button can be used for this operation.
You can leave a three-party conversation and let the two other parties talk by simply going
on-hook.
1.3.54 Private Network Features—CLIP (Calling Line Identification
Presentation)
When making a call through a private network, you can present your preprogrammed telephone number to the
called party.
You can select the telephone number sent, either the number of the line used or the number assigned to your
extension.
If you select "Public", the calling/called party sees the number of the line used (subscriber’s number).
If you select "Your extension", they see the telephone number assigned on your extension.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
133
1.3.55 Private Network Features—CLIR (Calling Line Identification Restriction)
To show either the number assigned to the CO line or your extension
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
1
7
2
2
Enter
Off-hook.
Public
OR
Your extension
C.Tone
Enter 1 for public or 2
for your extension.
7 2.
On-hook.
•
When you forward a call to an outside party, the CLIP number for that call will be that of the
calling party or of the forwarding extension depending on system programming.
•
If you use the ICD Group button to make a call to the other party, the telephone number
assigned to the ICD group will be used.
1.3.55 Private Network Features—CLIR (Calling Line Identification
Restriction)
When making a call through a private network, you can select whether the called party can see your telephone
number or not.
To show/prevent
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
7
1
0
1
Off-hook.
•
Enter
7 1.
Show
OR
Prevent
C.Tone
Enter 0 to show
or 1 to prevent.
On-hook.
You can change the mode by pressing a preset CLIR button while on-hook (There is no CLIR
button on KX-UT series SIP phones).
The CLIR button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: shows your telephone number.
Red on: prevents your telephone number being displayed.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) button.
134
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.57 Private Network Features—COLR (Connected Line Identification Restriction)
1.3.56 Private Network Features—COLP (Connected Line
Identification Presentation)
When receiving a call through a private network, you can present your preprogrammed telephone number to
the calling party.
You can select the telephone number sent, either the number of the line used or the number assigned to your
extension.
If you select "Public", the calling/called party sees the number of the line used (subscriber’s number).
If you select "Your extension", they see the telephone number assigned on your extension.
To show either the number assigned to the CO line or your extension
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
1
7
2
2
Enter
Off-hook.
Public
OR
Your extension
Enter 1 for public or 2
for your extension.
7 2.
C.Tone
On-hook.
1.3.57 Private Network Features—COLR (Connected Line
Identification Restriction)
When receiving a call through a private network, you can select whether the caller can see your telephone
number or not.
To show/prevent
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0
7
Off-hook.
•
Enter
0
7 0.
Show
OR
1
Prevent
Enter 0 to show
or 1 to prevent.
C.Tone
On-hook.
You can change the mode by pressing a preset COLR button while on-hook (There is no
COLR button on KX-UT series SIP phones).
The COLR button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: shows your telephone number.
Red on: prevents your telephone number being displayed.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR) button.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
135
1.3.58 Private Network Features—TIE Line Access
1.3.58 Private Network Features—TIE Line Access
You can access extensions connected to other PBXs in a private network.
To call
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
extension no.
*
OR
7
Off-hook.
•
private phone no.
*
Dial extension number or
enter 7 and then dial private phone number.
Talk.
* Which type of telephone number must be entered depends on the settings of your PBX.
To call with one touch
PT/PS
(NDSS)
Off-hook.
•
Press NDSS.
Talk.
To start monitoring another PBX extension after customizing an NDSS button, go
off-hook, press the NDSS button, and go on-hook.
The NDSS button light will show the current status as follows:
Off: The extension is idle.
Red on: The extension is busy.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) button.
136
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.61 Room Status Control
1.3.59 Quick Dialing
You can make a call simply by pressing the preprogrammed number for quick dialing.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
quick dialing no.
Off-hook.
•
Dial quick dialing
number (max. 8 digits).
This is a useful feature for hotels.
For example, to dial Room Service, dial the digit "3", not the full extension number.
1.3.60 Redial, Last Number
This is convenient when calling the same outside party again.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
OR
OR
REDIAL
Off-hook.
•
•
•
•
Press REDIAL or enter #.
Up to 32 digits can be stored and redialed.
After pressing REDIAL, if you hear a busy tone again, press REDIAL to retry.
If you want to log outgoing intercom calls to the outgoing call log, consult your System
Installer.
If you have seized a CO line, pressing the REDIAL button will be ignored if the last number
you dialed was an extension.
1.3.61 Room Status Control
In a hotel-type environment, an extension assigned as a hotel operator can check guests into
or out of rooms and confirm that the room is clean and ready for the next guest by changing
the room status of the corresponding extension. The hotel operator’s extension must have
flexible buttons assigned as Check-in, Check-out, and Cleaned-up buttons, and a DSS button
for each extension that will be used in a guest room.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
137
1.3.61 Room Status Control
•
•
The hotel operator must be using a 6-line display PT to use the Room Status Control features.
While in Room Status Control mode:
a. The hotel operator’s extension can only check extensions in/out and ready/not ready. All
other operations will be ignored.
b. The light of each DSS button shows the room status of the corresponding extension as
follows:
Off: Checked-out and Ready
Flashing Red: Checked-out and Not Ready
Red on: Checked-in
[Light Pattern Example: Checked-in Mode]
DSS button
Check-in button
Room101
Check-out button
Room102
Cleaned-up button
Room103
Rooms 101 and 103
are currently in
checked-in status.
Room104
Room105
c. The lights of other buttons may not show their normal display.
d. The hotel operator’s extension is considered to be busy. Callers to that extension will
hear a busy tone.
To check in a guest
6-Line Display PT
While on-hook
Enter Room Number
ENTER
extension no.
OR
(Check-in)
(DSS)
EXIT
ENTER
Press Check-in.
Dial extension number and then press
"ENTER", or press desired DSS.
To continue
Room: 1234
EXIT
Confirm check in?
NO
Press "YES".
138
Operating Manual
YES
OR
(Check-in)
Press "EXIT"
or Check-in to finish.
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.61 Room Status Control
•
•
After check-in, Remote Extension Dial Lock is deactivated, and the guest can make outside
calls from the room extension. (Refer to "2.1.5 Remote Extension Dial Lock".)
When the room status of extensions is changed, detailed room status information is recorded
with the PBX automatically. This requires system programming.
<Example>
Date
Ext
Time
02/02/00 03:07PM
CO
1234
Dial Number
Check in
To check out a guest
6-Line Display PT
While on-hook
Enter Room Number
ENTER
extension no.
(Check-out)
OR
(DSS)
EXIT
ENTER
Dial extension number and then press
"ENTER", or press desired DSS.
Press Check-out.
To continue
Room: 1234
EXIT
Confirm check out?
NO
OR
(Check-out)
YES
Press "EXIT"
or Check-out to finish.
Press "YES".
•
•
•
After check-out, Remote Extension Dial Lock is activated, and outside calls from the room
extension are restricted. (Refer to "2.1.5 Remote Extension Dial Lock".)
After check-out, wake-up call and Call Log information for the room extension are cleared
automatically. In addition, features set on the room extension are reset to the default settings.
For a list of features that are reset, refer to "1.3.26 Extension Feature Clear".
When the room status of extensions is changed, detailed room status information is recorded
with the PBX automatically. This requires system programming.
<Example>
Date
Time
02/03/00 08:08AM
Document Version 2014-08
Ext
1234
CO
Dial Number
Check out
Operating Manual
139
1.3.62 Self Labeling (KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 only)
To change the cleaning status of a room
6-Line Display PT
While on-hook
Enter Room Number
(Cleaned-up)
EXIT
ENTER
Press Cleaned-up.
To continue
ENTER
extension no.
OR
OR
(DSS)
(Cleaned-up)
Dial extension number and then press
"ENTER", or press desired DSS.
•
EXIT
Press "EXIT"
or Cleaned-up to finish.
For information about other Hospitality features, refer to "1.3.34 HOSPITALITY
FEATURES".
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Check-in, Check-out, or Cleaned-up button.
1.3.62 Self Labeling (KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560/
KX-UT248/KX-UT670 only)
The KX-NT366/KX-NT560 IP-PT and KX-UT248/KX-UT670 SIP phone have flexible buttons with an LCD
screen next to the buttons.
For KX-NT366:
The KX-NT366 IP-PT has 12 flexible buttons, and the telephone’s display shows which feature, telephone
number, or extension number is assigned to each button. You can press the NEXT PAGE key to display 3
other sets (pages) of 12 flexible button assignments. A different feature, telephone number, or extension
number can be assigned to each button in each set. This means that 48 flexible buttons are available.
Page 4
Page 3
140
Page 1
Page 2
Bank
CO 6
Home
CO 5
Sales
LCS
CO 4
CO 3
PDN
CO 2
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.62 Self Labeling (KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 only)
For KX-NT553/KX-NT556:
The KX-NT553/KX-NT556 IP-PT has 12 flexible buttons, and the telephone’s display shows which feature,
telephone number, or extension number is assigned to each button. You can press the NEXT PAGE key to
display other sets (pages) of 12 flexible button assignments as below.
Pages
Total Flexible Buttons
KX-NT553
2
24
KX-NT556
3
36
Example: KX-NT556
Page 3
Page 1
Page 2
Bank
CO 6
Home
CO 5
Sales
LCS
CO 4
CO 3
PDN
CO 2
For KX-NT560:
The KX-NT560 IP-PT has 8 flexible buttons, and the telephone’s display shows which feature, telephone
number, or extension number is assigned to each button. You can press the Page key to display 3 other sets
(pages) of 8 flexible button assignments. A different feature, telephone number, or extension number can be
assigned to each button in each set. This means that 32 flexible buttons are available.
Page 4
Page 3
Page 1
Bank
Home
Sales-1
Sales-2
Page 2
DN-1
DN-2
DN-3
DN-4
S-CO1
S-CO2
S-CO3
S-CO4
Headset Company-A
Wrap-up Company-B
Headset Company-A
Log-in
Company-C
Wrap-up Company-B
Log-out
Company-D
S-CO5
Log-in
Company-C
S-CO6
Log-out Company-D
S-CO7
S-CO8
For KX-UT248:
The KX-UT248 SIP phone has 8 flexible buttons, and the telephone’s display shows which feature, telephone
number, or extension number is assigned to each button. You can press the Page keys to display 2 other sets
(pages) of 8 flexible button assignments. A different feature, telephone number, or extension number can be
assigned to each button in each set. This means that 24 flexible buttons are available.
Page 3
Page 1
Bank
Home
Sales-1
Sales-2
Page 2
DN-1
DN-2
DN-3
DN-4
S-CO1
S-CO2
S-CO3
S-CO4
Headset Company-A
Wrap-up Company-B
Headset Company-A
Log-in
Company-C
Wrap-up Company-B
Log-out
Company-D
S-CO5
Log-in
Company-C
S-CO6
Log-out Company-D
S-CO7
S-CO8
For KX-UT670:
The KX-UT670 SIP phone has 24 flexible buttons. Each button can be assigned a feature, telephone number,
extension number, etc., with a custom label for each. You can switch the display between single-row display
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
141
1.3.63 Speed Dialing, Personal
and full-screen display. In single-row display, 6 flexible buttons are displayed, and you can press the Page key
to display another row of buttons. In full-screen display, all 24 flexible buttons are displayed at once.
Row 4
Row 3
Row 1
Row 2
Bank
DN-1
Home
DN-1
Sales-1
DN-3
Sales-2
DN-4
To switch display
KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560/
KX-UT248/KX-UT670
OR
OR
OR
OR
Press NEXT PAGE or Page key
to display the desired page.
•
For KX-NT366 and KX-NT560 users:
– When you answer an incoming call or when you seize a CO line, the display automatically
changes to the page that contains the green lit button.
– After customizing each button, you can set the displayed text for the button. For details
about customizing buttons, refer to "3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons".
•
For KX-UT248 and KX-UT670 users:
– You can customize the flexible buttons and set the displayed text for each button using
Web Maintenance Console. For details about customizing buttons, refer to "Customizing
Editing Settings in Web Maintenance Console" in
the Flexible Buttons" in "
"3.2.1 User Programming".
– For the KX-UT248, the display shows a maximum of 10 characters for each button. For
the KX-UT670, you can specify up to 12 characters, but some characters may not be
displayed depending on the characters used.
1.3.63 Speed Dialing, Personal
You can store up to 100 numbers at your extension for your personal use.
This feature is also known as Station Speed Dialing.
142
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.64 Speed Dialing, System
To store a phone number
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
3
Off-hook.
Enter
0
30.
personal speed
dialing no.
desired
phone no.
Enter personal speed
dialing number
(2 digits).
Enter desired
phone number
(max. 32 digits).
C.Tone
Enter #.
On-hook.
Enter CO line access number
before outside phone number.
To dial
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
personal speed
dialing no.
OR
Off-hook.
•
•
Press AUTO DIAL
or enter
.
Enter
.
Dial personal speed
dialing number (2 digits).
To call using a directory, refer to "1.4.3 Directories".
For SIP phone users: Telephones display only personal speed dialing numbers.
1.3.64 Speed Dialing, System
You can make calls using speed dialing numbers stored in the PBX.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
OR
Off-hook.
•
•
Press AUTO DIAL
or enter
.
system speed
dialing no.
Dial system speed
dialing number (3 digits).
To call using a directory, refer to "1.4.3 Directories".
For SIP phone users: Telephones display only system speed dialing numbers.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
143
1.3.65 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
1.3.65 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Your PBX can provide you with answering machine service.
Your extension is assigned a message box, into which callers can leave voice messages for you.
After callers reach your message box, they will hear your personal greeting message. You can record two
kinds of personal greetings: a normal greeting message and a greeting message for each time mode. You can
also play back and clear your greeting messages and the voice messages left by callers.
–
Recording a Normal Greeting Message
–
Recording a Greeting Message for Each Time Mode
Redirecting Your Calls to Your Message Box
–
–
Leaving Voice Messages
–
Listening to Voice Messages Left by Callers
–
Accessing Your Message Box from an Outside Telephone
–
Accessing the Message Box of Another Extension from Your Extension
•
This feature is not available for SIP Extensions. Even if a caller leaves a voice messages for
a SIP Extension, the Message button light or Message/Ringer Lamp will not turn on to tell
you that a voice message has been received.
You may hear a busy tone when trying to access your message box if too many other users
are already accessing their message boxes. In that case, wait a few minutes and try again.
If the used recording space (including greeting messages and voice messages left by callers)
for the SVM feature reaches a certain limit, the display informs you that the recording space
is almost full, and you will hear dial tone 3 when going off-hook.
•
•
Dial Tone 3
1s
•
Operation Reference When Accessing Your Message Box
After entering the SVM feature number ( 38), the operations below are available by entering
the corresponding numbers.
Operation No.
0
To clear the normal greeting message
1
To record a normal greeting message
2
To play back the normal greeting message
3
To listen to voice messages left by callers
8
To set a greeting message for each time mode
#
144
Operation
Operating Manual
6
To leave a voice message to another extension’s message box
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.65 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Recording a Normal Greeting Message
To record
PT/SLT/PS
8
3
Off-hook.
Enter
1
C.Tone
Record
message.
Enter 1.
38.
Example: "You have reached John. I am sorry I cannot
take your call right now. Please leave a message."
The greeting
message is
played back.
OR
C.Tone
dial key
A confirmation
tone is heard.
Clear
0
*
OR
1
Rerecord
Enter 0 or 1 while the greeting
message is being played back.
Press STORE or any
dial key (0–9, , #).
On-hook.
To play back
PT/SLT/PS
8
3
Off-hook.
Enter
0
C.Tone
The greeting message
is played back.
Enter 2.
38.
A confirmation
tone is heard.
Clear
2
*
OR
1
Rerecord
Enter 0 or 1 while the greeting
message is being played back.
•
On-hook.
* This step can be omitted.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
145
1.3.65 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
To clear
PT/SLT/PS
3
Off-hook.
Enter
8
0
38.
C.Tone
On-hook.
Enter 0.
Recording a Greeting Message for Each Time Mode
In addition to a normal greeting message, you can record a specific greeting message for each time mode
(day/lunch/break/night).
To record
PT/SLT/PS
0 Day
3
1 Night
8
8
1
2 Lunch
C.Tone
3 Break
Off-hook.
Enter
Enter 8.
38.
OR
dial key
Record
message.
Enter the desired
time mode.
C.Tone
Enter 1.
The greeting message
is played back.
Press STORE or any
dial key (0–9, , #).
Example: "You have reached John. I am sorry I am
out for lunch right now. Please leave a message."
0
A confirmation
tone is heard.
Clear
*
OR
1
Rerecord
Enter 0 or 1 while the greeting
message is being played back.
146
Operating Manual
On-hook.
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.65 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
To play back
PT/SLT/PS
0 Day
8
3
1 Night
8
2
2 Lunch
C.Tone
3 Break
Off-hook.
Enter
Enter 8.
38.
0
The greeting message
is played back.
Enter the desired
time mode.
A confirmation
tone is heard.
Clear
Enter 2.
*
OR
1
Rerecord
On-hook.
Enter 0 or 1 while the greeting
message is being played back.
•
* This step can be omitted.
To clear
PT/SLT/PS
0 Day
3
8
8
1 Night
2 Lunch
3 Break
Off-hook.
Enter
0
Enter 0.
•
Enter 8.
38.
Enter the desired
time mode.
C.Tone
On-hook.
If both the greeting message for a certain time mode and the normal greeting message have
been recorded, callers will hear the greeting message for that time mode. However, if no
greeting message has been recorded for a certain time mode, the normal greeting message
will be played instead.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
147
1.3.65 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Redirecting Your Calls to Your Message Box
You can set incoming calls to be redirected to your own message box so that callers can leave voice messages
when you cannot answer the phone.
To set/cancel
PT/SLT/PS
0
Both Calls
OR
7
1
1
Outside Calls
OR
2
Off-hook.
Enter
71.
Intercom Calls
Enter 0 to 2 as you desire.
0
Cancel
2
All Calls
3
Busy
4
No Answer
5
Busy/No Answer
Enter required number.
For "Cancel", go on-hook
directly after entering 0.
floating extension no.
for the SVM feature
Enter the floating extension
number for the SVM feature.
•
148
#
Enter #.
C.Tone
On-hook.
The default floating extension number (591) for the SVM feature depends on system
programming. For more information, consult your System Administrator or System Manager.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.65 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Leaving Voice Messages
If the extension user you called is not able to answer your call, and your call is redirected to the message box,
you will hear the greeting message. Then, you can leave a voice message for that extension. It is also possible
to leave a voice message directly in the message box of a desired extension by following the steps below:
To leave a voice message directly to another extension’s message box
PT/SLT/PS
3
Off-hook.
Enter
You hear the
greeting message.
8
38.
#
6
Enter #6.
extension no.
Dial extension number.
OR
C.Tone
dial key
Record
message.
On-hook or press any
dial key (0–9, , #).
•
Voice message recording will stop, you will hear a notification tone, and the call will be
disconnected, in the following cases:
a. the recording time for the voice message reaches the preprogrammed limit. (default: 120
seconds)
b. the recording space for the SVM feature reaches the limit.
•
When you are on the phone, you can transfer the call directly to the message box of a desired
extension by placing the call on hold temporarily, then pressing 38 + #6 + the desired
extension number. This allows the caller to leave a voice message in the message box of the
desired extension.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
149
1.3.65 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Listening to Voice Messages Left by Callers
When a caller leaves a voice message, information about that caller is also recorded as the SVM Log. The
SVM Log can be viewed using the display of a PT or PS by pressing the Message button.
To listen to voice messages
PT/PS
While on-hook
Press MESSAGE
until desired SVM Log
appears.
Off-hook.
PT/SLT/PS
3
Off-hook.
Enter
8
3
Enter 3.
38.
PT/SLT/PS
OR
7
Off-hook.
0
2
Press MESSAGE
or enter 702.
To clear the voice message that you are listening to
PT/SLT/PS
While hearing the voice message
3
OR
1
Enter 3.
•
150
Press STORE or
enter 1 to confirm.
Various operations are available by entering numbers while you are listening to a recorded
voice message using any of the methods described above. The available options are as
follows:
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.65 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Operation No.
1
/
Operations
#
To play back the voice message from the beginning
2
To go to the next voice message
3
To clear the voice message
(Press the AUTO DIAL/STORE button or enter 1 to confirm.)
4
To call back the caller who left the voice message
5
To go back to the previous voice message
#
6
To leave a voice message directly in the message box of another extension
(Enter desired extension number.)
If you cannot input the desired extension number within the specified time,
play back the voice message from the beginning. If you enter an incorrect
number for the desired extension number, you will hear a reorder tone.
#
8
To play back your greeting message and record a voice message in your own
message box
#
9
To end the call
The operation numbers above may be changed to other numbers. If you cannot activate these operations,
consult your system administrator.
•
•
•
•
In addition to the caller information that is recorded in the Call Log, the following SVM Log information is
recorded with voice messages left by callers:
• Caller’s Name
• Caller’s Telephone Number
• Time recording started
• Voice Message Status
– "New" is displayed for voice messages that have not previously been listened to.
– "Old" is displayed for voice messages that have previously been listened to.
Please note that the information shown on the display may vary depending on the information that was
received and the type of telephone used. Only users of a 6-line display PT can view all of the above
information.
You can lock the SVM Log display by using an extension PIN (Personal Identification Number) to prevent
other users from viewing the information and from playing back your voice messages (Display Lock). Refer
to "3.1.2 Personal Programming".
If your telephone has a Message for Another Extension button, you can access the message box of another
extension and listen to voice messages for that extension.
If a new voice message has been left in your message box, you will hear dial tone 4 after going off-hook.
In addition, if your telephone has a Message button or Message/Ringer Lamp, the corresponding button
or lamp will light when a voice message has been left.
Dial Tone 4
1s
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
151
1.3.65 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
To listen to voice messages while your display is locked
PT
PIN: Personal Identification Number
4
Off-hook.
Enter
your
extension no.
extension no.
7
Dial your
extension number.
47.
extension PIN
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
If the wrong extension PIN is
entered, you hear an alarm tone.
8
3
Enter
•
38.
3
Enter 3.
When you press the Message button to play back voice messages while on-hook, Display
Lock is temporarily deactivated after you enter the extension PIN.
To clear voice messages from the SVM Log
PT
While on-hook
Press MESSAGE
until desired SVM Log
appears.
152
Operating Manual
Press TRANSFER.
Press STORE.
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.65 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Accessing Your Message Box from an Outside Telephone
You can remotely access your message box and perform any operations of the SVM feature through a CO
line as if you were at your own extension.
From Outside Telephone
PIN: Personal Identification Number
The greeting
message is
played back.
desired phone no.
Off-hook.
4
Dial desired phone
number of a destination
that has set the SVM feature.
your
extension no.
extension PIN
extension no.
Dial your
extension number.
•
7
Enter 47 while hearing
the greeting message.
3
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
Enter
For available operations,
see "Operation Reference
When Accessing Your
Message Box".
8
38.
If you hear a reorder tone when you try to leave a voice message directly in the message box
of another extension, that message box is unavailable. You can enter another extension
number by pressing " ".
When accessing your message box from an outside telephone, you cannot call back callers
who have left voice messages, by pressing 4 while hearing the voice message.
•
To listen to voice messages left in the message box of another extension
From Outside Telephone
PIN: Personal Identification Number
While hearing voice messages in your message box
#
The greeting
message is
played back.
8
4
Enter
Enter #8.
extension PIN
Enter extension PIN for
that extension (max. 10 digits).
C.Tone &
D.Tone
7
desired extension no.
Dial desired
extension number.
47.
3
Enter
8
38.
3
Enter 3.
If the wrong extension PIN is
entered, you hear an alarm tone.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
153
1.3.67 Timed Reminder
Accessing the Message Box of Another Extension from Your Extension
You can access the message box of another extension (for example, to record a greeting message for that
extension) by following the steps below:
PT/SLT/PS
PIN: Personal Identification Number
4
Off-hook.
Enter
7
desired extension no.
Dial desired
extension number.
47.
3
extension PIN
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Enter extension PIN for
that extension (max. 10 digits).
Enter
8
For available operations, see
"Operation Reference When
Accessing Your Message Box".
38.
If the wrong extension PIN is
entered, you hear an alarm tone.
1.3.66 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station)
You can be notified of incoming outside calls through an external speaker. These calls can be answered from
any extension.
Through an external speaker
PT/SLT/PS
While hearing a tone
4
Off-hook.
•
Enter
2
42.
external pager no.
Dial external pager
number (1 digit).
C.Tone
Talk.
You can also receive a paging announcement via a speaker with this operation.
1.3.67 Timed Reminder
You can set an alarm at your telephone as a reminder of a meeting or appointment.
The alarm can occur either once or daily (every day until canceled) at a preset time. When you go off-hook to
answer, you will hear a special dial tone or prerecorded message.
154
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.67 Timed Reminder
•
This feature can also be set remotely by an extension assigned as a hotel operator (Remote
Wake-up Call). The most recent setting will be valid no matter which extension made the
setting. For information about setting a Remote Wake-up Call, refer to "1.3.74 Wake-up
Call".
To set
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
12 H*: hour/minute
7
Off-hook.
6
Enter
0
0
1
24 H*:
OR
Daily
hour/minute
C.Tone
On-hook.
Enter 0 for once
or 1 for daily.
•
PM
Enter hour (01–12) and minute (00–59)
and then 0 for AM or 1 for PM,
or enter hour (00–23) and minute (00–59).
Once
1
AM
1
OR
Enter 1.
760.
0
OR
* Enter the time in the format assigned to your PBX (12-hour or 24-hour).
To cancel
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
7
Enter
Off-hook.
6
760.
0
0
Enter 0.
C.Tone
On-hook.
To stop or answer the ringback
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
OR
Press INTERCOM or off-hook.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
155
1.3.68 Time Service
To confirm
PT
Press TRANSFER
several times.
•
•
•
•
You can also confirm the timed reminder by using the soft button.
The alarm keeps ringing for preprogrammed seconds.
If you receive an incoming call during ringback, the ringing starts after the ringback stops.
If you are having a conversation exceeding alarm ringing period, the ringback will start
after your conversation.
1.3.68 Time Service
You can check the current status of the Time Service on the display.
PT
While on-hook
OR
(Time Service
(Day/Night/
Lunch/Break))
Press TRANSFER or Time Service
(Day/Night/Lunch/Break).
•
•
The Time Service (Day/Night/Lunch/Break) button light always shows the current status as
follows:
Off: Day mode
Green on: Lunch mode
Flashing green: Break mode
Red on: Night mode
Flashing red: Holiday mode
Any extension user except the managers can check the current status by pressing the Time
Service (Day/Night/Lunch/Break) button.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Time Service (Day/Night/Lunch/Break) button.
156
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.70 VOICE MAIL FEATURES
1.3.69 Verification Code Entry
You can use your calling privileges (Class of Service) at another extension. You can override restrictions which
have been set at that extension. To use this feature, a verification code and verification code PIN (Personal
Identification Number) are required.
To call
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
PIN: Personal Identification Number
4
Off-hook.
Enter
verification code PIN
7
47.
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Enter verification code
PIN (max. 10 digits).
verification code
Enter
.
Enter verification code
(max. 4 digits).
desired
phone no.
Dial desired
phone number.
If a wrong verification code PIN is
entered, you hear an alarm tone.
Seize a CO line before entering
an outside phone number.
1.3.70 VOICE MAIL FEATURES
The following services are available using a Voice Processing System:
Features
Voice Mail Integration
Live Call Screening (LCS)
Two-way Record
•
Description
You or an outside party can access the Voice Processing System from a
telephone.
(® 1.3.73 Voice Mail Features—Voice Mail Integration)
Using a Panasonic Voice Processing system that supports digital
integration (e.g., KX-TVA series), you can monitor a call without answering
while the caller is leaving a message in your mailbox.
(® 1.3.71 Voice Mail Features—LCS (Live Call Screening))
Using a Panasonic Voice Processing system that supports digital
integration (e.g., KX-TVA series), you can record a conversation into a
mailbox while talking on the phone.
(® 1.3.72 Voice Mail Features—Two-way Record)
Voice Processing System features are not available for SIP phone users.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
157
1.3.71 Voice Mail Features—LCS (Live Call Screening)
1.3.71 Voice Mail Features—LCS (Live Call Screening)
Using a Panasonic Voice Processing system that supports digital integration (e.g., KX-TVA
series), you can monitor a call without answering while the caller is leaving a message in your
mailbox. If you so desire, you can answer the call while monitoring. There are two methods
available as follows:
Hands-free mode (Default):
You can monitor the message automatically, live through the telephone speaker.
Private mode:
You will hear an alarm tone while the caller is leaving a message.
Before operating
• Create a Live Call Screening (LCS) button (Personal Programming).
• Select the mode, either Hands-free or Private (Personal Programming).
• Set the extension PIN (Personal Identification Number).
• Set the Live Call Screening feature.
To set Live Call Screening
PT/PS
PIN: Personal Identification Number
extension PIN
(Live Call
Screening)
Press Live Call
Screening.
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
This is required only when
an extension PIN is stored.
To cancel Live Call Screening
PT/PS
(Live Call
Screening)
Press red Live Call Screening.
158
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.71 Voice Mail Features—LCS (Live Call Screening)
Operation Flowchart
The operations in the shaded areas can be done hands-free.
PT/PS
Hands-free Mode
Private Mode
(Alarm Tone)
Monitoring (Hands-free)
Monitoring
SP-PHONE
Monitoring (Handset)
MONITOR
OR
No operation
OR
(Live Call
Screening)
Press SP-PHONE, MONITOR or Live Call
Screening.
Off-hook.
Stop
monitoring Answering
SP-PHONE
(Live Call
Screening)
Press Live Call
Screening.
OR
MONITOR
Press
SP-PHONE
or MONITOR.
Stop
monitoring
SP-PHONE
OR
Stop
monitoring
Answering
the call
(Live Call
Screening)
(Live Call
Screening)
Press
Live Call
Screening.
On-hook.
Press
Live Call
Screening.
MONITOR
Press SP-PHONE or
MONITOR.
•
Answering
the call
•
The Live Call Screening (LCS) button light shows the feature status as follows:
Off: LCS is off.
Flashing green rapidly: Alerting in the Private mode.
Flashing green slowly: Monitoring.
Red on: LCS is on.
The manager extension can clear an extension PIN.
This feature is available for a single line telephone if it is connected to a proprietary telephone
in parallel. (Private mode only)
To answer the call while monitoring, press Recall/hookswitch.
Only the handset monitoring in the Private mode is available for PS users.
•
For information about other Voice Mail features, refer to "1.3.70 VOICE MAIL FEATURES".
•
•
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Personal Programming—Live Call Screening Mode Set
Select the mode, either monitoring the message through the speaker automatically or
receiving, while the caller leaves a message.
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Live Call Screening (LCS) button.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
159
1.3.72 Voice Mail Features—Two-way Record
1.3.72 Voice Mail Features—Two-way Record
Using a Panasonic Voice Processing system that supports digital integration (e.g., KX-TVA
series), you can record a conversation into a mailbox while talking on the phone.
You can select the mailbox each time you record a conversation.
To record into your mailbox
PT/PS
During a conversation
(Two-way
Record)
To stop recording,
press this button again.
Press Two-way Record.
To record into another mailbox (Two-way Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation
(DSS)
(Two-way
Transfer)
Press Two-way
Transfer.
OR
another
extension no.
Press DSS or enter
another extension
number.
To stop recording,
press this button again.
To record into another mailbox with one touch (One-touch Two-way Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation
(One-touch
Two-way
Transfer)
Press One-touch
Two-way Transfer.
•
160
The Two-way Record button light, Two-way Transfer button light or One-touch Two-way
Transfer button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Not recording.
On: Recording the conversation.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.73 Voice Mail Features—Voice Mail Integration
•
•
Note:
Many states have imposed regulations on the manner in which 2-way telephone
conversations may be recorded, so you should inform the other party that the conversation
is being recorded.
Consult your local telephone company for further information.
For information about other Voice Mail features, refer to "1.3.70 VOICE MAIL FEATURES".
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Two-way Record button, a Two-way Transfer button and a One-touch
Two-way Transfer button.
1.3.73 Voice Mail Features—Voice Mail Integration
If you cannot answer calls, you can forward them to your mailbox. You can select the type of incoming calls
(Intercom Calls/Outside Calls/Both Calls). If your telephone has a Message button, the Message light turns on
and lets you know you have messages. Even if a Message button is not provided, you will hear an indication
tone* when going off-hook.
You can also transfer received outside calls to a mailbox so that calling parties can leave messages. If you
create a Voice Mail Transfer button on your phone, the transfer is done without knowing the mailbox number
(Voice Mail Transfer). The duration for recording depends on the voice processing system. Using the Voice
Mail Transfer button, you can also perform the following operations with one touch (for digital integration only):
– To forward a call to your mailbox while it is ringing
– To transfer your own call to the called extension’s mailbox
– To listen to messages
To forward your calls to your mailbox
PT/SLT/PS
0
Both Calls
OR
7
1
1
2
Outside Calls
OR
2
Off-hook.
Enter
3
4
Intercom Calls
Enter 0 to 2 as you desire.
71.
0
5
Cancel
All Calls
Busy
No Answer
Busy/No Answer
Enter required number.
For "Cancel", go on-hook
directly after entering 0.
UM group’s floating
extension no.
#
Enter UM group’s floating
extension number.
Enter #.
Document Version 2014-08
C.Tone
On-hook.
Operating Manual
161
1.3.73 Voice Mail Features—Voice Mail Integration
To forward a call to your mailbox while it is ringing
PT/PS
While on-hook
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Press Voice Mail
Transfer.
To transfer a call to a mailbox (Voice Mail Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation
(DSS)
OR
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
desired
extension no.
Press Voice Mail
Transfer.
Press DSS or enter desired
extension number.
To transfer your own call to the called extension’s mailbox
PT/PS
extension no.
OR
R.B.Tone
OR
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
B.Tone
(DSS)
Off-hook.
Dial extension number
or press DSS.
OR
DND Tone
Press Voice Mail
Transfer.
To listen to messages
PT/SLT/PS
OR
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Off-hook.
OR
voice mail floating
extension no.
Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail
Transfer, or enter voice mail
floating extension number.
162
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.74 Wake-up Call
* Indication tone after going off-hook.
1s
•
If using a PS in parallel with a PT or SLT (in Wireless XDP Parallel mode), you cannot use
the Voice Mail Transfer button to forward a call to your mailbox while it is ringing.
•
For information about other Voice Mail features, refer to "1.3.70 VOICE MAIL FEATURES".
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Voice Mail Transfer button or a Message button.
1.3.74 Wake-up Call
In a hotel-type environment, an extension assigned as a hotel operator can remotely set or
cancel a timed reminder to a room extension (Remote Wake-up Call). This allows guests to
request wake-up calls without having to program the extension themselves. The hotel
operator can also confirm the current timed reminder setting for a room extension.
•
This feature can also be set from a room extension (Timed Reminder). The most recent
setting will be valid no matter which extension made the setting. For information about setting
a Timed Reminder, refer to "1.3.67 Timed Reminder".
To set
PT
extension no.
7
6
1
OR
(DSS)
Off-hook.
Enter
12 H*: hour/minute
76
.
Enter 1.
0
24 H*:
AM
OR
1
OR
PM
hour/minute
Enter hour (01–12) and minute (00–59)
and then 0 for AM or 1 for PM,
or enter hour (00–23) and minute (00–59).
•
Dial extension number
or press desired DSS.
0
Once
OR
1
Daily
Enter 0 for once
or 1 for daily.
C.Tone
On-hook.
* Enter the time in the format assigned to your PBX (12-hour or 24-hour).
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
163
1.3.75 Walking COS
To cancel
PT
extension no.
7
6
0
OR
C.Tone
(DSS)
Enter
Off-hook.
76
.
Enter 0.
On-hook.
Dial extension number
or press desired DSS.
To confirm
Display PT
Enter Room Number
7
Off-hook.
6
Enter
76
2
.
Enter 2.
1234 11:50 AM Onetime
extension no.
OR
C.Tone
(DSS)
On-hook.
Dial extension number
or press desired DSS.
•
When a timed reminder starts, and when it is answered or not answered, detailed timed
reminder information is recorded automatically. This requires system programming.
<Example>
Date
Time
02/02/00 02:45PM
02/02/00 02:47PM
•
•
Confirm the Timed Reminder
information.
Ext
1234
1234
CO
Dial Number
Timed Reminder/Start
Timed Reminder/Answer
Users of PTs without displays can confirm only whether a timed reminder has been set or
not by following the steps shown above. If set, a confirmation tone will be heard.
For information about other Hospitality features, refer to "1.3.34 HOSPITALITY
FEATURES".
1.3.75 Walking COS
You can use your calling privileges (Class of Service) at another extension. You can override restrictions which
have been set at that extension. To use this feature, an original extension number and an extension PIN
(Personal Identification Number) are required.
After performing the Walking COS feature, you can set the following features on your telephone from another
extension or through DISA.
• Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)
164
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.76 Walking Extension
•
•
•
•
Changing the Log-in/Log-out Status of Extensions
Absent Message
Extension Dial Lock
Time Service—Changing the Time Mode (Day/Night/Lunch/Break)
To make a call or set features from another extension
PT/SLT/PS
PIN: Personal Identification Number
desired
phone no.
4
Off-hook.
Enter
7
47.
your
extension no.
extension PIN
Dial your
extension number.
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
If a wrong extension PIN is
entered, you hear an alarm tone.
OR
desired
feature no.
Dial desired phone number
or desired feature number.
Seize a CO line before entering
an outside phone number.
To make a call or set features through DISA
From Outside Telephone
DISA
phone no.
Off-hook.
PIN: Personal Identification Number
4
R.B.Tone &
DISA message
Enter
Dial DISA
phone number.
7
47.
your
extension no.
extension no.
Dial your
extension number.
desired
phone no.
extension PIN
C.Tone &
D.Tone
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
If a wrong extension PIN is
entered, you hear an alarm tone.
OR
desired
feature no.
Dial desired phone number
or desired feature number.
Seize a CO line before entering
an outside phone number.
1.3.76 Walking Extension
You can exchange the settings set at another extension with your own settings. This allows you to use your
own settings, including your extension number, on another person’s extension. Settings such as extension
number and One-touch Dialing memory are available at the new extension. It is also possible to exchange the
DSS Console settings along with the extension settings. Walking Extension is useful, for example, when you
move to a new location in the office.
This feature is also known as Walking Station.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
165
1.3.77 Walking Extension, Enhanced
To exchange your settings with another extension
PT/SLT
PIN: Personal Identification Number
Off-hook.
7
2
Enter
727.
extension PIN
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
•
•
•
•
your
extension no.
7
Dial your
extension number.
D.Tone
On-hook.
An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. Refer to
"1.3.27 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)".
Your previous extension will receive the old settings of your new extension.
Extension settings can be exchanged between SLT and SLT, PT and PT, or SLT and PT.
If you are using a KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321)/KX-NT560/KX-DT343/KX-DT346
telephone with a Bluetooth wireless headset, and exchange the settings with another
KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321)/KX-NT560/KX-DT343/KX-DT346 telephone user, you
cannot use your Bluetooth wireless headset at the other extension.
Bluetooth wireless headsets are registered on extensions themselves. Therefore, you have
to register a Bluetooth wireless headset on each desired extension. For details about
registration, refer to "Bluetooth Registration" in "3.1.2 Personal Programming".
1.3.77 Walking Extension, Enhanced
In addition to exchanging the settings between extensions (Walking Extension), you can change the status of
your extension to "Service-in" or "Service-out" (Enhanced Walking Extension).
Service-in: An extension is in use (normal status).
Service-out: Extension Dial Lock (® 1.3.25 Extension Dial Lock), Do Not Disturb (DND) (® 1.3.20 DND (Do
Not Disturb)) and Display Lock (® 3.1.2 Personal Programming) are activated on an extension. When the
extension is set to "Service-out", the extension user cannot do the following:
• Make unauthorized outside calls
• Receive calls
• See their personal speed dialing directory, call log, or SVM log
This feature is useful when:
a. one person uses the same extension settings at different locations, such as another branch office or at
home
b. two or more people use the same telephone in turn
166
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.77 Walking Extension, Enhanced
<Example (a)> When using extension settings at a different location
Main Office
Service-in
Service-out
Service-out
Extension status
of Telephone A
Extn. No. 101
Service-in
Service-out
Extn. No. 101
Service-out
Extn. No. 102
Service-out
Branch Office
Extn. No. 102
Service-out
Extn. No. 102
Service-out
Service-out
Service-out
Service-in
Extn. No. 101
Service-in
Extension status
of Telephone B
Service-in
In this example, extension user A sets his/her own extension status to "Service-out" at the main office. Then,
he/she can set another extension status to "Service-in" at the branch office to have his/her own extension
settings available at the extension.
<Example (b)> When two users share one telephone
User A
Extn. No. 101
Service-in
Extension
Status
User B
Service-out
Extn. No. 101
Service-out
Service-out
Service-in
Extn. No. 102
Service-out
Extn. No. 101
Service-out
Extn. No. 102
Service-out
Service-in
Service-in
Extn. No. 102
Service-in
In this example, extension users A and B work in shifts and use the same extension in turn. User A sets the
extension status to "Service-out" when he/she finishes work. Then, user B can set the extension status to
"Service-in" and have his/her own settings available at the extension.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
167
1.3.78 Whisper OHCA
To set an extension to Service-out status
PT/SLT
Off-hook.
7
2
Enter
727.
7
C.Tone
On-hook.
Enter #.
To set an extension to Service-in status and have your own settings available
PT/SLT
PIN: Personal Identification Number
Off-hook.
7
2
Enter
727.
your
extension no.
7
Enter
.
Dial your extension
number.
extension PIN
C.Tone
On-hook.
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
•
•
An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. Refer to
"1.3.27 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)".
Extension settings can be exchanged between SLT and SLT, PT and PT, or SLT and PT.
1.3.78 Whisper OHCA
During a conversation, you can be informed of a waiting call with a voice announcement. You cannot talk to
the caller, but you can hear the caller speaking through the handset.
To set/cancel for intercom calls (Manual Call Waiting)
PT
0
7
3
1
3
Off-hook.
168
Operating Manual
Enter
731.
No call
OR
C.Tone
Whisper OHCA
Enter 0 or 3.
On-hook.
Document Version 2014-08
1.3.79 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
•
•
•
•
Whisper OHCA is only available with certain digital proprietary telephones and IP proprietary
telephones. In addition, both you and the other party must use supported telephones.
Whisper OHCA is not available for outside calls; only call waiting tone can be set (refer to
"1.3.13 Call Waiting Tone").
A PDN extension can only receive OHCA or Whisper OHCA from the corresponding SDN
extension. When a call is made from another extension, a PDN extension will receive a call
waiting tone. (® 1.3.51 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory
Number) Extension)
For information about answering a waiting call, refer to "1.3.12 CALL WAITING
FEATURES".
1.3.79 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
Your PS can be used in parallel with a PT, SLT, or SIP phone.
When in this mode, incoming calls to a wired telephone also ring the paired PS.
To set
PS
4
Press TALK.
Enter
8
48.
1
extension no.
Enter 1.
Enter extension number
of the paired telephone.
C.Tone
Press CANCEL.
To cancel
PS
4
Press TALK.
•
•
Enter
8
48.
0
Enter 0.
C.Tone
Press CANCEL.
Some wired telephones are prohibited from using this feature.
If you go off-hook while your paralleled telephone is in use, the call will switch over to
you (except SIP phones).
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
169
1.4.1 Call Log, Incoming
1.4 Display Features
1.4.1 Call Log, Incoming
When you receive a call, including external sensor calls, call information is recorded automatically in the
incoming call log. A preprogrammed number of calls can be logged per extension. When the call log is full and
other call arrives, the oldest call is deleted.
When the Call Log button light turns on, there is a call which you did not answer.
The following information is logged.
Telephone
KX-T7636/KX-T7633/
KX-T7630/KX-T7433
KX-NT 500 series/
KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321)/
KX-DT300 series (except KX-DT321)/
KX-NT136
3-line display PT except
KX-T7633/KX-T7630/
KX-TD7695/KX-TD7685/
KX-TD7694/KX-TD7684/
KX-T7433
KX-TD7690/KX-TD7680/
KX-TD7696/
KX-WT125/KX-WT126/
Information
6-line display PT
KX-UT series SIP phones
1-line or 2-line display PT
KX-NT321/KX-NT265/
KX-DT321
Wireless phone
(KX-TD7895/KX-T7885)
Caller's Name
Date/Time call
received
Answered or
Not Answered
Confirmed or
Not Confirmed
Caller's Phone
Number
*1
170
*1
*1
If the caller’s name is not logged, the caller’s phone number is displayed.
If the caller’s name is logged, the caller’s phone number is not displayed.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.4.1 Call Log, Incoming
The incoming call log information is displayed as follows:
[With Caller's Name]
Catherine ------------------------------------ Caller's name (max. 20 digits)
OCT.27 4:30PM
THU --------------- Date and time the call was received
New : Not Answered
----------------- Answering Status*
1234567
--------------------------------------- Caller's number (max. 16 digits)
EXIT
CLEAR
[Without Caller's Name]
--------------------------------------- Caller's number (max. 16 digits)
1234567
OCT.27 4:30PM
THU --------------- Date and time the call was received
Old : Not Answered
----------------- Answering Status*
EXIT
CLEAR
*: "New" is displayed for call logs which have not previously been viewed;
"Old" is displayed for call logs which have previously been viewed.
•
•
•
•
•
PS users: Refer to the documentation for your phone.
KX-UT series SIP phone users: Both outside call information and intercom call
information is recorded automatically in the incoming call log. For details about using
the call log, refer to the documentation for your KX-UT series SIP phone.
The following PSs can use the incoming call log information in the same way as a wired
PT when they receive a call from other extension (including TIE).
KX-TCA185/KX-TCA285/KX-TCA385
PSs other than these may not display the same incoming call log information as a PT
connected to the PBX.
For details about referencing the incoming call log, refer to the PS’s documentation.
To view the log information with the Call Log button
Display PT
While on-hook
(Call Log)
Press Call Log until
desired party appears.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
171
1.4.1 Call Log, Incoming
To view the log information with the Navigator key
KX-NT300/KX-NT500/KX-DT300/KX-DT500/KX-T7600
While on-hook
Press Left twice.
Press Up or Down until
desired party appears.
To clear the log information
Display PT
While viewing the log information
(Call Log)
OR
Press Call Log, or Up or Down
until desired party appears.
Press TRANSFER.
To call
Display PT
While viewing the log information
(Call Log)
OR
Press Call Log, or Up or Down
until desired party appears.
Off-hook.
To store the caller’s information in personal speed dialing
Display PT
While confirming the log information
(Call Log)
OR
Press Call Log, or Up or Down
until desired party appears.
172
Operating Manual
Press STORE.
Document Version 2014-08
1.4.2 Call Log, Outgoing
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Call Log button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: No incoming call, or you have already viewed the call log.
Red on: You have missed calls to view.
If your call is answered by another extension, the caller’s information is recorded in the logs
of both your extension and the answering extension.
You can lock your call log display by using an extension PIN (Personal Identification Number),
so that you can prohibit access to your logged information. Refer to "3.1.2 Personal
Programming".
You can also have a Call Log button for an ICD Group (Incoming Call Distribution Group).
If a call arrives while you are using the call log, the call log display will be replaced with the
caller’s information.
Caller information received with a call waiting tone from the telephone company will not be
logged in the call log.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Call Log button or Call Log for ICD Group button.
1.4.2 Call Log, Outgoing
You can redial using the outgoing call log.
•
•
PS users: Refer to the documentation for your phone.
KX-UT series SIP phone users: Refer to the documentation for your KX-UT series SIP
phone.
To call
KX-NT300/KX-NT500/KX-DT300/KX-DT500/KX-T7600
While on-hook
Press Left.
Press Up or Down
until desired number
appears.
•
•
•
Document Version 2014-08
Off-hook.
The following PSs can use outgoing call log information to other extensions (including
TIE) with same information as a PT connected to the PBX.
KX-TCA185/KX-TCA285/KX-TCA385
PSs other than these may not display the same outgoing call log information as a PT
connected to the PBX.
For details about referencing the outgoing call log, refer to the PS’s documentation.
Operating Manual
173
1.4.2 Call Log, Outgoing
To call with the REDIAL button
Display PT
While on-hook
REDIAL
REDIAL
Press REDIAL to
display the outgoing
call log.*
•
•
Press REDIAL.
Press Up or Down
until desired number
appears.
Off-hook.
* System programming is required for this operation.
This operation is available only for PTs with a display.
To store the caller’s information in personal speed dialing
Display PT
When the desired party is displayed
Press STORE.
174
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.4.2 Call Log, Outgoing
<Operation Example: Storing the caller’s information in personal speed dialing>
[Initial Display]
OCT.27
PROG
03:13PM
INFO
RING
THU
3
Press
MENU
ABCD
1
4
Press
05:12341115678
Name?
EXIT CLEAR ENTER
Enter name.
Outgoing Call Log
EXIT
ENTER
ABCD
2
Press
until desired number is
selected.
5
05:12341115678
Ann
EXIT CLEAR ENTER
Press
1234567890
106
->12341115678
0001112223333
301
EXIT CLEAR ENTER
•
•
•
You can lock your call log display by using an extension PIN (Personal Identification Number),
so that you can prohibit access to your logged information. Refer to "3.1.2 Personal
Programming".
If a call arrives while you are using the call log, the call log display will be replaced with the
caller’s information.
To enter characters, refer to "1.3.14 Character Entry".
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
175
1.4.3 Directories
1.4.3 Directories
You can select and call using the directories (Personal Speed Dialing Directory, System Speed Dialing
Directory and Extension Number Directory).
Only personal directories can be stored, edited or deleted on your extension.
If a call arrives while you are using a directory, the display will be replace with the caller’s information.
–
Calling with the Directory
–
Storing New Names and Numbers
•
PS users: Refer to the documentation for your PS.
Calling with the Directory
To select and call
KX-NT300/KX-NT500/KX-DT300/KX-DT500/KX-T7600
While on-hook
Press Right until
desired directory
appears.*
•
•
•
•
•
176
Press Up or Down
until desired
party appears.
Off-hook.
* The display order is as follows:
One time: Personal Speed Dialing Directory
Two times: System Speed Dialing Directory
Three times: Extension Number Directory
To cancel or exit, press the CANCEL or FLASH/RECALL button.
You can lock your personal speed dialing directory by using an extension PIN (Personal
Identification Number), so that you can prohibit access to it. Refer to "3.1.2 Personal
Programming".
Directory entries generally should include name and number. If the name is not registered,
an entry cannot be displayed.
The System Speed Dialing Directory can be displayed simply by pressing the AUTO DIAL
button while on-hook.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.4.3 Directories
Storing New Names and Numbers
To store a Personal Speed Dialing Directory item
Display PT
While on-hook
phone no.
OR
name
OR
OR
PAUSE
Enter phone number
(max. 32 digits).
Press ENTER
or STORE.
Enter name
(max. 20 characters).
Press ENTER
or STORE.
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
<Operation Example: Storing a name and an outside phone number in the Personal Speed Dialing
Directory>
[Initial Display]
OCT.27
PROG
1
03:13PM
INFO
RING
THU
2
Press
MENU
While on-hook, enter the phone number
you want to store.
to store.
00: 12341115678
Name?
EXIT
ENTER
3
Enter the name to be displayed for
the number.
12341115678
PROG
<-
CLEAR STORE
ABCD
4
•
Press
00: 12341115678
Ann
EXIT CLEAR ENTER
to store.
Telephone number and name on the display are stored using the first spare Personal Speed
Dialing memory available.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
177
1.4.4 System Feature Access
•
•
To enter characters, refer to "1.3.14 Character Entry".
For more details, refer to "To store the names and numbers in personal speed dialing" in
"3.1.2 Personal Programming".
1.4.4 System Feature Access
You can access commonly used features with the "Feature Access" menu.
To select a feature from the "Feature Access" menu
KX-NT300/KX-NT500/KX-DT300/KX-DT500/KX-T7600
While on-hook
Press Right
four times.
Press Up or Down until the desired
feature is selected, and follow
the display prompts.
Features
178
Description
Call Back Cancel
You can cancel Automatic Callback Busy.
(® 1.3.4 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on))
Call Pickup Directed
You can pick up a call ringing at a specified extension.
(® 1.3.9 Call Pickup)
Call Pickup Group
You can pick up a call ringing at another extension within a call pickup group.
(® 1.3.9 Call Pickup)
Doorphone Call
You can call a doorphone.
(® 1.3.22 Doorphone Call)
Door Open
You can open a door.
(® 1.3.21 Door Open)
External BGM
A manager extension can turn on/off background music through external
speakers.
(® 2.1.2 External BGM (Background Music))
Paging
You can make a voice announcement through the built-in speakers of
proprietary telephones (PTs) and/or external speakers.
(® 1.3.49 Paging)
External Relay ON
You can switch on a relay.
(® 1.3.28 External Relay)
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.4.4 System Feature Access
<Display Prompts>
[Call Back Cancel]
->Call Back Cancel
Call Pickup Directed
Call Pickup Group
Doorphone Call
Door Open
EXIT
ENTER
Press
or
ENTER
Sure?
[Call Pickup Directed]
Call Back Cancel
->Call Pickup Directed
Call Pickup Group
Doorphone Call
Door Open
EXIT
ENTER
Press
or
ENTER
Extension No. >
NO
Press
Call Back Cancelled
YES
EXIT
Call Back Cancel
Call Pickup Directed
->Call Pickup Group
Doorphone Call
Door Open
EXIT
ENTER
Press
or
ENTER
Group No. >
SET
EXIT
SET
Enter extension number
Enter call pickup group
and press
number and press
12341115678
12341115678
MENU
You are connected with the caller,
and the caller's number is displayed.
Document Version 2014-08
[Call Pickup Group]
MENU
You are connected with the caller,
and the caller's number is displayed.
Operating Manual
179
1.4.4 System Feature Access
[Doorphone Call]
Call Back Cancel
Call Pickup Directed
Call Pickup Group
->Doorphone Call
Door Open
EXIT
ENTER
Press
or
ENTER
Door No. >
EXIT
[Door Open]
[External BGM]
Call Back Cancel
Call Pickup Directed
Call Pickup Group
Doorphone Call
->Door Open
EXIT
ENTER
Press
or
ENTER
Door No. >
SET
EXIT
->External BGM
Paging
External Relay ON
Call Back Cancel
Call Pickup Directed
EXIT
ENTER
Press
ENTER
or
Pager No. >
SET
EXIT
SET
Enter doorphone number
Enter doorphone number
Enter pager number and
and press
and press
press
D01:Door
MENU
Door01:Open
OPEN
BGM No. >
EXIT
SET
Enter BGM number
and press
External BGM 1 - 2
The BGM starts playing.
180
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.4.4 System Feature Access
[Paging]
[External Relay ON]
External BGM
->Paging
External Relay ON
Call Back Cancel
Call Pickup Directed
EXIT
ENTER
Press
ENTER
or
Group No. >
External BGM
Paging
->External Relay ON
Call Back Cancel
Call Pickup Directed
EXIT
ENTER
Press
or
ENTER
Relay No. >
EXIT
SET
EXIT
SET
Enter paging group
Enter relay number
number and press
and press
Pager01
External Relay01
An alarm tone will be heard at
the paged extensions, and you
can start your page.
KX-UT series
While on-hook
Menu
OR
Press "Menu".
Features
OR
Press Up or Down
until the feature appears.*
Refer to
Group Paging
You can make a voice announcement through the built-in speakers of
proprietary telephones (PTs) and/or external speakers.
(® 1.3.49 Paging)
Directed Call Pickup
You can pick up a call ringing at a specified extension.
(® 1.3.9 Call Pickup)
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
181
1.4.4 System Feature Access
Features
Refer to
Directed Group Call Pickup
You can pick up a call ringing at another extension within a call pickup group.
(® 1.3.9 Call Pickup)
Data Line Security
You can protect the line against audible notification tones, such as a call
waiting tone during a conversation.
(® 1.3.18 Data Line Security)
•
182
* For KX-UT670 users:
Tap "Feature access code" instead of pressing Up or Down.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.5.1 Cellular Phone Features
1.5 Cellular Phone Features
1.5.1 Cellular Phone Features
When you are not at your desk or not in the office and receive a forwarded outside call on your cellular phone,
you can use the following features if enabled through system programming.
Transferring to an Extension in the PBX
–
–
Transferring to a Private Network (TIE Line Access)
–
Transferring to an Outside Phone Number
–
Adding Other Parties during a Conversation (Conference)
–
Talking to Two Parties Alternately (Call Splitting)
–
Paging and then Transferring a Call
•
Some features may not be available for cellular phones, depending on the type of CO line
being used.
Transferring to an Extension in the PBX
To transfer
Cellular Phone
During a conversation
D.Tone
Enter #.
extension no.
Dial extension number.
Talk.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted.
•
•
When transferring a call from an analog CO line, you cannot talk to the destination party after
dialing an extension number.
You cannot transfer a call to a DISA floating extension number.
Transferring to a Private Network (TIE Line Access)
During a conversation, you can make a call to an extension connected to another PBX in a private network
and transfer a call to it.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
183
1.5.1 Cellular Phone Features
To transfer
Cellular Phone
During a conversation
extension no.
*
OR
D.Tone
7
private phone no.
*
Dial extension number or
enter 7 and the dial private phone number.
Enter #.
On-hook.
This step can be omitted.
The party is placed on hold.
•
Talk.
* When transferring a call from an analog CO line, you cannot talk to the destination party
after dialing an extension number or 7 + private phone number.
Transferring to an Outside Phone Number
During a conversation, you can make a call to an outside phone number and transfer a call to it.
To transfer
Cellular Phone
During a conversation
9
D.Tone
Enter #.
The party is placed on hold.
•
184
OR
8
outside
phone no.
outside line
group no.
Dial outside phone
number.
Talk.
On-hook.
Enter automatic line access
number or enter outside line group
access number and then outside
This step can be omitted.
line group number.
When transferring a call from an analog CO line, you cannot talk to the destination party after
dialing the outside phone number.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.5.1 Cellular Phone Features
Adding Other Parties during a Conversation (Conference)
To establish a conference call
Cellular Phone
During a conversation
Enter #.
3
extension no.
D.Tone
Dial extension number.
Talk to the
new party.
Enter #.
C.Tone
Enter 3.
Talk with multiple parties.
Talking to Two Parties Alternately (Call Splitting)
Cellular Phone
During a conversation
OR
D.Tone
Enter #.
extension no.
Dial extension number.
Talk to the
other party.
Enter #.
Talk to the
original party.
The other party will be on hold.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
185
1.5.1 Cellular Phone Features
Paging and then Transferring a Call
Cellular Phone
During a conversation
D.Tone
Enter #.
3
Enter
3
33.
paging group
no.
C.Tone
Dial paging group
number (2 digits).
Announce.
The party is placed on hold.
Wait for an
answer.
Talk.
On-hook.
The held party and the paged extension
are connected and start a conversation.
186
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.1 What is the Unified Messaging system?
1.6 Unified Messaging Features
1.6.1 What is the Unified Messaging system?
Introduction to the Unified Messaging system
Your PBX can provide you with Unified Messaging system service. You or an outside party can access the
Unified Messaging system from a telephone. As the owner of a mailbox, you can:
• Send a message to one or more people inside or outside your office.
• Transfer messages to other subscribers and add your own comments.
• Access your mailbox and listen to your messages, even when out of the office.
• Have the Unified Messaging system call or e-mail you when someone leaves you a message.
• Be notified by the message waiting lamp on your extension when new messages have been recorded in
your mailbox.
• Screen your calls.
• Create a set of options and functions exclusive to your mailbox (Personal Custom Service) that can be
selected by your callers.
• Voice and e-mail messages can be managed in a single inbox using the Communication Assistant plug-in
for Microsoft® Outlook®.
• Voice and e-mail messages can be managed via an e-mail client that supports IMAP4.
• Many other useful messaging features.
•
•
PBX users who are assigned a mailbox in the Unified Messaging system are called
subscribers.
Hospitality Mode:
If your service mode is set to "Hospitality Mode", available features such as listening to
messages, personal greetings, etc. may be limited according to the COS settings for your
mailbox.
Before You Begin
In order to use the Unified Messaging system as a subscriber, you need to know the following information. The
System Manager can help you if you do not know this information.
• The extension number that you should dial in order to access the Unified Messaging system.
• Your mailbox number and extension number (In many cases these are the same number, but it is possible
they are not).
• Your mailbox password (if set).
• The System Manager’s telephone number. The System Manager is the person you should refer to when
you have any problems with the Unified Messaging system.
Prompts
Prompts are recorded voice guidance messages that help you set and use Unified Messaging system features.
Prompts also help callers when the system is handing their calls. Depending on how your Unified Messaging
system is programmed, subscribers and callers can select the language they prefer for system prompts.
<Prompt example>
"To leave a message, press 1."
"Please leave a message at the tone."
"To end recording, hang up or press 1 for more features."
•
•
•
Not all prompts are described in each operation.
The prompts in each operation are not exactly the same as the actual prompts you will hear
from the Unified Messaging system.
Follow the instructions provided by the voice guidance.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
187
1.6.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
1.6.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Logging in to Your Mailbox
Subscriber Tutorial (Easy Mailbox Configuration)
Changing or Deleting Your Personal Greeting Messages
Personal Greetings for Caller ID
Changing Your Password
Changing or Deleting Your Subscriber (Owner) Name
Common Service Commands and Navigation Commands
Logging in to Your Mailbox for the First Time
The first time you log in to your mailbox, there are certain mailbox settings you should perform before using
any other Subscriber Services. These settings identify you as the owner of your mailbox, and are described in
"
Logging in to Your Mailbox".
• Password
• Subscriber’s Name
• Personal Greeting Messages
Your Unified Messaging system may be programmed to initiate a "Subscriber Tutorial" the first time you log in
to your mailbox. If the Subscriber Tutorial is enabled, Unified Messaging system prompts will guide you through
the mailbox configuration process.
Logging in to Your Mailbox
In order to access Subscriber Services (to play messages, change mailbox settings, etc.), you must first log
in to your mailbox. There are 2 ways to log in to your mailbox:
Manual Log-in:
Manual Log-in is necessary when logging in to your mailbox using someone else’s extension, or when
Automatic Log-in is not enabled for your mailbox.
Automatic Log-in:
When logging in to your mailbox from your own extension, you do not need to enter any special commands or
your mailbox number.
•
The UM group’s default floating extension number depends on system programming. For
more information, consult your System Administrator or System Manager.
•
Mailbox Capacity Warning
When your mailbox is almost full, you will receive a Mailbox Capacity Warning shortly after
logging in to your mailbox. When you hear a Mailbox Capacity Warning, you should delete
unnecessary messages to make more recording time in your mailbox available. The amount
of recording time that remains when you hear the Mailbox Capacity Warning depends on how
your mailbox is configured. This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator or
System Manager for your mailbox.
For more information, consult your System Administrator or System Manager.
For KX-UT series SIP phone users:
When using the MESSAGE button, please press the MESSAGE button before going off-hook.
•
188
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
Manual log-in
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
OR
#
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Off-hook.
6
Enter #6.
OR
UM group’s floating
extension no.
Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail
Transfer, or enter UM group’s
floating extension number.
your mailbox no.
Enter
and your mailbox number.
your password
#
Enter your mailbox.
Enter your password and #.
You can skip this step
if your mailbox requires no password.
Automatic log-in
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
OR
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
OR
Off-hook.
UM group’s floating
extension no.
your password
#
Enter your mailbox.
Enter your password and #.
You can skip this step
if your mailbox requires no password.
Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail
Transfer, or enter UM group’s
floating extension number.
CAUTION
•
•
•
It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum
protection against unauthorized access.
To avoid unauthorized access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes known
to others, the PBX may be misused.
Change the password periodically.
Notice
•
Document Version 2014-08
When disabling the password requirement, ensure that an unauthorized third-party is not
allowed access to your extension.
Operating Manual
189
1.6.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
•
•
•
When following audible prompts only: if Autoplay New Messages is enabled for your mailbox,
new messages will be played back automatically each time you log in to your mailbox.
Whether or not new messages will be played back one after the other automatically depends
on system programming. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
If Message Waiting Lamp is enabled for your mailbox, the message lamp on your telephone
will light when you receive a new message. You can log in to your mailbox and play back a
new message automatically simply by going off-hook and pressing the Message button on
your telephone. The Unified Messaging system will play back the first new message only. To
play back other messages, press the appropriate button.
After logging in, the system will announce the number of total messages, the number of new
messages, or the length of new messages. These announcements depend on the mailbox
settings and Class of Service (COS) settings of your mailbox.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Voice Mail Transfer button or a Message button.
Subscriber Tutorial (Easy Mailbox Configuration)
Your Unified Messaging system may be programmed to present a "Subscriber Tutorial" to you the first time
you log in to your mailbox. If the Subscriber Tutorial is enabled, Unified Messaging system prompts will guide
you through the mailbox configuration process. Simply by following the prompts, you can configure the following
items. You can configure these items later manually if necessary, as explained later in this section. This feature
may be disabled by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox.
•
•
You may be asked to enter your password after logging in to your mailbox. If you do not know
this password, ask your System Administrator.
The subscriber tutorial may be simplified or not available depending on your COS settings.
Password:
If your mailbox has a password, you must enter it using the dial keys (0–9) whenever you log in to your mailbox.
Your password can contain up to 16 digits.
Subscriber’s Name:
This is a recording of your name. Other subscribers will hear your name when they listen to messages you left
for them. It may also be heard by callers when they use the Dialing by Name feature.
Personal Greetings:
The following Personal Greeting Messages can be recorded in the subscriber tutorial. After the greeting is
played, a tone will sound, and the caller can leave a message.
• No Answer Greeting: Heard by callers when you do not answer their calls. A common example might be,
"This is (name). I can’t take your call right now…".
• Busy Signal Greeting: Heard by callers when you are on another call. A common example might be,
"This is (name). I’m on another call right now…".
• After Hours Greeting: Heard by callers when the Unified Messaging system is in night mode. A common
example might be, "This is (name). I’ve gone home for the day…".
•
190
If you do not record a greeting message, a prerecorded greeting message will be used.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
To start the Subscriber Tutorial
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
The Unified Messaging system will announce,
"Welcome to the Panasonic Unified Messaging
System. This is the Subscriber Tutorial service.".
Log in to your mailbox.
To set your password for the first time
your password
#
2
Enter your password and #.
Enter 2 to accept.
OR
To change your password
your new password
1
Enter 1.
#
Enter your new password and #.
2
Enter 2 to accept.
To record the Owner’s Name
(Your Subscriber Name)
1
2
Enter 1 to end
recording.
Enter 2 to accept.
C.Tone
State your name.
To record your greeting messages
1
C.Tone
Record your greeting message.
Enter 1 to end
recording.
1
Review
2
Accept
3
Record the
message again
4
Add
Delete and exit
Enter the desired option.
To confirm the settings
1
Enter 1.
On-hook.
CAUTION
•
•
•
Document Version 2014-08
It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum
protection against unauthorized access.
To avoid unauthorized access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes known
to others, the PBX may be misused.
Change the password periodically.
Operating Manual
191
1.6.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
Changing or Deleting Your Personal Greeting Messages
After callers reach your mailbox, they will hear your personal greeting message. You can record 6 kinds of
Personal Greetings; the appropriate greeting will be played for callers. If you delete or do not record a greeting
message, a prerecorded greeting message will be used.
• No Answer Greeting:
Heard by callers when you do not answer their calls. A common example might be, "This is (name). I
can’t take your call right now…".
• Busy Signal Greeting:
Heard by callers when you are on another call. A common example might be, "This is (name). I’m on
another call right now…".
• After Hours Greeting:
Heard by callers when the Unified Messaging system is in night mode. A common example might be, "This
is (name). I’ve gone home for the day…".
• Personal Greeting for Caller ID:
Personal Greetings
Heard by callers from preprogrammed telephone numbers. For details, refer to "
for Caller ID".
• Temporary Greeting:
A special greeting that, if recorded, is heard by callers instead of the other greetings. A common example
might be, "This is (name). I’m out of the office this week…".
• Absent Message:
Heard by callers when a personal greeting is set to a PBX’s absent message, and that absent message is
currently set.
192
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
To record or delete your Personal Greeting Messages
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
1
Enter 41.
1
No Answer Greeting
2
Busy Signal Greeting
3
After Hours Greeting
4
Caller ID Greeting
5
Temporary Greeting
6
Absent Message
Greeting
caller ID greeting no.
OR
absent message no.
Select the desired greeting. When you select "Caller ID Greeting",
enter a Caller ID Greeting Number (1–4). When you select "Absent
Message Greeting", enter an Absent Message Number (1–9).
For Caller ID Greeting, refer to
"Personal Greetings for Caller ID".
Change the greeting
1
OR
3
C.Tone
Delete the selected
greeting
Record your greeting message.*
Follow the prompts as necessary.
The greeting will be deleted;
go on-hook to finish.
1
Enter 1 to end
recording.
1
Review
2
Accept
3
Rerecord the greeting message (repeat the steps above as necessary)
4
Add to the greeting message you just recorded
Delete the greeting message and exit
Follow the prompts as necessary.
1
No Answer Greeting
2
Busy Signal Greeting
3
After Hours Greeting
4
Caller ID Greeting
5
Temporary Greeting
6
Absent Message Greeting
If you go on-hook without accepting your new greeting,
it will not be saved.
On-hook.
Record or delete other greeting
messages as necessary by following
the prompts, or go on-hook.
•
The contents of the Absent Message Greeting prompt and the absent message displayed on
telephones (refer to "1.3.1 Absent Message") should be programmed to match through
system programming.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
193
1.6.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
•
•
•
* We recommend stating your name in your greeting messages, so that callers will know they
have reached the correct mailbox.
A Temporary Personal Greeting is played instead of all your other greetings until it is deleted.
Each time you log in to your mailbox, the Unified Messaging system will ask you if you want
to turn off (delete) your Temporary Personal Greeting.
Direct Service Access
If Direct Service Access is set in Mailbox Settings, you can access Record No Answer
Greeting, Record Busy Greeting, Record After Hours Greeting and Record Temporary
Greeting features directly by dialing a specific Unified Messaging extension number from your
extension. Automatic login must be enabled to use Direct Service Access (refer to "Automatic
log-in"). For details about these Unified Messaging extension numbers, consult your System
Administrator.
Personal Greetings for Caller ID
You can record personalized greetings for specific callers. If you have assigned their telephone numbers (Caller
ID numbers) to a personalized greeting, they will hear the appropriate greeting when they call you, instead of
your other greeting messages normally played for callers.
You can record 4 personalized greetings and assign 8 callers to each greeting. Record your personalized
greetings before assigning Caller ID numbers.
This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox.
To record a personalized greeting for the first time
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
1
personalized greeting no.
4
Enter the personalized greeting number (1–4).
Enter 414.
STEP A
2
1
On-hook.
C.Tone
OR
Record your greeting
message.
Enter 1 to end
recording.
Enter 2
to accept.
To assign Caller ID Numbers to
the personalized greeting,
go to STEP B in "To assign
Caller ID numbers for the first time".
To change a personalized greeting
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
1
personalized greeting no.
4
Enter 414.
Enter the personalized greeting number (1–4).
1
Change the greeting,
then go to STEP A in "To record a personalized
greeting for the first time".
3
Delete the greeting.
OR
On-hook.
194
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
To assign Caller ID numbers for the first time
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
1
2
personalized greeting no.
4
Enter the personalized
greeting number (1–4).
Enter 414.
Enter 2
to accept.
To continue
STEP B
#
caller ID no.
*
2
Enter the caller ID number
(caller’s telephone number,
20 digits max.) and #.
•
1
Add another caller ID number.
2
End
OR
Enter 2
to accept.
Enter 1 or 2.
On-hook.
* While entering a Caller ID number, you can press to enter a "wild card". This allows
several telephone numbers to match the Caller ID number that you assigned. For example,
if you store the Caller ID number as "012 … " (enter the number of s as required for
telephone numbers in your area), any telephone number that begins with "012" (for example,
all callers from the "012" area code) will hear your personalized greeting.
To add/delete/review Caller ID numbers later
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
1
4
Enter 414.
1
Enter the personalized
greeting number (1–4).
Add a Caller ID number,
then go to STEP B in "To assign Caller
ID numbers for the first time".
Delete all numbers,
then go on-hook to finish.
2
Delete one number.OR
3
OR
Delete a Caller ID number.
OR
Review all assigned Caller ID numbers,
then go on-hook to finish.
Enter 2
to accept.
1
OR
2
2
personalized greeting no.
Enter 1 or 2.
Enter the desired option.
1
Delete the announced number.
2
Keep the number and announce the next number,
then repeat this step.
OR
On-hook.
Enter 1 or 2.
Changing Your Password
You can protect your mailbox by setting a password to prevent unauthorized access to your mailbox. If your
mailbox has a password, you must enter it using the dial keys (0–9) whenever you log in to your mailbox. Your
password can contain up to 16 digits. You can change your password at any time. When choosing a password,
avoid using obvious number combinations. If you forget your password, have your System Administrator or
System Manager clear your password. You may then set a new one.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
195
1.6.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
To change your password
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
2
your desired password
1
Enter 421.
#
Enter the desired password and #.
2
Enter 2 to accept.
On-hook.
CAUTION
•
•
•
It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum
protection against unauthorized access.
To avoid unauthorized access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes known
to others, the PBX may be misused.
Change the password periodically.
Changing or Deleting Your Subscriber (Owner) Name
You can record your name in the Unified Messaging system. The system can then announce your name for
callers to let them know that they have reached the correct mailbox.
To change/delete your subscriber name
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
3
1
1
C.Tone
Enter 431.
State your name.
Enter 1 to end recording.
Enter 433 to delete your subscriber name,
then go on-hook to finish.
2
Enter 2 to accept.
On-hook.
Common Service Commands and Navigation Commands
Commands for Changing the Current Unified Messaging System Service
After going off-hook and pressing the MESSAGE button*1, Voice Mail Transfer button, or enter the UM
group’s floating extension number, you can enter a service command to access certain Unified Messaging
system features quickly. While guidance is being provided, you can also use service commands to, for example,
switch to a different Unified Messaging system service mode.
*1
196
For KX-UT series SIP phone users: When using the MESSAGE button, please press the MESSAGE button before going off-hook.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.2 Logging in to and Configuring Your Mailbox
#
1
Dialing by Name
#
2
Custom Service
You will be guided to enter a Custom Service number (1–200).
#
5
Log in*1
#
6
Voice Mail Service
You can record a message for another subscriber by entering his or her mailbox
number when guided. You can also log in to your mailbox by entering this command
followed by and your mailbox number.
#
7
Restart (Return to Main Menu)*2
#
8
Automated Attendant Service
#
9
Exit
Return to Previous Menu
Help
0
#
Switch Service mode
If you are authorized to access a System Manager and/or Message Manager
mailbox by the System Administrator, you can switch between those services as
follows:
#
Subscriber service
*1
*2
Message Manager service
System Manager service
If pressed while in Subscriber Service, you will be prompted to enter the desired mailbox number.
If pressed while in Subscriber Service, you will return to the Subscriber Service Main Menu.
•
•
Commands #5 and #7 are available only after you have accessed Subscriber Service.
Some commands may not be available depending on the COS settings of your mailbox.
When Using Voice Prompts
The following commands can be used to help you navigate through Unified Messaging system menus.
Takes you back to the previous menu.
Repeats the current menu.
0
#
7
Document Version 2014-08
Takes you back to the Main Menu.
Operating Manual
197
1.6.3 Message Playback and Related Features
1.6.3 Message Playback and Related Features
–
–
–
–
–
–
Playing Messages
Bookmarks (Voice Messages only)
Recovering Deleted Messages
Replying to Messages
Transferring Messages
Remote Access
Playing Messages
Callers and other subscribers can leave voice messages for you, and you can play them back later after you
have logged in to your mailbox.
Messages in your mailbox are divided into 3 types:
• New Messages:
Messages in your mailbox which you have not played back yet.
• Old Messages:
Messages in your mailbox which you have played back but have not yet deleted.
• Deleted Messages:
Messages in your mailbox which you have deleted. You can "recover" your deleted messages, after which
they will be treated as old messages (refer to "
Recovering Deleted Messages"). If you do not recover
deleted messages, they will be permanently deleted at the end of the day.
When playing back a message, the Unified Messaging system can also announce the message’s
"envelope"—the date and time of the message, and the message sender’s information.
To play messages
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
1
Log in to your mailbox.
3
9
1
New
messages
Old
messages
Deleted
messages
Enter 1, 3 or 91.
•
*
1
Voice messages
#
All messages
Follow the prompts
as necessary.
Listen to the message.
Pressing during message playback
will return you to the previous menu.
You can then select another
message type to listen to.
* This step is omitted depending on settings and COS settings of your mailbox.
Additional features are available during/after the playback of voice messages. Refer to the table below and
press the appropriate dialing key. The message types that can be used with each key a marked with a ü. Note
that certain features are not available depending on the message type (new, old, deleted).
Message Type
Key
1
198
Operating Manual
Feature
Repeat this message
New
Old
Deleted
ü
ü
ü
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.3 Message Playback and Related Features
Message Type
Key
New
Old
Deleted
Replay the previous message
ü
ü
ü
2
Play the next message
ü
ü
ü
3
Delete this message
• If a confirmation message is played, press 1
to delete the message.
ü
ü
1
(+
1
*1
1
)
3
Recover this message
4
Reply to this message
ü
ü
5
Transfer this message
ü
ü
Play the message envelope
ü
ü
ü
7
<During playback only>
Rewind the voice message
ü
ü
ü
8
<During playback only>
Pause/restart message playback
ü
ü
ü
ü
6
*1
Feature
*1
ü
8
4
<During playback only>
Increase playback volume
ü
ü
8
5
<During voice message playback only>
Set a Bookmark for the voice message
• To restart message playback, press 8.
ü
ü
8
6
<For voice messages only>
Start playback at the Bookmark for the voice
message
ü
ü
9
<During playback only>
Fast-forward
ü
ü
#
Save this message as new
• After saving the message, the next message
will be played.
ü
ü
These keys only available when the appropriate COS settings are assigned to your mailbox. For more information, consult your
System Administrator.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
199
1.6.3 Message Playback and Related Features
•
•
•
For voice messages, Unified Messaging system programming determines if the message
envelope is played before each message, after each message, or only when you press 6.
For more information, consult your System Administrator.
The Unified Messaging system will automatically delete both new and old messages after a
specified number of days have passed. Your System Administrator or System Manager
controls how many days messages are retained for. Each time you play a new or old
message, the message retention counter resets.
During playback, you can increase the playback volume by pressing 84. If volume is at the
highest setting, pressing 84 will select the lowest setting, as shown below.
Level 1
Level 2
Level 3
(default)
Level 4
Level 5
Bookmarks (Voice Messages only)
While listening to a message in your mailbox, you can set a bookmark. A bookmark lets you easily resume
playback from a specific point in a specific message later. You can set one bookmark for each message in
your mailbox; if you set a new bookmark, the old one is deleted.
•
You cannot set or use bookmarks for deleted messages.
To set the Bookmark
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
During message playback
8
5
Enter 85.
To start playback at the Bookmark
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
During or after message playback
8
6
Enter 86.
Recovering Deleted Messages
You can delete voice messages in your mailbox. Once a message has been deleted, it is retained until the end
of the day, then it will be permanently deleted. Deleted messages can be "recovered", after which they will be
treated as old messages.
200
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.3 Message Playback and Related Features
To recover a Deleted Message
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
During or after voice message playback
3
Enter 3.
Replying to Messages
You can reply to messages left in your mailbox by either calling back the caller or by leaving a message in the
caller’s mailbox.
Calling back is possible when the person who left you the message is another subscriber. Calling back outside
callers is possible if their Caller ID information is received by the system, however, this feature may be disabled
by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox.
Replying by leaving a message in the caller’s mailbox is possible only if the caller is another subscriber (i.e.,
the person must have his or her own mailbox). When replying by leaving a message in the caller’s mailbox,
you can set any of the following:
• Urgent Status:
The message will be heard before other messages by the recipient.
• Private Status:
The recipient will not be able to forward the message, ensuring privacy.
• Auto Receipt:
You will receive notification (receipt message) once the recipient has played back the message.
Finally, you can send your reply immediately or set a message delivery time. However, please note that you
cannot reply to receipt messages.
•
Only new and old messages can be replied to. To reply to a deleted message, recover the
message first (refer to "
Recovering Deleted Messages").
To call back the message sender
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
During or after voice message playback
4
Enter 4.
Document Version 2014-08
1
Enter 1 to call the sender.
Operating Manual
201
1.6.3 Message Playback and Related Features
To leave a message for the sender
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
During or after voice message playback
4
2
Enter 4.
1
C.Tone
Enter 2
to begin recording.
Record your message.
Enter 1
to end recording.
You can pause and resume recording
by pressing 2. If you pause for
more than 20 seconds, recording
will stop automatically.
2
1
1
1
2
2
Enter 2
to accept.
Set the delivery time of the message
Send the message immediately
Accept, then go on-hook.
Enter 11, 12 or 2.
To set the delivery time of the message
desired
delivery time
1
# *
Enter the desired
delivery time and #.
AM
1
*2
OR
2
PM
Enter 1 for AM,
2 for PM.
Make the message urgent
1
desired day of the month
for delivery
Enter the day of the month
for delivery and #.
1
Make the message private
2
Continue
OR
Enter 1 or 2.
1
Request a receipt
2
Continue
2
Enter 2
to accept.
OR
Continue
2
3
# *
Enter 1 or 2.
OR
Enter 1 or 2.
•
•
•
•
•
On-hook.
*1 Example: To enter 5:00, press 5#. To enter 5:15, press 515#.
*2 This option may not be available if the Unified Messaging system is programmed to use
24-hour time.
*3 Example: If today is February 16 and you enter 17#, the message will be delivered
tomorrow. If today is February 16 and you enter 5#, the message will be delivered on March
5.
Auto Receipt is not enabled by default. For more information, consult your System
Administrator.
New urgent messages are played before any other messages. However, old urgent
messages are treated like regular messages: messages are played starting with the oldest.
Transferring Messages
You can transfer (forward) messages in your mailbox to other subscribers. However, please note that you
cannot transfer receipt messages, or messages that were specified by the sender as "private".
When transferring a message, you can:
• Specify the recipient by entering another subscriber’s mailbox number.
202
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.3 Message Playback and Related Features
•
•
Specify several recipients by entering a Personal Group Distribution List number (refer to "
Group Distribution Lists") or a Mailbox Group number.
Record your own comments and send them along with the transferred message.
•
•
Personal
No acknowledgement will be given to indicate the message has been transferred.
Only new and old messages can be transferred. To transfer a deleted message, recover the
message first (refer to "
Recovering Deleted Messages").
To specify the recipients by number
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
During or after voice message playback
mailbox no.
5
2
OR
personal group
distribution list no.
Enter 5.
Transfer the message
without recording
comments
2
Record comments
OR
Enter 2
to accept.
#
1
OR
Enter 1 or 2.
mailbox group no.
Enter the mailbox number, a personal group
distribution list number and #,
or a mailbox group number.
To record your comments
1
2
Enter 1
to end recording.
Enter 2
to accept.
C.Tone
Record your comments.
On-hook.
To specify the recipients by name (dialing by name)
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
During or after voice message playback
1
5
#
1
desired recipient's name
2
3
Enter #1.
Enter 5.
1
Transfer the message
without recording
comments
OR
2
Record comments
Enter 1 or 2.
Document Version 2014-08
Select the announced name
Hear the next name
Repeat the current name
Enter 1, 2 or 3.
Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of
the desired recipient's name.
To record your comments
C.Tone
Record your comments.
1
2
Enter 1
to end recording.
Enter 2
to accept.
On-hook.
Operating Manual
203
1.6.3 Message Playback and Related Features
Remote Access
You can call the Unified Messaging system while outside and log in to your mailbox in order to listen to your
messages. There are 2 ways to log in to your mailbox remotely:
• Automatic Log-in:
When logging in to your mailbox remotely from a preprogrammed outside telephone number (assigned as
a Caller ID number), you do not need to enter any special commands or your mailbox number. The Unified
Messaging system can recognize the telephone number you are calling from and therefore determine you
are the caller (refer to "
Assigning Your Telephone Numbers for Remote Automatic Log-in and Toll
Saver"). This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator for your mailbox.
• Manual Log-in:
Manual Log-in is necessary if logging in to your mailbox, when your mailbox is not programmed for
Automatic Log-in, or when you are calling from a telephone number not programmed for Automatic Log-in.
•
Ask your System Administrator what telephone number you should dial in order to access
the Unified Messaging system remotely.
Remote automatic log-in
From Outside Telephone
Call the Unified Messaging system
from the preprogrammed
outside telephone number
(assigned as a Caller ID number).
your password
#
Enter your password and #.
1
Enter 1 to play back
messages.
This step can be omitted
if your mailbox requires no password.
#
8
#
8
Call an extension
OR
0
Call the operator
Follow the prompts,
or enter #8 or #80.
•
204
#
9
Enter #9
when finished.
On-hook.
The number of rings you hear before the Unified Messaging system answers your call can
indicate whether or not you have new messages (Toll Saver feature). For more information,
consult your System Administrator.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.3 Message Playback and Related Features
Remote manual log-in
From Outside Telephone
Call the Unified
Messaging system from
an outside telephone.
your password
your mailbox no.
6
#
Enter and your
mailbox number.
Enter #6.
#
Enter your password and #.
This step can be omitted
if your mailbox requires no password.
1
Call an extension
#
8
#
Call the operator
Follow the prompts,
or enter #8 or #80.
OR
Enter 1 to play back
new messages.
8
0
#
9
Enter #9
when finished.
On-hook.
CAUTION
•
•
•
It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum
protection against unauthorized access.
To avoid unauthorized access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes known
to others, the PBX may be misused.
Change the password periodically.
Notice
•
Document Version 2014-08
When disabling the password requirement, ensure that an unauthorized third-party is not
allowed access to your extension.
Operating Manual
205
1.6.4 Sending Messages
1.6.4 Sending Messages
–
–
–
–
–
Message Delivery
Personal Group Distribution Lists
External Message Delivery
External Message Delivery Lists
Receiving External Delivery Messages
You can record messages and send them to other subscribers, to extension users who do not have mailboxes,
and even to outside parties. Messages can be sent using one of the following features:
• Message Delivery:
Sending a message to other subscribers (refer to "
Message Delivery").
• External Message Delivery:
Sending a message to parties that do not have Unified Messaging system mailboxes (extension users and
outside parties) (refer to "
External Message Delivery").
There are several ways to determine the recipients of your messages. You can specify recipients by:
• Mailbox number or subscriber name (specifies an individual recipient for Message Delivery).
• Personal Group Distribution List number or Mailbox Group number (specifies a group of recipients for
Message Delivery).
• Extension number or telephone number (specifies an individual recipient for External Message Delivery).
• External Message Delivery List number (specifies a group of recipients for External Message Delivery).
Message Delivery
You can send messages to other subscribers. You can specify message recipients either by number or by
subscriber name.
To specify the recipients by number:
• Enter the subscriber’s mailbox number.
Personal Group Distribution Lists").
• Enter a Personal Group Distribution List number (refer to "
• Enter a Mailbox Group number (these must be created by the System Administrator. For more information,
consult your System Administrator).
To specify the recipients by name:
• Enter the first few letters of the subscriber’s name (Dialing by Name feature).
Once you have specified the recipients, you can record a message. Before sending your message, you can
set any of the following:
• Urgent Status:
The message will be heard before other messages by the recipient.
• Private Status:
The recipient will not be able to forward the message, ensuring privacy.
• Auto Receipt:
You will receive notification once the recipient has played back the message.
Finally, you can send your message immediately or set a message delivery time.
206
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.4 Sending Messages
To send a message
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Go to "To specify recipients by number"
or "To specify recipients by name
(dialing by name)".
2
Log in to your mailbox.
Enter 2.
To specify recipients by number
mailbox no.
OR
personal group
distribution list no.
OR
mailbox group no.
Go to
"To record your message".
2
#
Enter 2
to accept.
Enter the mailbox number, a personal group
distribution list number and #,
or a mailbox group number.
To specify recipients by name (dialing by name)
1
#
1
Enter #1.
desired recipient's name
2
3
Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of
the desired recipient's name.
Select the announced name
Hear the next name
Repeat the current name
Enter 1, 2 or 3.
Go to
"To record your message".
Continued on next page
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
207
1.6.4 Sending Messages
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Continued from previous page
To record your message
1
Enter 1 to record
your message.
1
C.Tone
You can pause and resume
recording by pressing 2.
If you pause for more than
20 seconds, recording will
stop automatically.
Press 2 to add another recipient,
then go to "To specify recipients by
number" or "To specify recipients by
name (dialing by name)". A maximum of 100
recipients can be specified.
Or, press 3 to review the recipients.
2
1
1
1
2
Enter 1
to end recording.
Record your message.
Set the delivery time of the message
Send the message immediately
Accept, then go on-hook
2
Enter 11, 12 or 2.
Enter 2
to accept.
To set the delivery time of the message
desired
delivery time
1
# *
Enter the desired
delivery time and #.
1
Make the message urgent
AM
1
Enter 1 for AM,
2 for PM.
1
Continue
Enter 1 or 2.
•
•
•
•
•
Enter the day of the month
for delivery and #.
Make the message private
Continue
Enter 1 or 2.
2
Enter 2
to accept.
1
Request a receipt
2
Continue
OR
2
3
# *
desired day of
the month for delivery
PM
2
OR
2
*2
OR
OR
Enter 1 or 2.
On-hook.
*1 Example: To enter 5:00, press 5#. To enter 5:15, press 515#.
*2 This option may not be available if the system is programmed to use 24-hour time.
*3 Example: If today is February 16 and you enter 17#, the message will be delivered
tomorrow. If today is February 16 and you enter 5#, the message will be delivered on March
5.
Auto Receipt is not enabled by default. For more information, consult your System
Administrator.
New urgent messages are played before any other messages. However, old urgent
messages are played with other messages, in the original order.
Personal Group Distribution Lists
Personal Group Distribution Lists allow you to send messages to several subscribers at once (refer to "
Message Delivery"). You can create and edit 4 Personal Group Distribution Lists, and these lists can only be
used by you. You can assign 40 group members (subscribers) to each list and record a name for each group
(for example, "Sales Team", "Department Heads", etc.).
208
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.4 Sending Messages
To create and edit personal group distribution lists
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
4
Log in to your mailbox.
desired personal group
distribution list no.
4
Enter 44.
1
C.Tone
Enter 1 to record
a name for the group.
Enter the desired personal group
distribution list number (1–4).
State the group name.
2
2
1
Enter 1
to end recording.
Enter 2
to accept.
Enter 2 to add
group members.
To continue
mailbox no. of
the subscriber
2
Add more subscribers
to the list
2
End
OR
Enter 2 to add
the subscriber
to the list.
Enter the mailbox number of
the subscriber you wish
to add to the list.
1
On-hook.
Enter 1 or 2.
To delete members from personal group distribution lists
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
Enter 44.
1
Delete all members,
then go on-hook to finish
OR
2
Delete one member
Enter 1 or 2.
desired personal group
distribution list no.
4
Enter the desired personal group
distribution list number (1–4).
1
Delete the announced member
2
Keep the member and
announce the next member
3
Enter 3 to delete
a group member.
OR
On-hook.
Enter 1 or 2.
Repeat this step to delete other members.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
209
1.6.4 Sending Messages
To change personal group distribution list names
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
4
Enter 44.
1
Change (record)
the list name
3
Delete the list name,
then go on-hook to finish
desired personal group
distribution list no.
1
Enter the desired personal group
distribution list number (1–4).
Enter 1 to change
the list name.
OR
C.Tone
Enter 1 or 3.
•
1
State the list name.
Enter 1
to end recording.
2
Enter 2
to accept.
On-hook.
The System Administrator can create "Mailbox Groups", which are similar to personal group
distribution lists except they can be used by other subscribers. For more information, consult
your System Administrator.
External Message Delivery
You can send messages to outside parties and to extension users who do not have their own mailboxes. After
you record your message, the system will dial the appropriate telephone numbers and/or extension numbers,
and once the party on the other end answers the call, your recorded message will be played back. You can
specify message recipients by:
• Extension number
• Outside telephone number
External Message Delivery Lists")
• External Message Delivery List number (refer to "
Unlike recipients who have their own mailboxes, you have no way of knowing who may answer the call when
the Unified Messaging system sends an External Delivery Message. To protect the privacy of your messages,
you may assign a password that must be entered by the other party before your message is played back.
You can set Auto Receipt so that you will receive notification once the recipient has played back your message.
You can also send your message immediately or set a message delivery time. Finally, recipients of an External
Delivery Message can reply to your message, and can even set urgent and private message status.
•
210
This feature must be enabled for your mailbox by the System Administrator or System
Manager.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.4 Sending Messages
To send an external delivery message
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
9
3
1
Go to "To specify a single recipient"
or "To specify multiple recipients
(external message delivery list)".
Enter 931.
To specify a single recipient
Enter 1.
Enter the CO line access number
needed for making outside calls.
*
Outside party’s
telephone no.
CO line access no.
1
Dial the outside party’s telephone number
(including area code if needed).
To specify an extension instead of
an outside telephone number,
enter the extension number,
then skip the next step.
4-digit password
2
Enter 2
to accept.
C.Tone
Enter a 4-digit password
State the recipient’s name.
required for listening to the message.
Press # if you do not want
to set a password.
1
#
Enter 1
to end recording.
Enter # for immediate delivery.
Go to
"To record your message".
To set message delivery time,
go to "To set message delivery time".
Continued on next page
•
* If you are using an ISDN or SIP line in en bloc dialing mode, to insert a pause or special
command in the middle of the telephone number, pause momentarily while entering the
telephone number. You will hear a list of available options, for example, "To add more digits,
press 4. To insert a pause, press 5.".
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
211
1.6.4 Sending Messages
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Continued from previous page
To specify multiple recipients (external message delivery list)
desired list no.
2
4-digit password
Enter the desired list number (1 or 2).
Enter 2.
Enter a 4-digit password
required for listening to the message.
Press # if you do not want
to set a password.
Go to
"To record your message".
#
Enter # for immediate delivery.
To set message delivery time,
go to "To set message delivery time".
To set message delivery time
1
1
# *
desired delivery time
2
Enter the desired delivery time and #.
desired day of the month
for delivery
AM
*2
OR
PM
Enter 1 for AM, 2 for PM.
#
*3
Go to
"To record your message".
Enter the day of the month
for delivery and #.
To record your message
1
Request a receipt
2
Continue
2
OR
Enter 1 or 2.
1
Enter 1
to end recording.
212
Operating Manual
C.Tone
Enter 2
to accept.
You can pause and resume
recording by pressing 2.
If you pause for more than
20 seconds, recording will
stop automatically.
2
Enter 2
to accept.
Record your message.
On-hook.
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.4 Sending Messages
•
•
•
•
•
•
*1 Example: To enter 5:00, press 5#. To enter 5:15, press 515#.
*2 This option may not be available if the system is programmed to use 24-hour time.
*3 Example: If today is February 16 and you enter 17#, the message will be delivered
tomorrow. If today is February 16 and you enter 5#, the message will be delivered on March
5.
If you set a password required for listening to the message, make sure you notify each
recipient what the password is.
If you are using a PRI line, you may need to enter # at the end of outside telephone numbers.
For more information, consult your System Administrator.
Auto Receipt is not enabled by default. For more information, consult your System
Administrator.
External Message Delivery Lists
Your external message delivery lists allow you to send messages to several outside parties and extension
users who do not have their own mailboxes at once (refer to "
External Message Delivery"). You can create
and edit 2 External Message Delivery Lists, and these lists can only be used by you. You can assign up to 8
members to each list and record a name for each member.
•
This feature must be enabled for your mailbox by the System Administrator.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
213
1.6.4 Sending Messages
To create/add to an external message delivery list
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
9
Log in to your mailbox.
3
1
List number 1
2
List number 2
OR
2
Enter 932.
1
Enter 1 or 2.
outside
telephone no.
CO line access no.
Enter the CO line access number
needed for making outside calls.
Enter 1.
*
Dial the outside telephone number
(including area code if needed).
2
Enter 2 to accept.
To store an extension number, simply
enter the extension number
then skip the next step.
1
2
C.Tone
State the member’s
name.
Enter 1
to end recording.
Enter 2 to add
the member.
To continue
1
Add more members
2
End
OR
Enter 1 or 2.
•
On-hook.
* If you are using an ISDN or SIP line in en bloc dialing mode, to insert a pause or special
command in the middle of the telephone number, pause momentarily while entering the
telephone number. You will hear a list of available options, for example, "To add more digits,
press 4. To insert a pause, press 5.".
To delete members from an external message delivery list
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
9
3
1
List number 1
2
List number 2
2
OR
Enter 932.
1
Delete all members,
then go on-hook
OR
2
Delete one member
Enter 1 or 2.
Enter 1 or 2.
1
Delete the announced member
2
Keep the member and
announce the next member
2
Enter 2.
OR
Enter 1 or 2.
On-hook.
Repeat this step to delete
other members.
214
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.4 Sending Messages
Receiving External Delivery Messages
When you send an external delivery message, the Unified Messaging system will call each of the specified
recipients. When a recipient answers the call, the system will guide him or her through the following procedure.
After a recipient has listened to an external delivery message, he or she can send you a reply to your message,
and even set urgent or private message status.
To receive a message and reply
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
When a recipient answers the call
1
#
4-digit password
Enter 1 to receive
the message.
The message is played back.
Enter a 4-digit password and #
required for listening to the message.
If you did not set a password,
this step will be skipped.
1
2
Enter 2 to reply.
C.Tone
Record a reply.
Enter 1
to end recording.
2
Enter 2
to accept.
To end the call, press ,
then go on-hook to finish.
1
Make the message urgent
1
Make the message private
2
Continue
OR
2
Continue
Enter 1 or 2.
•
•
OR
Enter 1 or 2.
On-hook.
If the recipient enters an incorrect password 3 times, the system will announce the following
information if it has been programmed. This information can help the recipient track down the
message or message sender (you).
– Company name
– Callback telephone number
– Your subscriber name
The Unified Messaging system may be able to guide recipients using a different language.
For more information, consult your System Administrator.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
215
1.6.5 Transferring Calls
1.6.5 Transferring Calls
–
–
–
–
–
–
Call Transfer
Incomplete Call Handling
Assigning Your Covering Extension
Remote Call Forwarding
Assigning and Canceling Telephone Numbers for Call Transfer to CO Line
Voice Mail Transfer
Call Transfer
When a call reaches your extension via the Automated Attendant service, normally your extension will ring and
you can answer the call. If you use the Call Transfer feature, however, the Unified Messaging system can
handle the call in a number of ways. The status you set for Call Transfer determines what happens to the call.
You can set one of the following:
Call Blocking:
The call will be handled by the Incomplete Call Handling feature (refer to "
Incomplete Call Handling"),
which allows you to have your calls ring at another extension, transferred to your mailbox, transferred to the
operator, etc. The call will not ring at your extension. The call will be handled according to the settings you
have made for Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer.
Call Screening:
The system will prompt the caller to record his or her name. If you are available to answer calls, the system
will ring your extension and play back the name of the caller. You can then answer the call if you choose. If
you do not or cannot answer the call, the call will be handled according to the settings you have made for
Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer.
Intercom Paging:
The Unified Messaging system will page you using the Intercom Paging feature. The call will not ring at your
extension. Your name will be announced to alert you to the call. If you do not or cannot answer the call, the
call will be handled according to the settings you have made for Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer.
Transfer to Mailbox:
The system will transfer the caller to your mailbox where he or she can leave a message for you. The call will
not ring at your extension.
Transfer to Custom Service:
The system will transfer the caller to the custom service you specify here. The call will not ring at your extension.
Disable Call Transfer:
Turns the Call Transfer feature off. The call will ring at your extension.
216
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.5 Transferring Calls
To set call transfer status
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
1
Log in to your mailbox.
5
2
3
1
4
5
6
Enter 51.
Call Blocking
Call Screening
Intercom Paging
Transfer to Mailbox
Transfer to Custom Service
Disable Call Transfer
Enter the desired Call Transfer status.
Follow the prompts as necessary.
On-hook.
The prompts heard will vary depending
on the feature you set in the previous step.
•
If Call Screening or Disable is selected, calls will be transferred to an outside telephone if a
telephone number has been programmed for call transfer to CO line (refer to "
Assigning
and Canceling Telephone Numbers for Call Transfer to CO Line").
Incomplete Call Handling
When a call is directed to your extension via the Automated Attendant service, Incomplete Call Handling will
handle the calls if:
• You do not answer the call (These calls are considered "no answer" calls).
• You are on another call (These calls are considered "busy" calls).
Call Transfer").
• You have set Call Blocking (refer to "
The status you set for Incomplete Call Handling determines what happens to these calls. You can set one or
more of the following for no answer calls and for busy calls separately. If you select more than one option, the
caller will be prompted to select his or her desired option.
Leaving a Message:
The system will transfer the caller to your mailbox where he or she can leave a message for you.
Transfer to Covering Extension:
Assigning Your Covering
The system will transfer the caller to your Covering Extension (refer to "
Extension"). If you have not assigned your Covering Extension, this option is not available.
Intercom Paging:
The system will page you using the Intercom Paging feature. Your name will be announced to alert you to the
call.
Transfer to Custom Service:
The system will transfer the caller to the Custom Service you specify here.
Transfer to Operator:
The system will transfer the caller to the operator.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
217
1.6.5 Transferring Calls
Return to Top Menu:
The caller is returned to the top menu of the Automated Attendant service and can then choose to call a different
extension.
To set Incomplete Call Handling status
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
No answer calls
5
Busy calls
5
OR
Enter 4 or 5.
Enter 5.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Leaving a Message
Transfer to Covering Extension
Intercom Paging
Transfer to Custom Service
Transfer to Operator
Return to Top Menu
Enter the desired Incomplete Call
Handling status.
To continue
Follow the prompts
as necessary.
1
OR
2
The prompts heard will vary depending
on the feature you set in the previous step.
•
Change
Accept
Enter 1 or 2.
Select an additional status.
OR
If finished, go on-hook.
On-hook.
When Call Blocking is enabled, blocked calls are treated by Incomplete Call Handling for no
answer calls.
Assigning Your Covering Extension
A Covering Extension is an extension that receives your calls instead of you. Your calls can be transferred to
your Covering Extension in 2 ways:
• By the Incomplete Call Handling Feature:
When the Incomplete Call Handling feature handles the call (i.e., if you do not answer, if you are on another
call, or if you have set Call Blocking), it will be transferred to your Covering Extension if you have set
Incomplete Call Handling").
Incomplete Call Handling to "Transfer to Covering Extension" (refer to "
• By pressing the specified dialing key (0, 3–9):
If the caller presses the key assigned for "Transfer to the Specified Extension" during your greeting
message or while recording a message for you, the call will be transferred to your Covering Extension.
•
•
218
You can change the dialing key that transfers your callers to your Covering Extension. If you
assign the "Transfer to Operator" option in your Personal Custom Service to a dialing key,
callers who press that dialing key will be transferred to your Covering Extension (refer to
"
Personal Custom Service").
If you do not assign your Covering Extension, callers will be transferred to the operator
instead.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.5 Transferring Calls
To assign your Covering Extension
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
5
Log in to your mailbox.
desired extension no.
2
Enter the desired extension number.
Enter 52.
If you have already assigned your Covering Extension and want to assign
a different extension, press 1 before entering the desired extension number.
2
Enter 2 to accept.
•
On-hook.
Once you assign a Covering Extension, remember to tell callers in your greeting message
that they can press the button you have assigned for transferring to your Covering Extension.
For example, "To speak with my assistant, press 0".
Remote Call Forwarding
You can program the Unified Messaging system to forward your calls to another extension or to an outside
telephone (if authorized). You can do this even when you are away from the office. This feature may be disabled
by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox. There are 6 forwarding settings available:
FWD All:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number.
FWD Busy:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when you are already on another call.
FWD No Answer:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when you do not answer your telephone.
FWD Busy and No Answer:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when you are on another call or do not answer
your telephone.
FWD to Outside:
Forwards all incoming calls to the specified outside telephone number if you are authorized to use this feature.
FWD Cancel:
Cancels the forwarding setting.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
219
1.6.5 Transferring Calls
To assign outside telephone numbers for Remote Call Forwarding
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
4
Log in to your mailbox.
8
1
Change telephone number 1
2
Change telephone number 2
OR
Enter 48.
Enter 1 or 2.
If you have already set a telephone number
and wish to change it, press 1 after selecting
telephone number 1 or 2.
outside party’s
telephone no.
CO line access no.
Enter the CO line access number
needed for making outside calls.
•
2
Dial the outside party’s telephone
number (max. 32 digits including
CO line access number).
Enter 2
to accept.
On-hook.
Before you can forward your calls to an outside telephone, you should first store the telephone
numbers you plan on using with this feature. You can store 2 telephone numbers for use with
Remote Call Forwarding.
If you change one of the outside telephone numbers for Remote Call Forwarding, you will
need to set Remote Call Forwarding to "FWD to Outside" once again before the new outside
telephone number will be used as the forward destination. If you do not do this, the old
telephone number will continue to be used.
•
To set/cancel Remote Call Forwarding
From Outside Telephone
9
Log in to your mailbox.
4
Enter 94.
extension no. of
the transfer destination
1
FWD All
2
FWD Busy
3
FWD No Answer
4
FWD Busy or No Answer
5
FWD to Outside, then go to STEP A.*
6
Cancel call forwarding, then go to STEP B.
Enter the extension number
of the transfer destination,
then go to STEP B.
OR
Enter required number.
STEP A
1
Set telephone number 1
2
Set telephone number 2
OR
3
CO line
access no.
Set another
telephone number
Enter required number.
Enter the CO line access
number needed for making
outside calls.
outside party’s
telephone no.
Dial the outside party’s telephone
number (max. 32 digits including
CO line access number).
STEP B
2
Enter 2
to accept.
220
Operating Manual
On-hook.
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.5 Transferring Calls
•
* This option is announced only if you are authorized to use it through system programming
for PBX COS (Class of Service) settings and UM COS settings. For more information, consult
your System Administrator.
Assigning and Canceling Telephone Numbers for Call Transfer to CO
Line
When you assign a telephone number for Call Transfer to CO Line, your calls will be transferred to the assigned
telephone number when:
• You have set Call Screening (refer to "
Call Transfer").
• You have set Disable Call Transfer (refer to "
Call Transfer").
To assign telephone numbers for call transfer to CO line
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
5
Log in to your mailbox.
CO line access no.
6
Enter the CO line access number
needed for making outside calls.
Enter 56.
If you have already stored a telephone number
and wish to change it, press 1 before continuing.
outside party's
telephone no.
2
Dial the outside party’s telephone number
(max. 32 digits including CO line access number).
Enter 2 to accept.
On-hook.
To cancel telephone numbers for call transfer to CO line
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
5
6
Enter 563.
•
•
3
On-hook.
This feature must be enabled for your mailbox by the System Administrator.
If you are using a PRI line, you may need to enter # at the end of outside telephone numbers.
Consult your System Administrator for more information.
Voice Mail Transfer
If you cannot answer calls, you can forward them to your mailbox. You can select the type of incoming calls
(Intercom Calls/Outside Calls/Both Calls) that are forwarded.
If your telephone has a Message button, the Message light turns on when a message is left in your mailbox.
You will hear an indication tone* when going off-hook, regardless of whether or not your telephone has a
Message button.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
221
1.6.5 Transferring Calls
You can also create a Voice Mail Transfer button on your phone to transfer received outside calls to a mailbox
of another extension so that calling parties can leave messages. Using the Voice Mail Transfer button, you
can also perform operations with one touch (for PT and PS only).
To forward your calls to your mailbox
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
0
Both Calls
OR
7
1
1
2
Outside Calls
OR
2
Off-hook.
Enter
3
4
Intercom Calls
Enter 0 to 2 as you desire.
71.
0
5
Cancel
All Calls
Busy
No Answer
Busy/No Answer
Enter required number.
For "Cancel", go on-hook
directly after entering 0.
UM group’s floating
extension no.
#
Enter UM group’s floating
extension number.
Enter #.
C.Tone
On-hook.
To forward a call to your mailbox while it is ringing
PT/PS
While on-hook
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Press Voice Mail
Transfer.
To transfer a call to a mailbox
PT/PS
During a conversation
(DSS)
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Press Voice Mail
Transfer.
222
Operating Manual
OR
desired
extension no.
Press DSS or enter desired
extension number.
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.5 Transferring Calls
To transfer your own call to the called extension’s mailbox
PTPT/PS
and SLT
extension no.
OR
R.B.Tone
OR
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
B.Tone
(DSS)
Off-hook.
•
Dial extension number
or press DSS.
OR
DND Tone
Press Voice Mail
Transfer.
*Indication tone after going off-hook
1s
•
If using a PS in parallel with a PT or SLT (in Wireless XDP Parallel mode), you cannot use
the Voice Mail Transfer button to forward a call to your mailbox while it is ringing.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Voice Mail Transfer button or a Message button.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
223
1.6.6 Other Features
1.6.6 Other Features
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Interview Mailbox
Message Waiting Notification
Personal Caller Name Announcement
Live Call Screening (LCS)
Recording Your Conversation
Assigning Your Telephone Numbers for Remote Automatic Log-in and Toll Saver
Personal Custom Service
Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)
Setting Absent Message Remotely
Call-through Service
Communication Assistant plug-in for Microsoft Outlook
IMAP
Interview Mailbox
An interview mailbox is a mailbox designed to ask questions to callers and record their answers. If you have
an interview mailbox (not all subscribers do), you can record up to 10 questions and set the answer recording
time individually for each question from 1 to 60 seconds.
Your interview mailbox can be used, for example, to allow callers to place orders or request information from
your company. You can ask them to record their names, address, and order or request information, and then
you can note their information later while playing back their messages.
•
If you would like to use this feature, you must first be assigned an Interview Mailbox. For more
information, consult your System Administrator.
To record questions
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
1
Log in to your mailbox.
9
2
2
1
3
4
Enter 921.
Change (record or re-record) this question.
Skip to the next question, then repeat this step.
Skip to the previous question, then repeat this step.
Select a specific question.
Enter the question number and #, then repeat this step.
Enter the desired option.
To continue
Change another question.
C.Tone
Record the question.
224
Operating Manual
1
2
Enter 1
Enter 2
to end recording. to accept.
OR
If finished, go on-hook.
On-hook.
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.6 Other Features
To change answer lengths
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Change the answer length.
Skip to the next question, then repeat this step.
3 Skip to the previous question, then repeat this step.
4 Select a specific question.
Enter the question number and #, then repeat this step.
1
Log in to your mailbox.
9
2
2
2
Enter 922.
Enter the desired option.
To continue
Change the answer length of another question.
answer length
OR
If finished, go on-hook.
Enter the answer length
(1–60) in seconds.
On-hook.
To delete questions
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
9
2
3
Enter 923.
1
2
3
4
Delete the current question.
Skip to the next question, then repeat this step.
Skip to the previous question, then repeat this step.
Select a specific question.
Enter the question number and #, then repeat this step.
On-hook.
Enter the desired option.
If finished, go on-hook.
Message Reception Mode
If you have an interview mailbox in addition to your regular mailbox, Message Reception Mode determines
which mailbox is used when:
• Calls are directed to your mailbox by the "Leaving a Message" setting of the Incomplete Call Handling
feature (refer to "
Incomplete Call Handling").
• Your extension is a Logical Extension (i.e., your mailbox receives your calls automatically, perhaps
because you do not have your own telephone for regular use).
To set a message mode
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
5
3
Enter 53.
Document Version 2014-08
1
Enter 1 to toggle between
Interview Mode (interview mailbox) and
Message Recording Mode (regular mailbox).
On-hook.
Operating Manual
225
1.6.6 Other Features
•
Not all subscribers have interview mailboxes. For more information, consult your System
Administrator.
Message Waiting Notification
The Message Waiting Notification feature lets you know you have received new messages in your mailbox by:
Message Waiting Lamp:
The message lamp on your telephone (if it has one) will light when you receive a new message. If you have a
6-line display PT, you can also see the number of new messages you have on your display. If your telephone
has a Message button, the Message light will also turn on when you receive a new message.
Device Notification:
Notifying you via a "device", i.e., an outside telephone, another PBX extension, your cellular phone, etc. You
can assign three different devices. For each device, you have the option of receiving notification for urgent
messages only, or for all messages. You can also choose to receive notification during certain hours only
(called "scheduling"), which is useful if you do not want to be disturbed at night, for example. For more
information on scheduling, consult your System Administrator.
If you turn device notification on for more than one device, the lowest numbered device (1, 2, or 3) will be used
first. If notification is not possible (for example, if your outside telephone is busy), the next device will be used.
Message notification by e-mail may also be available for your mailbox. When you receive new messages in
your mailbox, you can receive notification by e-mail. The recorded message can also be added to the e-mail
as an attachment. Consult your System Administrator for more information.
•
Displaying the number of new messages is only available with a 6-line Display PT. For more
information, consult your System Administrator.
To turn Message Waiting Lamp Notification On/Off
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
6
1
Enter 61.
226
Operating Manual
1
Enter 1 to enable/disable lamp notification.
On-hook.
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.6 Other Features
To turn Device Notification On/Off
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
6
Log in to your mailbox.
2
desired device no.
Enter 62.
Enter the desired
device number (1–6).
Send notification
for all messages
1
1
2
OR
3
Send notification
for urgent messages only
2
On-hook.
Enter 1 or 2.
•
Use a preprogrammed schedule
Receive notification always (continuously)
Turn off notifications
Enter 1, 2 or 3.
Device number 4, 5, or 6 is used to specify a device number that is "Device No. 1, 2, or 3"
for "E-mail/Text Message Device" in Web Maintenance Console.
To use the Device Notification feature for device number 1, 2, or 3, the telephone number for
each device should first be assigned.
•
To change device numbers
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
3
desired device no.
Enter 63.
Enter the desired
device number (1–3).
6
1
Enter 1 to change
the assigned number.
To delete the assigned number,
press 3 then go on-hook to finish.
CO line access no.
Enter the CO line access number
needed for making outside calls.
outside telephone no.
*
Dial the outside telephone number
(including area code if needed).
To store an extension number,
simply enter the extension number
then skip the next step.
2
Enter 2
to accept.
Document Version 2014-08
On-hook.
Operating Manual
227
1.6.6 Other Features
•
* If you are using an ISDN or SIP line in en bloc dialing mode, to insert a pause or special
command in the middle of the telephone number, pause momentarily while entering the
telephone number. You will hear a list of available options, for example, "To add more digits,
press 4. To insert a pause, press 5.".
If you are using a PRI line, you may need to enter # at the end of outside telephone numbers.
Consult your System Administrator for more information.
•
Personal Caller Name Announcement
By storing caller telephone numbers and recording caller names, you can have the Unified Messaging system
announce the caller name to you when:
• You play back a message from one of the assigned callers.
• The system transfers a call to you from one of the assigned callers.
• The system pages you to inform you that you have a call from one of the assigned callers.
This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator or System Manager for your mailbox.
To assign Caller ID numbers and recording names
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
4
Log in to your mailbox.
5
1
Enter 451.
STEP A
caller ID no.
2
#
Enter the caller ID number
(caller’s telephone number, 20 digits max.)
and #.
C.Tone
State the caller’s name.
Enter 2
to accept.
To continue
STEP B
1
Enter 1 to end
recording.
228
Operating Manual
2
Enter 2
to add.
1
To add more caller ID numbers.
2
End
OR
Enter 1 or 2.
On-hook.
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.6 Other Features
To change Caller ID numbers and recorded names
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
5
2
Enter 452.
1
Change the Caller ID number,
then go to STEP A in "To assign Caller ID numbers and recording names".
2
Change the caller’s name,
then go to STEP B in "To assign Caller ID numbers and recording names".
3
Accept the current item as is and skip to the next item,
then repeat this step.
OR
OR
On-hook.
To delete Caller ID numbers and recorded names
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
1
4
Log in to your mailbox.
5
Delete all numbers,
then go on-hook to finish.
3
Enter 453.
On-hook.
OR
2
Delete one number.
Enter 1 or 2.
1
Delete the announced number.
OR
2
Keep the number and
announce the next number,
then repeat this step.
On-hook.
Enter 1 or 2.
When finished, go on-hook.
•
The number of callers you can assign for this feature is controlled by the System
Administrator.
Live Call Screening (LCS)
While a caller is leaving a message in your mailbox, you can monitor the call without
answering. If you so desire, you can answer the call while monitoring. There are two
methods available (Default: Hands-free mode).
Hands-free mode:
You can monitor the message automatically, live through the telephone speaker.
Private mode:
You will hear an alarm tone while the caller is leaving a message.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
229
1.6.6 Other Features
Before operating
• Create a Live Call Screening (LCS) button (Personal Programming).
• Select the mode, either Hands-free or Private (Personal Programming).
• Set the extension PIN (Personal Identification Number).
• Set the Live Call Screening feature.
To set Live Call Screening
PT/PS
PIN: Personal Identification Number
extension PIN
(Live Call
Screening)
Press Live Call
Screening.
Enter extension PIN
(max. 10 digits).
This is required only when
an extension PIN is stored.
To cancel Live Call Screening
PT/PS
(Live Call
Screening)
Press red Live Call Screening.
230
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.6 Other Features
Operation Flowchart
The operations in the shaded areas can be done hands-free.
PT/PS
PT
Hands-free Mode
Private Mode
(Alarm Tone)
Monitoring (Hands-free)
Monitoring
Monitoring (Handset)
MONITOR
OR
No operation
OR
(Live Call
Screening)
Off-hook.
Press SP-PHONE, MONITOR or
Live Call Screening.
Stop
monitoring Answering
(Live Call
Screening)
Press Live Call
Screening.
OR
Stop
monitoring
Answering
the call
Stop
monitoring
Answering
the call
(Live Call
Screening)
(Live Call
Screening)
Press
Live Call
Screening.
On-hook.
Press
Live Call
Screening.
MONITOR
Press
SP-PHONE
or MONITOR.
•
•
•
•
MONITOR
OR
Press SP-PHONE or
MONITOR.
The Live Call Screening (LCS) button light shows the feature status as follows:
Off: LCS is off.
Flashing green rapidly: Alerting in the Private mode.
Flashing green slowly: Monitoring.
Red on: LCS is on.
The manager extension can clear an extension PIN.
This feature is available for a single line telephone if it is connected to a proprietary telephone
in parallel. (Private mode only)
To answer the call while monitoring, press Recall/hookswitch.
Only the handset monitoring in the Private mode is available for PS users.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.2 Personal Programming—Live Call Screening Mode Set
•
Select the mode, either monitoring the message through the speaker automatically or
receiving, while the caller leaves a message.
3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Live Call Screening (LCS) button.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
231
1.6.6 Other Features
Recording Your Conversation
You can record a conversation into a mailbox while talking on the phone.
You can select the mailbox each time you record a conversation.
To record into your mailbox (Two-way Record)
PT/PS
During a conversation
(Two-way
Record)
To stop recording,
press this button again.
Press Two-way Record.
To record into another mailbox (Two-way Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation
(DSS)
(Two-way
Transfer)
Press Two-way
Transfer.
OR
another
extension no.
Press DSS or enter
another extension
number.
To stop recording,
press this button again.
To record into another mailbox with one touch (One-touch Two-way Transfer)
PT/PS
During a conversation
(One-touch
Two-way
Transfer)
Press One-touch
Two-way Transfer.
232
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.6 Other Features
•
The Two-way Record button light, Two-way Transfer button light or One-touch Two-way
Transfer button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Not recording.
On: Recording the conversation.
Note
Many states have imposed regulations on the manner in which 2-way telephone
conversations may be recorded, so you should inform the other party that the conversation
is being recorded.
Consult your local telephone company for further information.
•
•
If all Unified Messaging system ports are busy when you try to use one of these features, you
will hear a warning tone, dial tone, or busy tone, depending on the feature you are trying to
use.
Recording time when using these features may be limited. For more information, consult your
System Administrator.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Two-way Record button, a Two-way Transfer button and a One-touch
Two-way Transfer button.
Assigning Your Telephone Numbers for Remote Automatic Log-in and
Toll Saver
When logging in to your mailbox remotely (i.e., from an outside telephone) to listen to your messages, the
Remote Automatic Log-in (refer to "
Remote Access") and Toll Saver features identify you by recognizing
your telephone number (caller ID). In order to use these features, you must first store the telephone numbers
that you will use to access your mailbox remotely.
Automatic Log-in and Toll Saver may be disabled by the System Administrator for your mailbox.
To assign
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
9
1
Change telephone number 1
2
Change telephone number 2
OR
Enter 49.
Enter 1 or 2.
If you have already set a telephone number and
wish to change it, press 1 after selecting telephone
number 1 or 2.
outside telephone no.
#
Enter your outside telephone number
(max. 20 digits including area code if needed) and #.
•
2
Enter 2
to accept.
On-hook.
The System Administrator must enable Automatic Log-in and Toll Saver for your mailbox
before it can be used.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
233
1.6.6 Other Features
Personal Custom Service
A Personal Custom Service is a set of options you can present to your callers, allowing them to press buttons
on their telephones in order to access certain features. You should explain the options available to your callers
in each of your personal greeting messages, for example, "This is (name). I can’t take your call right now. Press
3 to leave me a message. Press 4 to speak with my assistant. Press 5 to dial another extension…". For details
on recording your greeting messages, refer to "
Changing or Deleting Your Personal Greeting
Messages" or "
Personal Greetings for Caller ID".
You can create your own personal custom service and allow your callers to access the following features:
Transfer to Mailbox:
The system will transfer the caller to your mailbox (or another mailbox you specify here) where he or she can
leave a message.
Transfer to Extension:
The system will transfer the caller to the extension you specify when creating the custom service.
Transfer to Outside:
The system will transfer the caller to the outside telephone number you specify when creating the custom
service. This feature must be enabled for your mailbox by the System Administrator or System Manager.
Transfer to Custom Service:
The system will transfer the caller to the Custom Service you specify here.
Voice Mail Service:
The system will prompt the caller to enter a mailbox number and leave a message.
Automated Attendant Service:
The system will prompt the caller to dial an extension number in order to speak with someone else.
Intercom Paging:
The system will page you using the Intercom Paging feature. Your name will be announced to alert you to the
call.
Repeat Greeting:
The caller can play your greeting message back from the beginning in order to listen to your Personal Custom
Service options once again.
Transfer to Operator:
The system will transfer the caller to the operator, or to your Covering Extension if you have assigned one
Assigning Your Covering Extension").
(refer to "
You can also select what happens when a caller makes no selection (No DTMF Input Operation) while listening
to your greeting, perhaps because the caller is using a rotary/pulse telephone. The caller can either be
transferred to your mailbox or be disconnected.
•
234
The following dialing keys are assigned to the following features by default, and cannot be
changed.
1
End recording
2
Begin recording while listening to personal greeting message
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.6 Other Features
Exit
To create your personal custom service
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
6
Enter 461.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
desired dialing key
1
Enter the desired dialing key (0, 3–9)
that you want to assign an option to.
Transfer to a mailbox,
then enter the desired mailbox number.
Transfer to an extension,
then enter the desired extension number.
Transfer to an outside telephone
(may not be available).
• Next enter the CO line access number
and the desired outside telephone number
(including area code if needed).
Transfer to a Custom Service,
then enter the desired Custom Service number.
Activate Voice Mail Service.
Activate Automated Attendant Service
(Call Transfer Service).
Activate paging.
Repeat the greeting.
Transfer to the operator.
Enter 1.
Skip this step if you are creating your
Personal Custom Service for the first time.
2
Enter 2
to accept.
On-hook.
Enter the desired option.
To delete options from your personal custom service
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
6
1
Enter 461.
desired dialing key
Enter the desired dialing key (0, 3–9)
that you want to delete an option from.
3
Enter 3.
On-hook.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
235
1.6.6 Other Features
To select the No DTMF Input operation
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
6
Enter 461.
1
2
3
1
1
1
Enter 1 to select
the No DTMF Input Operation.
Message recording.
Disconnect the caller.
Disconnect the caller when call was received after hours
(message recording for all other times).
Enter 1.
2
Enter 2
to accept.
On-hook.
Enter the desired option.
To confirm the settings for your personal custom service
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
4
6
Enter 46.
•
•
•
2
Enter 2
to review.
On-hook.
The System Administrator or the System Manager must enable Transfer to Outside for your
mailbox before it can be used.
The Transfer to Outside option can be used a maximum of 4 times in your Personal Custom
Service.
If you are using a PRI line, you may need to enter # at the end of outside telephone numbers.
For more information, consult your System Administrator.
Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)
You can receive an alarm at your telephone to remind you of a meeting, appointment or as a wake-up call.
The alarm can occur either once or daily (every day until canceled) at a preset time. When you go off-hook to
answer, you will hear a special dial tone or prerecorded message.
236
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.6 Other Features
To set/cancel
PT/SLT/SIP Extn.
Log in to your mailbox.
9
5
Enter 95.
1
Change the setting.
2
Accept the current setting,
then go on-hook to finish.
3
Cancel (turn off) the Timed Reminder,
then go on-hook to finish.
Enter the desired option.
AM
1
desired time
1
# *
2
Enter the desired time and #.
•
•
*2
1
OR
Once
2
OR
PM
2
Enter 1 for AM,
2 for PM.
Daily
Enter 1 for once
or 2 for daily.
Enter 2
to accept.
On-hook.
*1 Example: To enter 5:00, press 5#. To enter 5:15, press 515#.
*2 This option may not be available if the system is programmed to use 24-hour time.
Setting Absent Message Remotely
You can set your absent message by accessing the subscriber service menu. To login to your mailbox from
an outside telephone, refer to "
Remote Access".
To set/cancel
From Outside Telephone
1
Change the setting.
7
2
Accept the current setting,
then go on-hook to finish.
Enter 7.
3
Cancel your absent message,
then go on-hook to finish.
Log in to your mailbox.
Enter the desired option.
absent message no.
Enter an Absent Message Number (1–9).
Document Version 2014-08
On-hook.
Operating Manual
237
1.6.6 Other Features
Call-through Service
You can make outside calls by accessing the subscriber service menu (from an outside telephone) and dialing
an outside destination. To login to your mailbox from an outside telephone, refer to "
Remote Access".
To call an outside party
From Outside Telephone
8
CO line access no.
Enter 8.
Enter the CO line access number
needed for making outside calls.
Log in to your mailbox.
outside telephone no.
#
Dial the outside telephone number and #.
•
Talk.
This feature must be enabled for your mailbox by the System Administrator.
Communication Assistant plug-in for Microsoft Outlook
If the Communication Assistant plug-in for Microsoft Outlook is installed to your PC, you can access the
contents of your mailbox from your PC through Microsoft Outlook. Voice messages appear in subscribers’
inboxes as e-mail messages.
With the Outlook plug-in, you can do the following:
• Play back voice messages on a PC or through a telephone
• Record and send voice messages from a PC or telephone
• Forward and reply to messages to another subscriber
• Call back the sender of a message quickly when the message has caller information included
• Export voice message data
• Attach voice messages to other e-mail messages
•
For details about using the Outlook Plug-in, refer to the documentation of Communication
Assistant.
IMAP
If your e-mail client supports IMAP4, you can access the contents of your mailbox through an e-mail client and
you can do the following:
• Play back voice messages
• Save voice message data to your PC
• Delete voice messages
238
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.6 Other Features
•
For configuring an IMAP account, consult your System Administrator.
UM IMAP Session Controller for Microsoft Outlook
If you will be accessing Unified Messaging data through an IMAP connection, you must install the IMAP Session
Controller software. This software is a plug-in for Microsoft Windows. When installed, it appears in the
notification area. The software changes the selected account in the Outlook user interface from the Unified
Messaging IMAP account to the default Outlook inbox after a specified time period. Doing so enables multiple
users efficiently interact with the PBX through Microsoft Outlook.
To download IMAP Session Controller
You can download the IMAP Session Controller software from Web Maintenance Console:
1. Log in to Web Maintenance Console.
2. On the Edit User screen, click the Unified Message tab.
3. Click Download for Unified Messaging Plug in to access the download site for the IMAP Session
Controller software.
•
For details about Web Maintenance Console, refer to "3.2 System Programming Using Web
Maintenance Console".
To install IMAP Session Controller
Double-click UmicSetup.exe, and then follow the on-screen guidance to install the software.
To uninstall IMAP Session Controller
Uninstall this software using the program uninstall feature in the Control Panel. For details, refer to the
documentation for your operating system.
To configure settings and view information
While this software is running, you can configure settings and view information about the software. Right-click
the icon in the notification area, and then select an item.
Notification area icon
Item
Settings
Description
Language
Select the language to use for the settings dialog box and the notification area menu.
No Operation Timer
Enter the time period after which the selected account is changed from the Unified
Messaging account to the default Outlook inbox if there has been no user activity.
Timer value: 30 to 600 seconds
(Recommended timer value: 30 to 60 seconds)
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
239
1.6.6 Other Features
Item
Description
E-Mail Account for UM
Enter your Unified Messaging e-mail account. The maximum size is 256 characters.
If nothing is entered, all of the e-mail accounts using IMAP are assumed to be Unified
Messaging accounts.
You can copy the mail account from Mail Account in the General tab of the Internet
E-mail Settings dialog box.
• To open the Internet E-mail Settings dialog box:
– In Outlook 2007, click the Tools menu ® Account Settings ® Change ® More
Settings button.
– In Outlook 2010, click the File menu ® Info ® Account Settings ® Change
® More Settings button.
240
About
Display the copyright and version of this software.
Exit
Exit this software.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.7 Quick Reference
1.6.7 Quick Reference
The flow below includes all top menu options and frequently used features. Only options 1–4 and 0 are
announced in the top menu when accessed. If you press 0 (help menu), you can listen to the whole top menu
(options 1–9).
The help menu may not be available from the top menu depending on the COS settings of your mailbox.
To Enter a Mailbox
From a Remote
Location, Dial:
#6 + mailbox number
1
Main Menu:
You have
new messages.
Password #
Listen to New Messages:
1 Voice Message
# All Messages
2
Send a Message:
Enter Mailbox Number
1 Record Message
2 Add Another Mailbox
3 Review Mailing List
3
Listen to Old Messages:
1 Voice Message
# All Messages
1
2
#
1
2
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Listen to New Messages
Send a Message
Listen to Old Messages
Mailbox Management
Set Automated Attendant (AA) status
Message Notification
Change Absent Message
Call-through Service
Other Features
Hang Up
Receive New Message (During or after playback):
1 Repeat Message
1.1 Previous Message
2 Next Message
3 Erase Message
4 Send Reply
5 Transfer Message
6 Message Envelope
7 Rewind (During playback only)
8 Pause/Restart (During playback only)
8.4 Volume Up (During playback only)
8.5 Set Bookmark (During voice message playback only)
8.6 Resume from Bookmark position (Voice messages only)
9 Fast Forward (During playback only)
# Save This Message as New
0 Help
Receive Old Message (During or after playback):
1 Repeat Message
1.1 Previous Message
2 Next Message
3 Erase Message
4 Send Reply
5 Transfer Message
6 Message Envelope
7 Rewind (During playback only)
8 Pause/Restart (During playback only)
8.4 Volume Up (During playback only)
8.5 Set Bookmark (During voice message playback only)
8.6 Resume from Bookmark position (Voice messages only)
9 Fast Forward (During playback only)
0 Help
Continued on next page
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
241
1.6.7 Quick Reference
Continued from previous page
4
5
1
Mailbox Management:
1 Record Personal Greetings
2 Set Password
3 Enter Owner's Name
4 Set Group Distribution List
5 Record Caller Name/Number
6 Set Personal Custom Service
8 Set Remote Call FWD to Outside
9 Set Numbers for Automatic Log-in and Toll Saver
Set AA Status:
1 Set Call Transfer Status
2 Set Covering Extensions
3 Set Message Reception Mode
4 Set Incomplete Call Handling For No Answer
5 Set Incomplete Call Handing For Busy
6 Set Telephone Number for Transfer
6
Message Notification:
1 Message Waiting Lamp
2 Device Status
3 Assign Telephone Numbers
7
Change Absent Message
8
Call-through Service
Record Personal Greeting:
1 No Answer
2 Busy Signal
3 After Hours
4 Caller ID
5 Temporary
6 Absent Message
1
Set Call Transfer Status:
1 Call Blocking
2 Call Screening
3 Intercom Paging
4 Transfer to Mailbox
5 Transferring to Specified Custom Service
6 All Disable
4
Incomplete Handling Status:
For No Answer
1 Leaving a Message
2 Covering Extension
3 Intercom Paging
4 Set Transferring to Custom Service
5 Operator
6 Return to AA Service Top Menu
5
Incomplete Handling Status:
For Busy
1 Leaving a Message
2 Covering Extension
3 Intercom Paging
4 Set Transferring to Custom Service
5 Operator
6 Return to AA Service Top Menu
Continued on next page
242
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
1.6.7 Quick Reference
Continued from previous page
9
Set Other Features:
1 Listen to Deleted Message
2 Set Interview Mailbox
3 Set External Delivery Message
4 Set Remote Call Forwarding
5 Set Timed Reminder
1
Listen to Deleted Messages:
1 Voice Message
# All Messages
2
Interview Mailbox Management:
1 Record Question
2 Set Answer Length
3 Erase Question
3
External Message Delivery:
1 Record Message
2 Set a Mailing List
4
Remote Call Forwarding Set:
1 FWD—All Calls
2 FWD—Busy
3 FWD—No Answer
4 FWD—Busy/No Answer
5 FWD to a CO Line
6 FWD Cancel
Document Version 2014-08
1
2
#
Receive Deleted Message (During or after playback):
1 Repeat Message
1.1 Previous Message
2 Next Message
3 Recover Message
6 Message Envelope
7 Rewind (During playback only)
8 Pause/Restart (During playback only)
8.4 Volume Up (During playback only)
9 Fast Forward (During playback only)
0 Help
Operating Manual
243
1.6.7 Quick Reference
244
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
Section 2
Manager Operation
This section shows the manager how to control the other
extensions or the PBX.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
245
2.1.3 OGM (Outgoing Messages)
2.1 Manager Service Features
2.1.1 Dial Tone Transfer
The manager can change the restriction level, permitting an extension to make a call.
PT/PS
During a conversation with an extension
(Toll Restriction)
C.Tone
On-hook.
Press Toll Restriction.
The extension can hear the dial
tone and then make a call.
•
•
The restriction level is changed to the preprogrammed level of Toll Restriction button.
The restriction level of SIP phones cannot be changed.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Toll Restriction (TRS) button.
2.1.2 External BGM (Background Music)
The manager extension can select and broadcast background music in the office through external speakers.
To select and start/stop the background music
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
3
5
external
pager no.
OR
OR
Off-hook.
Enter
35.
BGM no.
Enter external
pager number
(1 digit) or for all.
0
C.Tone
Enter BGM number
(1 digit) or 0 to stop.
On-hook.
2.1.3 OGM (Outgoing Messages)
The manager extension can record three kinds of greeting messages (OGM) as follows:
246
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
2.1.3 OGM (Outgoing Messages)
1. DISA message: Used to greet and guide callers so that they access extension user group
or outside party without operator assistance.
2. Incoming Call Distribution Group message: Used to greet and guide callers to an
incoming call distribution group.
3. Time Reminder message: Used when the extension answers the Timed Reminder.
All messages have their own extension numbers. You can select the desired message. You have two methods
for recording a message. One is recorded using the handset, and the other is recorded from an external BGM
(MOH) port.
To record
PT
3
Off-hook.
Enter
OGM floating
extension no.
1
6
Enter 1.
36.
Progress
Tone &
C.Tone
Enter OGM floating
extension number.
C.Tone
Press STORE.
Record
message.
The message
is played back.
On-hook.
When the time limit passes,
it stops automatically.
To play back
PT
3
Off-hook.
Enter
OGM floating
extension no.
Enter OGM floating
extension number.
Document Version 2014-08
6
2
Enter 2.
36.
C.Tone
The message
is played back.
On-hook.
Operating Manual
247
2.1.4 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection) Monitor Release
To record from an external BGM (MOH) port
PT
3
Off-hook.
6
Enter
36.
OGM floating
extension no.
3
BGM port
no.
Enter 3.
Enter BGM port
number (1 digit).
You hear
the message.
Progress
Enter OGM floating Tone &
extension number. C.Tone
C.Tone
Press CONF.
Press STORE.
When the time limit
passes, it stops
automatically.
The message
is played back.
C.Tone
The message
is recorded.
On-hook.
To clear the message
PT
3
Enter
Off-hook.
OGM floating
extension no.
Enter OGM floating
extension number.
•
6
36.
Progress
Tone &
C.Tone
0
Enter 0.
On-hook.
The default of OGM floating extension numbers depends on system programming. For more
information, consult your System Administrator or System Manager.
2.1.4 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station
Selection) Monitor Release
NDSS buttons can be customized on any extension connected to your PBX. An NDSS button
allows an extension user to monitor another extension connected to another PBX in a private
network. The NDSS button light shows the current status of the monitored extension. When
it becomes unnecessary to monitor an extension connected to another PBX, the manager can
stop the PBX from monitoring it. Any NDSS buttons set to monitor that extension will also stop
monitoring.
248
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
2.1.6 Time Service Mode Control
PTPT/PS
and SLT
7
8
another PBX
extension no.
4
OR
C.Tone
(NDSS)
Off-hook.
•
Enter
784.
On-hook.
Dial another PBX extension
number and then enter #, or
press NDSS.
To restart monitoring of an extension after performing this operation, go off-hook, press the
corresponding NDSS button, and go on-hook.
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) button.
2.1.5 Remote Extension Dial Lock
This feature can override Extension Dial Lock (refer to 1.3.25 Extension Dial Lock) that has been set by an
extension user. If the manager extension locks the extension, the extension user cannot unlock it.
This feature is also known as Remote Station Lock Control.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
2
7
Off-hook.
Enter
8
78.
Unlock
extension no.
OR
3
Lock
Enter 2 to unlock
or 3 to lock.
Enter extension
number.
C.Tone
On-hook.
2.1.6 Time Service Mode Control
The manager extension or the preprogrammed extension can change the time mode (Day, Lunch, Break or
Night).
There are two methods (Automatic or Manual) of changing the time modes.
Automatic: enables the time mode for each day of the week to change automatically. You may also change
it manually.
Manual: enables to change a mode manually as follows.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
249
2.1.6 Time Service Mode Control
To change the time mode (Day/Night/Lunch/Break)
PT/PS
While on-hook
(Time Service
(Day/Night/
Lunch/Break))
Press Time Service
(Day/Night/Lunch/Break)
until the desired mode
appears.
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
7
Off-hook.
Enter
8
780.
0
0
Day
1
Night
2
Lunch
3
Break
Enter 0 to 3
as you desire.
C.Tone
On-hook.
To select the time service switching mode (Automatic/Manual)
PT/PS
While on-hook
(Time Service
Switching Mode
(Automatic/Manual))
Press Time Service
Switching Mode
(Automatic/Manual).
•
•
•
Besides the time mode, there is Holiday mode. It can change mode once on a specified date.
The Time Service (Day/Night/Lunch/Break) button light shows the current status as follows:
Off: Day mode
Green on: Lunch mode
Flashing green: Break mode
Red on: Night mode
Flashing red: Holiday mode
The Time Service Switching Mode (Automatic/Manual) button light shows the current status
as follows:
Off: Automatic
Red on: Manual
Customizing Your Phone
• 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Create or edit a Time Service (Day/Night/Lunch/Break) button or a Time Service Switching
Mode (Automatic/Manual) button.
250
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
2.2.1 System Manager Features
2.2 Configuring Unified Messaging Features
2.2.1 System Manager Features
The System Manager can configure mailboxes, change class of service (COS) settings for subscribers, etc.
Logging in to the System Manager’s Mailbox
–
–
Setting Up Mailboxes
–
Setting Class of Service (COS) Parameters
–
Remote Time Service Mode Setting
–
Changing the Company Greeting and Incoming Call Service Setting
Broadcasting Messages
–
–
Changing the System Manager’s Password
Logging in to the System Manager’s Mailbox
The procedures described in this section require the System Manager to use a telephone, however, many of
these procedures can also be performed using a PC with Web Maintenance Console. For more information,
consult your dealer.
In order to perform these procedures with a telephone, the System Manager must log in before performing any
System Manager tasks. To log in as the System Manager, 3 items of information must be known: the UM
group’s floating extension number to access the Unified Messaging system, the System Manager’s mailbox
number, and the System Manager’s mailbox password.
– The System Manager’s mailbox number is 999 (default) depending on the mailbox number length specified
in system programming.
– The System Manager’s password can be assigned by the System Administrator using Web Maintenance
Changing the
Console or by the System Manager using his or her extension telephone (refer to "
System Manager’s Password").
•
•
•
•
•
•
Before the System Manager can perform any System Manager tasks, "System Manager
Access from Telephone" must be enabled and "Password for System Manager (Up to 16
numeric digits)" must be set by the System Administrator using Web Maintenance Console.
After logging in, the system will announce the number of total messages, the number of new
messages, or the length of new messages. These announcements depend on the mailbox
settings and COS settings for the System Manager.
If there are new messages in the mailbox, the messages will be played automatically. The
System Manager can listen to them continuously without listening to the system prompts.
This feature is only available when "Autoplay New Message" is activated for the System
Manager’s COS.
If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
System Manager cannot create or edit mailboxes. The system will announce, "Sorry, this
function is not available".
For more information on logging in, refer to "Logging in to Your Mailbox for the First Time".
Manager Service switching
You can switch mailboxes simply by pressing ## from the subscriber service menu, in the
following order:
Subscriber service
Document Version 2014-08
Message Manager service
System Manager service
Operating Manual
251
2.2.1 System Manager Features
•
For KX-UT series SIP phone users:
When using the MESSAGE button, please press the MESSAGE button before going off-hook.
Manual log-in
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
OR
#
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
OR
Off-hook.
System Manager’s
mailbox no.
6
Enter #6.
UM group’s floating
extension no.
Enter and System Manager’s
mailbox number (default: 999).
Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail
Transfer, or enter UM group’s
floating extension number.
System Manager password
#
Enter System Manager’s
Mailbox.
Enter System Manager password and #.
Remote automatic log-in
From Outside Telephone
Call the Unified Messaging system
from the preprogrammed
outside telephone number
(assigned as a Caller ID number).
System Manager password
#
Enter System
Manager’s Mailbox.
Enter System Manager
password and #.
CAUTION
•
•
•
It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum
protection against unauthorized access.
To avoid unauthorized access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes known
to others, the PBX may be misused.
Change the password periodically.
Notice
•
252
Operating Manual
When disabling the password requirement, ensure that an unauthorized third-party is not
allowed access to your extension.
Document Version 2014-08
2.2.1 System Manager Features
Setting Up Mailboxes
The System Manager’s primary function is to create mailboxes for new subscribers and to maintain system
organization by deleting unneeded passwords and mailboxes.
•
If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
System Manager cannot create or edit mailboxes. The system will announce, "Sorry, this
function is not available".
Creating and Editing a Mailbox
The System Manager can create and edit subscriber mailboxes by following the steps below.
When creating a new mailbox, or editing a mailbox’s parameters, the following parameters can be set:
• Mailbox Number
• Subscriber’s Name:
The system allows a maximum of 10 seconds for each name. The name should be spoken slowly and
clearly. (We recommend using the subscriber’s last name.)
• Extension Number
• First 4 Letters of the Subscriber’s Last Name:
Enter only the first 4 letters of the owner’s last name.
• First 4 Letters of the Subscriber’s First Name:
Enter only the first 4 letters of the subscriber’s first name.
• Class of Service Number:
Enter any COS number (1–64).
• Interview Mailbox Number:
Interview Mailbox Numbers must not be the same number as an existing mailbox.
• All Calls Transfer To Mailbox (Change Logical Extension Status):
If this parameter is enabled, the extension is considered to be a Logical Extension and therefore calls
directed to the extension via Automated Attendant service are automatically forwarded to the extension
mailbox. The extension does not ring when a call is received.
• Message Waiting Lamp Notification:
If this parameter is enabled, the Message Waiting Lamp of the subscriber’s telephone turns on when a
new message is recorded.
• External Message Delivery:
Allows a subscriber to send a message to several subscribers and non-subscribers (including outside
parties). If enabled, the prompt mode setting determines the language heard when the system calls the
recipient.
• Auto Forwarding:
Moves or copies unplayed messages from one mailbox to another, after a specified period of time.
To create/edit/delete any mailbox parameter
Log in to the System
Manager’s mailbox.
5
To exit
STEP B
STEP A
1
Enter 51.
1
Enter 1
to assign
or edit.
subscriber's
mailbox no.
Enter the subscriber's
mailbox number.
2
Enter 2
to accept.
Enter
.
Follow system prompts
and set each
parameter below.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
253
2.2.1 System Manager Features
Parameters
Steps
Subscriber’s Name
1.
1 to change the current setting.
2. Record the subscriber’s name.
3.
2 to accept.
Extension Number
1.
1 to change the current setting.
2. Enter the subscriber’s extension number.
3.
2 to accept.
First 4 Letters of the
Subscriber’s Last Name
1.
1 to change the current setting.
2. Enter the first 4 letters of subscriber’s last name.
3.
2 to accept.
First 4 Letters of the
Subscriber’s First Name
1.
1 to change the current setting.
2. Enter the first 4 letters of subscriber’s first name.
3.
2 to accept.
Class of Service Number
1.
1 to change the current setting.
2. Enter the Class of Service Number (1–64).
3.
2 to accept.
Interview Mailbox Number
1.
1 to change the current setting.
2. Enter the Interview Mailbox Number.
3.
2 to accept.
All Calls Transfer To
Mailbox (Change Logical
Extension Status)
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
Message Waiting Lamp
Notification
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
Device Notification for
Unreceived Messages
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
External Message Delivery
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
•
Prompt Mode
2.
If set to "Enable", go to "Prompt Mode".
2 to accept.
1.
1
for Primary.
2
for System.
3
for Caller Select.
•
For System, enter the system prompt number (1–8).
2.
4 to accept the current setting, then go to "External Message
Delivery".
254
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
2.2.1 System Manager Features
Parameters
Auto Forwarding
Steps
1.
1
•
2.
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
If set to "Disable":
a. The following mailbox settings are skipped.
– Forwarding Mailbox Number
– Forwarding Delay Time
– Forwarding Mode
b. The Auto Forwarding parameter is the last parameter to be
entered.
c. To continue assigning or editing other mailboxes, go back to
STEP B.
.
d. To finish, enter
2
to accept.
Forwarding Mailbox
Number
1.
1 to change the current setting.
2. Enter the forwarding mailbox number.
3.
2 to accept.
Forwarding Delay Time
1.
1
to change the current setting.
2. Enter the delay time, and
Forwarding Mode
#
.
3.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (Copy or Move).
2.
2
to accept, then go to "Auto Forwarding".
To delete a mailbox
The System Manager should delete mailboxes that are no longer needed. When another person accesses the
Unified Messaging system, the action is automatically canceled.
1. Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
5
1
2
3. Enter the mailbox number.
4.
1 to delete the mailbox.
To reset a mailbox password
When a password is forgotten, the System Manager must reset the password before it can be reassigned by
the subscriber.
1. Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
5
1
3
3. Enter the mailbox number.
4.
1 to delete the password.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
255
2.2.1 System Manager Features
•
•
The System Manager password cannot be reset here. The System Administrator can reset
the System Manager password using Web Maintenance Console.
After the password is reset, if the System Administrator has set "Default Password for New
Mailboxes" to "Enable", the password will be set to the default password. If set to "Disable",
the mailbox will have no password.
Setting Class of Service (COS) Parameters
A Class of Service (COS) defines the set of system services available to the mailboxes assigned to it. There
are 66 Classes of Service; they can be assigned to mailboxes by the System Administrator using Web
Maintenance Console or by the System Manager using a telephone. COS No. 65 and No. 66 are assigned by
default to the Message Manager and the System Manager respectively.
•
If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
System Manager cannot set COS parameters. The system will announce, "Sorry, this
function is not available".
To set COS parameters
Follow the steps detailed below to set the following Class of Service parameters:
Log in to the System
Manager’s mailbox.
5
2
Enter 52.
Parameters
Personal Greeting Length*1
Follow system prompts
and set each
parameter below.
class of
service no.
Enter the class of
service number (1–66).
Steps
1.
1
to change the greeting length.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2. Enter the greeting length (1–360 s).
3.
2 to accept.
New Message Retention
Time
1.
1
to change the retention time.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2. Enter the retention time (a maximum of 30 days or 0: Unlimited).
3.
2 to accept.
Saved Message Retention
Time
1.
1
to change the retention time.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2. Enter the retention time (a maximum of 30 days or 0: Unlimited).
3.
2 to accept.
256
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
2.2.1 System Manager Features
Parameters
Message Length
Steps
1.
1
to change the message length.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2. Enter the message length (1–60 min or 0: Unlimited).
3.
2 to accept.
Total Message Time
Available per Mailbox
1.
1
to change the total message time.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2. Enter the total message time (1–600 min or 0: Unlimited).
3.
2 to accept.
Message Retrieval Order
Prompt Mode
1.
1 to change the current setting (LIFO [Last In First Out] or FIFO
[First In First Out]).
2 to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
for Primary.
2
for System.
•
For System, enter system prompt number (1–8).
to accept.
2.
3
Delete Message
Confirmation
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
Message Envelope
Playback Mode
1.
1
for Before.
2
for After.
3
for Require.
4
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2.
4
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
Caller ID Callback
Play System Prompt after
Personal Greeting*1
Use Call Waiting on Busy*1
Message Cancel for Live
Call Screening*1
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
257
2.2.1 System Manager Features
Parameters
Intercom Paging Group*1
Steps
1.
1
to change the paging group.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2. Enter the group number (1–33).
3.
2 to accept.
Maximum Number of Caller
IDs for Caller Name
Announcement*1
1.
1
to change the current setting.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2. Enter the number of announcements that can be programmed by
subscribers (1–30/0: None).
3.
2 to accept.
Mailbox Capacity Warning
1.
1
to change the current setting.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to the next parameter.
2. Enter the warning threshold (1–60 min or 0: None).
3.
2 to accept.
Personal Greeting for Caller
ID*1
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
Caller ID Screen*1
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
for Normal Mode.
2
for Simplified Mode.
3
to disable.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
Call Transfer to Outside*1
Subscriber Tutorial*1
Notify of Transfer
Directory Listing*1
Auto Receipt
Autoplay New Message
First Playback Urgent
Messages
258
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
2.2.1 System Manager Features
Parameters
*1
Steps
Announce Message
Transferred Information
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
Caller ID Announcement
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
Announce Option Menu
After Erasing Messages
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
New Message Length
Announcement
1.
1
to change the current setting (enable or disable).
2.
2
to accept.
Not available for COS No. 65 (Message Manager) and COS No. 66 (System Manager)
Remote Time Service Mode Setting
You can set the time service mode from an outside telephone even when you are away from the office.
To set the time service mode
1. Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
4
3. Enter the tenant number and
#
.
4.
1 to change.
5. Select the desired Time Service mode entry.
1
to set Day mode.
2
to set Night mode.
3
to set Lunch mode.
4
to set Break mode.
Changing the Company Greeting and Incoming Call Service Setting
When the Unified Messaging system answers calls, it greets the callers with a Company Greeting and then
activates an Incoming Call Service. The System Manager or System Administrator can choose:
– The appropriate company greeting for each time mode (Day, Night, Lunch, and Break) of each call service.
The default company greeting is Company Greeting 1. If the Company Greeting 1 is not recorded, nothing
will not be played.
– The desired Incoming Call Service for each time mode of each call service. The default service is Custom
Service 1 for Day/Lunch/Break mode, and Custom Service 2 for Night mode. If the Custom Service is not
recorded, Automated Attendant service will be played.
– The assignment of the Service Group for each Unified Messaging extension number/CO line.
•
If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
System Manager cannot change the Company Greeting and Incoming Call Service Setting.
The system will announce, "Sorry, this function is not available".
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
259
2.2.1 System Manager Features
To change the service group setting
1. Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
5
3
3.
2 to change the Service Group setting.
4. Enter the Service Group Number (1–64).
5. Select the desired Time Service period entry.
6.
7.
1
for Day Time service.
2
for Night Time service.
3
for Lunch Time service.
4
for Break Time service.
1
to change the Company Greeting.
2
to change the Incoming Call Service, then go to step 10.
1
to change the setting.
2
to accept.
8. Select the desired setting entry.
1
to change a Company Greeting number.
2
to set the System Greeting, then go to step 13.
3
to disable, then go to step 13.
9. Enter a Company Greeting number (1–32), then go to step 13.
10. 1 to change the setting.
2
to accept.
11. Select the desired setting entry.
1
to set Voice Mail Service, then go to step 13.
2
to set Automated Attendant Service, then go to step 13.
3
to set Custom Service.
4
to set Interview Service.
6
to set Transfer to Mailbox.
12. Enter the Custom Service number (1–200), or the Mailbox number.
13. 2 to accept.
To change the service group assignment
1. Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
5
3
3.
1 to change the Service Group Assignment.
4. Enter the Unified Messaging extension number.
5.
1 to change the service group, then go to step 6.
2
to accept.
6. Enter the Service Group Number (1–64).
7.
2 to accept.
260
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
2.2.1 System Manager Features
Broadcasting Messages
The System Manager can deliver a message to multiple subscribers with one operation. Messages can be
sent to all subscribers (Broadcasting Message feature) or to specified subscribers only. When delivering a
message to specified subscribers, the System Manager can receive verification when the recipients listen to
the message.
•
The System Manager can set the date and time when a message is delivered. The date can
be set up to one month in advance.
To deliver messages to all mailboxes (Broadcasting Messages)
The Broadcasting Messages feature allows the System Manager to deliver a message to multiple subscribers
with one operation. Broadcast messages have priority over other regular or urgent messages, but otherwise
are treated like regular messages. This feature is useful when informing subscribers about the current system
status such as remaining capacity, requesting that unnecessary messages be erased, etc.
1. Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
2
3.
1
to record a broadcast message.
4.
1
to end recording.
5.
2
to accept.
To deliver messages to specified mailboxes
Use this feature to deliver the same message to one or more subscribers by specifying their mailbox numbers.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
261
2.2.1 System Manager Features
1. Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
2
2
3. Enter the mailbox number of the intended recipient.
• Enter by name by pressing #
1 first. Use a Mailbox Group by specifying its number.
4.
2
to accept.
5.
1
to record a message.
•
6.
Enter
2 to add mailbox numbers. Enter
to cancel message transfer.
1 to end recording.
7.
2
8.
1
•
to review the mailing list. Enter
to accept.
to specify the delivery time.
1
Enter
1
2
to send the message immediately, then go to step 13.
9. Enter the desired delivery time, then
10.
3
1
for AM.
2
for PM.
#
.
•
This option may not be available if the system is programmed to use 24-hour time.
11. Enter the day of the month for delivery, then # .
Example:
• If today is February 16 and you enter 1
7
# , the message will be delivered
tomorrow.
• If today is February 16 and you enter 5
# , the message will be delivered on March
5.
12. 2 to accept.
13.
14.
1
to make the message urgent.
2
to continue.
1
to make the message private.
2
to continue.
Changing the System Manager’s Password
The System Manager must enter the System Manager password in order to log in before performing any
System Manager tasks. In order to ensure system security, we recommend selecting a long (max. 16 digits)
password that cannot be easily guessed.
•
262
If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
System Manager cannot change the System Manager password. The system will announce,
"Sorry, this function is not available".
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
2.2.1 System Manager Features
To change the System Manager’s password
1. Log in to the System Manager’s mailbox.
2.
3
3.
1
to change the mailbox password.
2
to accept the current setting.
4. Enter the desired password, then
5.
2
#
.
to accept.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
263
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
The Message Manager can maintain the general delivery mailbox, change notification settings, record/delete
prompts, etc.
–
Logging in to the Message Manager’s Mailbox
–
Managing the General Delivery Mailbox
Setting Up Message Waiting Notification
–
–
Customizing the Message Manager’s Mailbox
–
Recording Messages
–
Remote Call Forwarding Set
–
Setting the Timed Reminder
Day/Night Recording Menu
–
–
Recording an Emergency Greeting
–
List of Prompts for VM and AA Service
Logging in to the Message Manager’s Mailbox
The procedures described in this section require the Message Manager to use a telephone, however, many
of these procedures can also be performed using a PC with Web Maintenance Console. For more information,
consult your dealer.
In order to perform these procedures with a telephone, the Message Manager must log in before performing
any Message Manager tasks. To log in as the Message Manager, 3 items of information must be known: the
UM group’s floating extension number to access the Unified Messaging system, the Message Manager’s
mailbox number, and the Message Manager’s mailbox password.
– The Message Manager’s mailbox number is 998 (default) depending on the mailbox number length
specified in system programming.
– The Message Manager’s password can be assigned by the System Administrator using Web Maintenance
Console or by the Message Manager using his or her extension telephone (refer to "
Customizing the
Message Manager’s Mailbox").
•
•
•
•
•
Before the Message Manager can perform Message Management (recording Custom
Service Menus, messages, etc.), "Message Manager Access from Telephone" must be
enabled and "Password for Message Manager (Up to 16 numeric digits)" must be set by the
System Administrator using Web Maintenance Console.
After logging in, the system will announce the number of total messages, the number of new
messages, or the length of new messages. These announcements depend on the mailbox
settings and COS settings for the Message Manager.
If there are new messages in the mailbox, the messages will be played automatically. The
Message Manager can listen to them continuously without listening to the system prompts.
This feature is only available when "Autoplay New Message" is activated for the Message
Manager’s COS.
For more information on logging in, refer to "
Logging in to Your Mailbox".
Manager Service switching
You can switch mailboxes simply by pressing ## from the subscriber service menu, in the
following order:
Subscriber service
264
Operating Manual
Message Manager service
System Manager service
Document Version 2014-08
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
•
For KX-UT series SIP phone users:
When using the MESSAGE button, please press the MESSAGE button before going off-hook.
Manual log-in
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
OR
#
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Message Manager’s
mailbox no.
6
OR
Off-hook.
Enter #6.
UM group’s floating
extension no.
Enter and Message Manager’s
mailbox number (default: 998).
Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail
Transfer, or enter UM group’s
floating extension number.
Message Manager password
Enter Message
Manager’s Mailbox.
#
Enter Message Manager password and #.
Automatic log-in
PT/SLT/PS/SIP Extn.
OR
(Voice Mail
Transfer)
Off-hook.
OR
Message Manager password
#
Enter Message
Manager’s Mailbox.
Enter Message Manager password and #.
UM group’s floating
extension no.
Press MESSAGE or Voice Mail
Transfer, or enter UM group’s
floating extension number.
•
This feature may be disabled by the System Administrator for your mailbox.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
265
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
Remote automatic log-in
From Outside Telephone
Call the Unified Messaging system
from the preprogrammed
outside telephone number
(assigned as a Caller ID number).
Message Manager password
#
Enter Message
Manager’s Mailbox.
Enter Message Manager
password and #.
CAUTION
•
•
•
It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers be used for maximum
protection against unauthorized access.
To avoid unauthorized access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes known
to others, the PBX may be misused.
Change the password periodically.
Notice
•
When disabling the password requirement, ensure that an unauthorized third-party is not
allowed access to your extension.
Managing the General Delivery Mailbox
One of the Message Manager’s functions is to check the General Delivery Mailbox for messages and transfer
them to the appropriate mailbox or mailboxes (Mailbox Groups may be used). This can be done at any time
using the telephone.
To listen to messages
The Message Manager can monitor the status of the General Delivery Mailbox through his or her mailbox. He
or she can listen to the messages stored in the General Delivery Mailbox and, if necessary, transfer them to
their intended recipients.
266
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
1 to receive the message.
3. Enter the desired number.
1
to listen to new messages.
2
to listen to old messages.
3
to listen to deleted messages.
4. The system plays each message, identifying the sender and indicating when the message was
recorded.
1 to repeat this message.
1
•
to replay the previous message.
1
2
to play the next message.
3
to delete this new/old message or recover this deleted message.
4
to reply to this new/old message.
5
to transfer this new/old message.
6
to listen to the message envelope.
System programming determines if the message envelope is played before each message,
after each message, or only when you press
6 .
7
to rewind a voice message during playback.
8
to pause or restart the message during playback.
8
4
to increase playback volume during playback.
8
5
to set a Bookmark for the voice message during voice message playback.
8
6
to start playback at the Bookmark for the voice message.
9
to fast-forward during playback.
#
to save as new (when the new message is listened).
0
to listen to the entire menu.
To transfer messages
Messages left in the General Delivery Mailbox should be transferred to their intended recipients on a regular
basis. The Message Manager can add his or her own voice comments when necessary. When a message is
transferred, the original message is not deleted from the General Delivery Mailbox; it must be deleted manually.
1. Start with step 1–4 in "To listen to messages" above.
5
while listening to the message to transfer.
2. Enter the destination mailbox number.
3.
2 to accept.
4.
2
•
to record a comment.
Enter
1
to transfer messages without comment. Enter
Enter
4
to review the Mailing List.
5.
1
to end recording.
6.
2
to accept.
Document Version 2014-08
3
to add a mailbox number.
Operating Manual
267
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
Setting Up Message Waiting Notification
The Unified Messaging system can notify the Message Manager when unplayed messages are waiting in his
or her mailbox by turning on the message waiting lamp and/or calling an external device (i.e., telephone).
The Unified Messaging system can also send notification via e-mail if the System Administrator has enabled
this feature.
To set notification by Message Waiting Lamp
The system lights the message waiting lamp on the Message Manager’s extension when a new message is
recorded in the Message Manager’s mailbox.
•
•
Extensions assigned as operators can be called by dialing "0 (default)". However, when
setting this feature the extension number (not "0 [default]") must be specified. For more
information, consult your System Administrator.
When a 6-line display PT is used, the number of new (unplayed) messages will be displayed
while the message waiting lamp is lit. If the telephone has a Message button, the Message
light will also turn on when you receive a new message.
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
2
3.
1
to change the Message Waiting Lamp Notification Status.
4.
1
to change.
2
to accept.
Setting Notification by External Device
The system calls the preprogrammed telephone number when a new message is recorded in the Message
Manager’s mailbox. Set the following parameters as needed.
To assign notification numbers
A maximum of 3 telephone numbers can be set for message notification. It is also possible to have the caller
select whether or not he or she wishes to enter a callback number.
268
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
2
3.
3 to assign a telephone number.
4. Enter the desired number.
1
to change the first telephone number.
2
to change the second telephone number.
3
to change the third telephone number.
5.
1 to accept.
6. Dial the telephone number.
7.
2 to accept.
8.
1
to change the telephone number.
2
to accept.
3
to review.
4
to add more digits.
5
to insert a pause.
6
to insert a wait for dial tone.
To set device status
For each device, the notification is enabled or disabled according to a preset schedule. The Message Manager
can enable a device according to a schedule. However, the System Administrator must first assign a
destination number to the desired device.
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
2
2
3. Enter the device number (1–6).
• Device number 4, 5, or 6 is used to specify a device number that is "Device No. 1, 2, or 3" for
"E-mail/Text Message Device" in Web Maintenance Console.
If a telephone number has not been assigned to the selected device number 1, 2, or 3, you
cannot set the device status. Refer to "To assign notification numbers" to assign a telephone
number.
4. Select the desired message type.
1 to notify all messages.
•
2
to notify urgent messages.
5. Select when the device will be used for message notification.
1 for schedule (a notification is sent each time a message is received, but only during the
times programmed by the System Administrator).
2 for continuously.
3
for disable (notifications are not sent).
Customizing the Message Manager’s Mailbox
The Message Manager can customize the Message Manager’s mailbox by changing the following parameters.
– The Message Manager’s mailbox password
– The extension numbers of Operator 1, 2, and 3
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
269
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
– Telephone numbers 1 and 2 used for call forwarding destinations when Remote Call Forwarding is set to
a CO line
•
•
•
•
270
If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
Message Manager cannot customize his or her mailbox. The system will announce, "Sorry,
this function is not available".
Message Manager’s Password:
The Message Manager must enter the Message Manager password in order to log in before performing
any Message Manager tasks. In order to ensure system security, we recommend selecting a long (max.
16 digits) password that cannot be easily guessed.
Operator’s Extensions:
When callers require help, they can dial the operator call number to be transferred to an operator. A
maximum of 3 operators can be programmed for each time mode; these operators are not necessarily the
same as the operator extensions programmed for the PBX. The extension assigned as Operator 1 for the
day mode is designated as the Message Manager.
Telephone Numbers 1 and 2 for Remote Call Forward to Outside:
After programming/changing the telephone numbers used for Remote Call Forward to Outside, the
Remote Call Forwarding
Message Manager must reset the remote call forwarding setting (refer to "
Set"), even if it was already enabled. Telephone numbers set here will not be effective until remote call
forwarding is reset. If you do not reset remote call forwarding, calls will be forwarded to the old telephone
numbers.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
To customize the message manager’s mailbox
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
3
3.
1
to change the password.
2
to accept.
4. Enter the password, then
.
#
5.
2 to accept.
6. Enter the desired number.
1
to change or assign the operator’s extension.
2
to accept.
3
to delete, then go to step 9.
• Operator 1’s extension number cannot be deleted.
7. Dial the extension number.
8.
2 to accept.
9. Repeat steps 6–8 to assign or to delete the extension number for the Day, Night, Lunch and Break
Modes for each operator.
10. Enter the desired number.
1
to change or assign the telephone number 1 setting.
2
to accept the current setting, then go to step 13.
11. Dial the telephone number ( 0 – 9 ,
[max. 32 digits]).
• Make sure you begin the telephone number with a CO line access number (to seize a CO
line).
12. 2 to accept.
13. Enter the desired number.
1
to change or assign the telephone number 2 setting.
2
to accept the current setting.
14. Dial the telephone number (
15.
2
0
–
9
,
[max. 32 digits]).
to accept.
Recording Messages
The Message Manager is responsible for recording various system messages (menus, voice labels, system
prompts, and system caller names) and is also responsible for maintaining the following:
• Company Greetings:
A maximum of 32 company greetings for business/non-business and lunch/break hours as well as holidays
can be selected, recorded, or deleted as necessary.
• Company Name
• Custom Service Menus:
A maximum of 200 custom service menus can be recorded. These menus guide callers to the services
they require without the need for a human operator.
• Voice Labels:
A maximum of 20 Mailbox Groups can be created by the System Administrator. Each list can have a voice
label.
• System Prompts:
The Message Manager can change system prompts by recording new prompts and restoring them.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
271
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
•
Multilingual Selection Menu:
With this menu, callers can select the language they prefer for voice guidance. For example, the Message
Manager can record a menu that announces:
"For English, press 7."
"For French, press 8."
The System Caller Names:
A maximum of 200 Caller ID numbers can be registered by the System Administrator. The Message
Manager is responsible for recording a name for each Caller ID number.
On Hold Announcement Menu:
With this menu, callers in a queue can listen to the announcement or music while they are on hold.
•
•
•
If the Unified Messaging system is being programmed via Web Maintenance Console, the
Message Manager cannot record any messages. The system will announce, "Sorry, this
function is not available".
To record menus and voice labels
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
4 to record messages.
3. Enter the desired number to record.
1
for Company Greetings.
2
for Company Name.
3
for Custom Service Menus.
4
for Voice Labels for Mailbox Groups.
5
for System Prompts.
6
for Multilingual Selection Menu.
7
for System Caller Names.
8
for On Hold Announcement Menu.
4. For the item selected in step 3, follow these steps:
a. For Company Greetings: Enter the Company Greeting Number (1–32).
b. For the Company Name: Go to step 5.
c. For Custom Service Menus: Enter a Custom Service Number (1–200).
• Enter 0 to record the Custom Service exit prompt.
d. For Voice Labels: Enter the number of the Mailbox Group to be labeled. (The System
Administrator assigns list numbers.)
e. For the Multilingual Selection Menu: Go to step 5.
f. For the On Hold Announcement Menu: Go to step 5.
5.
1
•
6.
7.
to change the message.
If a message has not yet been recorded, go to step 7.
1 to record a message.
2
to erase the current message, then go to step 3 or 4.
1
to end recording.
8.
2 to accept.
9. Repeat steps 4–8 to record other Company Greetings, Custom Service Menus, and/or Voice
Labels.
272
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
To record system prompts
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
4
5 to record messages.
3. Enter the system prompt number you want to change.
4. To change specific prompts, go to step 5.
To change all prompts one after another without reviewing the current recording, go to step 6.
5. To change specific prompts:
a.
1
b. Enter the prompt number you want to change (refer to "
List of Prompts for VM and AA
Service").
c. The system plays the prompt number and its prompt. If a prompt has not yet been recorded,
the system plays the system prompt. If a prompt is turned off, "The prompt is now turned
off" will play before the prompt.
d.
1 to record.
e.
1
to end recording.
f.
2 to accept.
g. Repeat steps 5b to 5f to record other prompts.
6. To change all prompts one after another.
a.
2
b. Enter the prompt number you want to change.
c.
1 to change.
d.
1
to end recording.
e.
2 to accept.
f. The system plays the next prompt number.
g. Repeat steps 6c to 6f to record other prompts.
•
It is possible to restore the original system prompts. Consult your System Administrator about
this feature.
To record system caller names
Before recording System Caller Names, the associated telephone numbers must first be programmed using
Web Maintenance Console. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
273
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
4
3.
7 to modify system caller names.
4. Enter the Caller ID List Number (1–200).
• Guidance is "Caller Name Announcement number".
to go to step 3.
• Enter
5.
•
•
6.
to change the name.
1
If a name has not yet been recorded for this Caller ID number, go to step 6.
Enter
2 to accept or
3 to erase the current name, then go to step 4.
to end recording.
1
7.
2 to accept.
8. Repeat steps 4–7 to record names for other Caller ID List numbers.
Remote Call Forwarding Set
The Message Manager can program his or her extension from a remote location to forward various types of
calls to the desired extension or an outside telephone. There are 6 forwarding settings available:
• FWD All:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number.
• FWD Busy:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when the line is busy.
• FWD No Answer:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when there is no answer.
• FWD Busy or No Answer:
Forwards all incoming calls to a specified extension number when the line is busy or there is no answer.
• FWD to Outside:
Forwards all incoming calls to telephone number 1 or 2 (preprogrammed in the Mailbox Setting), or to any
other telephone number.
• FWD Cancel:
Cancels the forwarding setting.
•
•
•
274
This feature is not available when the Message Manager’s extension (assigned for Operator
1 in the Day Mode) is "default". In this case, it should be changed to the operator’s extension
number. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
In order to use the FWD to Outside option, the ability to forward calls to CO lines must be
enabled through system programming.
Before setting Remote Call Forwarding to Outside, you should first store up to 2 destination
Customizing the Message Manager’s Mailbox").
telephone numbers (refer to "
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
To assign Remote Call Forwarding set
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
5
3. Select the desired forwarding setting.
1
for FWD All.
2
for FWD Busy.
3
for FWD No Answer.
4
for FWD Busy or No Answer.
5
for FWD to Outside, then go to step 6.
6
for FWD Cancel, then go to step 9.
4. Enter the extension number.
5.
2 to accept the extension number, then go to step 10.
•
Enter
1
to change the extension number, then go to step 4.
6. Enter the desired number.
1
for telephone number 1, then go to step 8.
2
for telephone number 2, then go to step 8.
3
for another telephone number.
•
Before you can forward your calls to telephone number 1 or 2, you should first store the
telephone numbers you plan on using with this feature.
). (max. 32 digits)
7. Enter the telephone number ( 0 – 9 ,
•
8.
•
Make sure you begin the telephone number with a CO line access number (to seize a CO
line).
2 to accept, then go to step 10.
Enter
1
to change the telephone number, then go to step 6.
9.
2 to accept.
10. The new settings are transmitted to the system. If the setting has been completed properly, you
will hear: "Call forwarding accepted" or "Call forwarding is canceled" as appropriate.
•
If the system announces, "Call forwarding not accepted. Please check the destination
number.", the forwarding setting has not been completed properly, possibly because a
nonexistent extension number has been entered as the destination. For more information,
consult your System Administrator.
Setting the Timed Reminder
The Message Manager can set or cancel the Timed Reminder. The telephone will ring at the set time according
to the set mode (Once/Daily).
•
•
This feature is not available for PSs.
This feature is not available when the Message Manager’s extension (assigned for Operator
1 in the Day Mode) is "default". In this case, it should be changed to the operator’s extension
number. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
275
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
To set/cancel
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
6
3. Enter the desired number.
1
to change the setting.
2
to accept, then go on-hook to finish.
3
to cancel (turn off), then go on-hook to finish.
4. Enter the desired time, then
5. Enter the desired number.*
1
for AM.
2
for PM.
#
.
6. Enter the desired number.
7.
1
to set once.
2
to set daily.
2
to accept.
•
* This option may not be available if the system is programmed to use 24-hour time.
The time format (12 or 24 hour) is determined by the "Position of "AM/PM" in Time Stamp"
setting. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
Day/Night Recording Menu
A Day and Night Menu can be recorded as "Custom Service 1–2" directly from the top menu.
To record
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
7 for Custom Service 1 Menu (Day).
3.
8
for Custom Service 2 Menu (Night).
1
to change the message.
4.
1 to record a message.
5. Record the message.
6.
1 to end recording.
7.
276
to accept.
2
•
This feature is not available when the "Quick Menu and Greeting Recording" setting is
disabled for the Message Manager’s mailbox. For more information, consult your System
Administrator.
•
Direct Service Access
If Direct Service Access is set in Mailbox Settings, you can access this feature directly by
dialing a specific Unified Messaging extension number from your extension. Automatic login
must be enabled to use Direct Service Access (refer to "Automatic log-in"). For details about
these Unified Messaging extension numbers, consult your System Administrator.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
Recording an Emergency Greeting
An emergency greeting can be recorded as "Company Greeting 1" directly from the top menu. The emergency
greeting can be used in times such as when the company must be closed due to bad weather.
To record
1. Log in to the Message Manager’s mailbox.
2.
9
3.
to change the message.
1
4.
1 to record a message.
5. Record the greeting.
6.
1 to end recording.
7.
to accept.
2
•
This feature is not available when the "Quick Menu and Greeting Recording" setting is
disabled for the Message Manager’s mailbox. For more information, consult your System
Administrator.
•
Direct Service Access
If Direct Service Access is set in Mailbox Settings, you can access this feature directly by
dialing a specific Unified Messaging extension number from your extension. Automatic login
must be enabled to use Direct Service Access (refer to "Automatic log-in"). For details about
these Unified Messaging extension numbers, consult your System Administrator.
List of Prompts for VM and AA Service
There are over 1000 system prompts in the Unified Messaging system. These prompts can be customized by
re-recording them to change their content, or can be recorded in various languages. The maximum length of
a prompt is fixed at 6 minutes.
When recording prompts in other languages, most often it is not necessary to record all prompts contained in
the Unified Messaging system; recording over 1000 system prompts is a big undertaking. When a caller is
connected to AA service or VM service, most likely he or she will only hear a small selection of the following
prompts. Therefore, it is necessary only to record (or modify) the prompts that callers will hear.
Please change prompts to suit the application. For example, prompt no. 1211 could be re-recorded to
announce, "Thank you for calling ABCD Travel", instead of "Welcome to the Unified Messaging System".
It is possible to record the prompts you wish to modify on your computer in .wav format and upload them to
the Unified Messaging system. For more information, consult your System Administrator.
Prompts Common to VM and AA Services
Prompt No.
Modifiable Prompts
363
Good afternoon
364
Good evening
365
Good morning
1211
Welcome to the Unified Messaging System
973
To enter by name, press the hash sign and 1
974
To enter by name, press the pound sign and 1
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
277
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
Prompt No.
Modifiable Prompts
221
Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the person’s last name
326
For 'Q', press 7
327
For 'Z', press 9
693
Sorry, there are no more matching names
701
Sorry, this name cannot be found
392
Incorrect entry
842
To call the operator, press 0
90
Calling the operator
599
Please wait a moment
1201
Welcome to the general delivery mailbox
596
Please leave a message at the tone
966
To end recording, hang up or press 1 for more features
1026
To pause and restart recording, press 2
1060
To review, press 1
818
To accept, press 2
979
To erase and try again, press 3
829
To add, press 4
978
To erase and exit, press
1018
To make this message private, press 1
558
Otherwise, press 2
733
Thank you for calling
VM Prompts
Prompt No.
Modifiable Prompts
593
Please enter your party’s mailbox number
219
Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the person’s first name
220
Enter the first 3 or 4 letters of the person’s first or last name
1019
To make this message urgent, press 1
AA Prompts
Prompt No.
278
Modifiable Prompts
592
Please enter your party’s extension
1224
You have a call
690
Sorry, no one is available to answer the call
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
Prompt No.
Modifiable Prompts
1006
To leave a message, press 1
971
To enter another extension, press
698
Sorry, this line is busy
388
If you would like to hold, press 1
847
To cancel holding, press 2 now. Otherwise, I’ll try your party again.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
279
2.2.2 Message Manager Features
280
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
Section 3
Customizing Your Phone & System
This section shows you how to customize your
individual telephone or PBX according to your needs.
Find the desired setting and program as necessary.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
281
3.1.2 Personal Programming
3.1 Personal Programming
3.1.1 Programming Information
You can customize your telephone features. For example, you can change the initial settings or button features
according to your needs.
Available Extension
Any extension in the PBX
Required Telephone
A Panasonic Proprietary Telephone (PT), Portable Station (PS)
Conditions
Programming extensions must be idle, on-hook and holding no calls.
3.1.2 Personal Programming
You can program features using the programming mode for a PT or PS.
•
•
•
To exit at any time, lift the handset.
To enter the programming mode when using a PS, refer to the documentation for your PS.
For KX-UT series SIP phone users: You cannot program the following features using a
KX-UT series SIP phone. These features are programmed via Web Maintenance Console.
For more information, consult your System Administrator.
•
If you change your desk and extension, refer to "1.3.76 Walking Extension".
Setting Features
The default settings are shown in bold letters. For later reference, place a check mark in the boxes below to
indicate your customized setting.
To enter the programming mode
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
282
Operating Manual
programming
input
Follow
programming
input.
To program
OR
selection &
parameter
To exit
OR
OR
PAUSE
Press ENTER Follow Selection Press ENTER Press PROGRAM
or STORE.
& Parameter.
or STORE.
or PAUSE.
Document Version 2014-08
3.1.2 Personal Programming
Item
Programming
Input
Your extension information
0
Display Contrast
Selection*1
Preferred display contrast
level from the 4 levels
available
Display Language
Selection
Which display language do
you prefer?
Display Switching Mode
Would you like the call
duration to be shown
automatically on the display
when answering an outside
call?
Display Backlight
Selection*1*2
Would you like to turn on the
display backlight of the
telephone?
Self Labeling Display
Contrast
Preferred display contrast
level from the 4 levels
available for Self Labeling
(KX-NT366/KX-NT553/
KX-NT556 only)
Document Version 2014-08
0
0
0
0
0
The display shows your PT or PS’s extension number.
<Example>
Ext 101
1
Light
2
Little Light
3
Little Dark
4
Dark
1
English
2
2nd Language
3
3rd Language
4
4th Language
5
5th Language
1
2
0
Selection & Parameter
0
No—Manual (The display
keeps showing all of the outside
caller’s information unless you
change it to the call duration
manually.)
1
Yes—Automatic (The first
line of the display will change to
the call duration automatically
when you answer an outside
call.)
3
4
0
Yes—Automatic
1
Yes—always On
2
No—always Off
1
Light
2
Little Light
3
Little Dark
4
Dark
5
Operating Manual
283
3.1.2 Personal Programming
Item
Hot Line
Would you like to dial a
preset number simply by
going off-hook?
Calling Line Identification
Restriction (CLIR)
Should you prevent your
number being displayed on
the called party’s
telephone?
Calling/Connected Line
Identification
Presentation (CLIP/
COLP)
Which number should be
displayed on the called
party’s telephone?
Preferred Line
Assignment—Outgoing
Which do you prefer to
seize when you go off-hook
to make calls?
Programming
Input
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
Selection & Parameter
desired no. (max. 32 digits)
Available characters: 0–9, , #, P (Pause), [, ]
0
Do not use
1
Use
0
No—Allows your number to
be displayed
1
Yes—Prevent your number
being displayed
0
Caller ID assigned to your
extension
1
Caller ID assigned on the CO line
being used
3
4
9
0
No line
1
An idle CO line
2 +
The CO line no.
assigned to the
flexible button
or
A CO/ICD Group button
(CO)
3
Intercom (On a PDN
extension, an idle PDN button is
selected when going off-hook.)
or
(PDN)
284
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
3.1.2 Personal Programming
Item
Programming
Input
Selection & Parameter
No line
0
The longest ringing line
(when multiple calls arrive)
1
Preferred Line
Assignment—Incoming
Which line do you prefer to
answer when you go
off-hook?
2
0
2 +
The CO line no.
assigned to the
flexible button
or
A CO/ICD Group button
(CO)
3
(PDN)
0
Alternate
Receiving—Ring/Voice*1
How do you prefer to
receive an intercom call?
Paralleled Telephone*1
Should the single line
telephone in parallel ring?
Forced Answerback
Selection*1
Do you prefer to answer a
call without going off-hook
regardless of the AUTO
ANS button status?
Live Call Screening Mode
Set*1
Which service do you prefer
when a calling party is
recording a message in
your mailbox?
LCS Mode Set (After
Answering)
Would you like to keep
recording after answering
the call in the LCS mode?
Document Version 2014-08
2
2
2
2
2
1
A PDN button
Ringing (Tone Call)
1
Directly—The party’s voice is
heard without ringing.
2
Ring only—Prohibiting the
caller switching to the voice mode.
0
No—The telephone will not
ring.
1
Yes—The telephone will
ring.
2
0
No—Disable
1
Yes—Enable
3
0
You can monitor the message
through the telephone speaker.
(Hands-free mode)
1
Only an alarm tone is heard.
(Private mode)
5
0
No—Stop recording
1
Yes—Keep recording
6
Operating Manual
285
3.1.2 Personal Programming
Item
Automatic Call Waiting*3
Would you prefer to
automatically hear a call
waiting tone when you
receive a call while already
on the phone?
Manual Call Waiting
How would you prefer to
receive call waiting
notifications for intercom
calls?
Call Waiting Tone Type
Selection
Which type of call waiting
tone do you prefer?
Absent Message
Would you like to show a
message on the caller’s
telephone display?
Programming
Input
3
3
3
4
Selection & Parameter
0
No—OFF
1
Yes—ON
0
No call (OFF)
1
Tone (BSS)
0
1
2
Voice announcement through
the built-in speaker (OHCA)*4
3
Voice announcement through
the handset (Whisper OHCA)*5
0
Tone 1
1
Tone 2
0
No—Off
2
0
message no. (1–8)
9
Personal Absent
Message
Creating your personal
message
286
Operating Manual
4
1
Yes—Shows the selected
message.
Yes—Shows your personal
message.
message (max. 16 characters)
Document Version 2014-08
3.1.2 Personal Programming
Item
Programming
Input
5
Call Forwarding (FWD)/
Do Not Disturb (DND)
To forward or refuse some
or all of your incoming calls
0
Selection & Parameter
0
Off
1
Do Not Disturb (DND)
+ desired
no.
(max. 32 digits)
All—Forward all calls
2
/
(for both calls)
5
1
(for outside calls)
5
2
(for intercom
calls)
+ desired
no.
(max. 32 digits)
Busy—Forwarded when your
extension is busy.
+ desired
no.
(max. 32 digits)
No Answer—Forwarded when
you do not answer.
+ desired
no.
(max. 32 digits)
Busy/No Answer—Forwarded
when you do not answer or when
your extension is busy.
3
4
5
FWD N/A Timer
To set the timer for "No
Answer" and "Busy/No
Answer"
5
Call Pickup Deny
Should you prohibit other
people from picking up your
calls?
6
Headset Operation*1
Do you use the headset?
6
Executive Busy Override
Deny
Do you prohibit other
people from joining your
conversation?
6
Paging Deny*1
Would you like to prohibit
paging announcements?
6
Key Pad Tone Set*1
Do you prefer to hear the
key pad tone?
Document Version 2014-08
6
(0–120) seconds
(Default: 15 seconds)
3
0
No—Allow
1
Yes—Deny
0
No—Headset off
1
Yes—Headset on
0
No—Allow
1
Yes—Deny
0
No—Allow
1
Yes—Deny
0
No—Off
1
Yes—On
0
1
2
3
4
Operating Manual
287
3.1.2 Personal Programming
Item
Background Music
(BGM)*1
Do you want background
music through your
telephone speaker while
on-hook?
Bluetooth Registration*6
To register a Bluetooth
wireless headset on your
extension*7
Bluetooth Removal*6
To cancel the registration of
a Bluetooth wireless
headset on your extension*7
Extension PIN (Personal
Identification Number)
To set your extension PIN
or change the stored
extension PIN
Extension Dial Lock
To prevent other people
from using your telephone
Display Lock*1
To prevent other people
from seeing your personal
speed dialing directory, call
log, SVM log, and from
playing back the voice
messages in your message
box
288
Operating Manual
Programming
Input
Selection & Parameter
No—Off
0
6
5
6
6
Pass key (max. 16 digits)
6
7
Confirm that the ID of your Bluetooth wireless headset is
displayed.
9
0
1
+ BGM no.
(1 digit)
extension PIN
(max. 10 digits) +
ENTER/STORE +
same extension
PIN
To set an extension PIN
stored extension
PIN +
new extension PIN
(max. 10 digits) +
ENTER/STORE +
same extension
PIN
To change a stored extension PIN
extension PIN
(max. 10 digits) +
0
9
9
1
2
Yes—On
extension PIN
(max. 10 digits)
+
1
To unlock
To lock
extension PIN
(max. 10 digits) +
0
To unlock
extension PIN
(max. 10 digits) +
1
To lock
Document Version 2014-08
3.1.2 Personal Programming
Item
One-touch Dialing
Assignment Mode
Selection
Do you prefer to set the
One-touch dialing only?
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
Programming
Input
Selection & Parameter
0
No—Normal (Any Flexible
buttons can be modified.)
1
Yes—Only One-touch dialing
buttons can be modified.
However, to modify them, there is
no need to enter "2" before the
number.
#
Not available for a PS.
Only available for the KX-T7633/KX-T7636/IP-PTs/KX-DT300 series (except KX-DT333)/KX-DT543/KX-DT546 telephones.
This setting applies to both outside and intercom calls. For intercom calls, this feature must be enabled through system programming.
Only available for certain digital proprietary telephones.
Only available for IP-PTs and certain digital proprietary telephones.
Only available for KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321) /KX-NT560/KX-DT343/KX-DT346 telephones.
Registering and canceling a Bluetooth wireless headset may take time. Please avoid any interruption during that time by, for example,
going off-hook.
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers your
password (extension PIN).
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping your PIN secret.
b. Selecting a complex, random PIN that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing your PIN regularly.
•
After the program number is entered, the program title is displayed.
The programming screen can be changed with the Navigator Key (Up or Down).
•
You can select the parameter with the Navigator Key (Up or Down) instead of entering a
number.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
289
3.1.2 Personal Programming
To store the names and numbers in personal speed dialing
1
0
personal speed
dialing no. (location no.)
OR
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
phone no.
Enter phone number
(max. 32 digits).
Enter 10 and then press ENTER.
Or press STORE.
OR
Press ENTER
or STORE.
Enter personal speed dialing number
(location number) (2 digits).
name
*
Enter name
(max. 20 characters).
OR
Press ENTER
or STORE.
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
•
290
* To enter characters, refer to "1.3.14 Character Entry".
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
3.1.3 Programming Feature Clear
To edit the names and numbers of personal speed dialing
1
0
personal speed
dialing no. (location no.)
OR
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
Enter 10 and then press ENTER.
Or press STORE.
Enter personal speed dialing number
(location number) (2 digits).
To erase a number or character
CLEAR
Press Left or Right
to select a desired part.
Press "CLEAR".
OR
To insert a number or character
Press ENTER
or STORE.
number/character
Press Left or Right
to select a desired part.
Enter a number or
character.
It will be inserted in front
of the selected part.
3.1.3 Programming Feature Clear
You can reset the settings of the following features on your extension to the default settings with one operation.
Features
Default Setting
Display Switching Mode
Automatic
Hot Line
Off
Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)
Allow
Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
Caller ID assigned on your
extension
Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing
Intercom
Preferred Line Assignment—Incoming
The longest ringing line
Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice
Ringing (Tone Call)
Paralleled Telephone
Paired SLT will ring
Forced Answerback Selection
Disable
Live Call Screening Mode Set
Hands-free mode
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
291
3.1.3 Programming Feature Clear
Features
Default Setting
LCS Mode Set (After Answering)
Stop recording
Automatic Call Waiting
On
Manual Call Waiting—Intercom Calls
On (Tone)
Call Waiting Tone Type Selection
Tone 1
Absent Message
Off
Personal Absent Message
Cleared
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—Intercom Calls/
Outside Calls
Off
FWD N/A Timer
15 seconds
Call Pickup Deny
Allow
Headset Operation
Headset off
Executive Busy Override Deny
Allow
Paging Deny
Allow
Key Pad Tone Set
On
Background Music (BGM)
Off
Data Line Security
Off
Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR)
Allow
Log-in/Log-out
Log-in
Message Waiting
Off
Timed Reminder
Cleared
To change the above features back to their default settings
OR
OR
OR
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
•
292
OR
PAUSE
PAUSE
Enter ##.
Press ENTER
or STORE.
Press ENTER
or STORE.
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
The Call Waiting, FWD/DND and Hot Line features may not be cleared by this operation,
depending on system programming.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
You can customize the flexible buttons and/or programmable feature (PF) buttons on PTs, Add-on Key
Modules, and PSs. They can then be used to make or receive outside calls or as feature buttons.
•
•
•
To enter the programming mode when using a PS, refer to the documentation for the PS.
The buttons in the table below can only be set on certain flexible buttons, as follows:
– Flexible buttons on PTs/Add-on Key Modules/PSs: all buttons can be set.
– Flexible buttons on DSS Consoles: all buttons except CTI and Primary Directory Number
(PDN) buttons can be set.
– Programmable feature (PF) buttons: only the One-touch Dialing button can be set.
For KX-UT series SIP phone users: You cannot customize the flexible buttons with the
following method from your phone. You can customize the flexible buttons using Web
Maintenance Console. For details, refer to "Customizing the Flexible Buttons".
To enter the program mode
To program
To exit
To continue
programming
input
OR
PAUSE
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
Follow
programming
input.
Press desired
flexible button.
Button
OR
PAUSE
OR
Press ENTER
or STORE.
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
Programming Input
Loop-CO (L-CO)
Group-CO (G-CO)
#
+ CO line group no. (2 digits)
Single-CO (S-CO)
0
+ CO line no. (3 digits)
Direct Station Selection (DSS)
1
+ Extension no.*12
One-touch Dialing*1
2
*2
Incoming Call Distribution
Group (ICD Group)
3
Message
4
0
4
no.
0
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not
Disturb (DND)—Both calls
4
1
FWD/DND—Outside calls
4
2
FWD/DND—Intercom calls
4
3
Message for Another Extension
Document Version 2014-08
#
+ Desired no. (max. 32 digits)
0
+ Incoming call distribution group extension no. (+
+ delayed ringing time [0–7])*3
+ Extension no./Incoming call distribution group extension
Operating Manual
293
3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Button
294
Programming Input
Group FWD—Both calls
4
4
+ Incoming call distribution group extension no.
Group FWD—Outside calls
4
5
+ Incoming call distribution group extension no.
Group FWD—Intercom calls
4
6
+ Incoming call distribution group extension no.
Account
4
8
Conference
4
9
Terminate
5
0
External Feature Access (EFA)
5
1
Call Park
5
3
Call Park (Automatic Park Zone)
5
3
Call Log*4
5
4
Call Log for ICD Group*4
5
4
Log-in/Log-out
5
5
Log-in/Log-out of a specified
group
5
5
Log-in/Log-out for all groups
5
5
Hurry-up
5
6
Wrap-up
5
7
System Alarm*4
5
8
Time Service (Day/Night/Lunch/
Break)
5
9
Answer*4
6
0
Release*4
6
1
Toll Restriction (TRS)
6
2
Calling Line Identification
Restriction (CLIR)
6
4
Connected Line Identification
Restriction (COLR)
6
5
Headset*4
6
7
Time Service Switching Mode
(Automatic/Manual)
6
8
Operating Manual
+ Parking zone no. (2 digits)
+ Incoming call distribution group extension no.
+ Incoming call distribution group extension no
+ Incoming call distribution group extension no.
+ 0/1/2/3*5 (+
#
+ Tenant no.)
+ Toll Restriction (TRS) Level (1–7)
(+ Tenant no.)
Document Version 2014-08
3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
Button
Programming Input
Network Direct Station Selection
(NDSS)*6
6
9
CTI
7
0
Primary Directory Number
(PDN)
7
1
Secondary Directory Number
(SDN)
7
2
Check-in*4
8
0
Check-out*4
8
1
Cleaned-up*4
8
2
+ Another PBX extension no.
+ Extension no. +
#
+ delayed ringing time (0–7)*7
Two-way Record*8
9
0 + UM group’s floating extension no.*9/Voice mail floating
extension no.
Two-way Transfer*8
9
1 + UM group’s floating extension no.*9/Voice mail floating
extension no.
9
One-touch Two-way Transfer*8
Live Call Screening (LCS)*8
Voice Mail Transfer*8
Document Version 2014-08
1
+ UM group’s floating extension no.*9/Voice mail floating
extension no. +
extension no.
9
#
+ Extension no./Incoming call distribution group
2
9
4 + UM group’s floating extension no.*9/Voice mail floating
extension no.
Operating Manual
295
3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
•
" ", "#", FLASH/RECALL, PAUSE, Secret (INTERCOM) and TRANSFER can also be
stored.
If you do not want to display the stored number when making a call, press the Secret
(INTERCOM) button before and after the numbers you wish to conceal.
If you store an outside party’s number, you should first store a line access number.
If you need to enter an account code, you can enter the specified account code before the
line access number.
<Example>
*1
Secret
49
1234
Account code feature no. Account code
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
296
#
9
[ 123 4567 ]
Account code delimiter
Automatic line
access number
Phone number
For a PF button, "2" is not required to enter before the desired number.
Depending on the settings of your PBX, you may be required to enter delayed ringing time
(0: Immediate, 1: 1 ring, 2: 2 rings, 3: 3 rings, 4: 4 rings, 5: 5 rings, 6: 6 rings, 7: No ring). In
this case, you can automatically join a new ICD group by creating a button for that group.
*4
This button is not available for a PS.
*5
0: Day/Night/Lunch/Break, 1: Day/Night/Break, 2: Day/Night/Lunch, 3: Day/Night
*6
The button may not be available depending on the networking method in use or the settings
of the PBX.
*7
It is possible to set delayed ringing for each SDN button.
*8
This button is used for the integrated voice mail features.
*9
The UM group’s default floating extension number is 500.
To exit at any time, lift the handset.
For KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560 users: After customizing a flexible button,
you can set the displayed text for Self Labeling. To enter characters, refer to
"1.3.14 Character Entry".
*12
You can set a Unified Messaging port extension number as an extension number for the
DSS button.
*2
*3
You can select the parameter with the Navigator key (Up or Down) instead of entering a
number.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
<Programming Example: Customizing a CO button as a One-touch Dialing button using Secret
dialing>
[Initial Display]
OCT.27
PROG
03:13PM
INFO
RING
THU
3
Enter the programming input (
and desired phone number.
MENU
EXIT
1
PROG
PAUSE
Press
or
or
4
Press
(CO)
EXIT
5
Document Version 2014-08
9123[
CLEAR ENTER
Press
again after entering the number
you want to keep secret.
Single Line-001
EXIT CLEAR ENTER
6
9123
CLEAR ENTER
Press
in front of the number you
want to keep secret.
Program No?->
EXIT CONT NEXT
2
2 ),
Press
EXIT
9123[4567]
CLEAR ENTER
or
to store.
Operating Manual
297
3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
To specify the ringing tones for each CO, ICD Group, PDN, SDN, or INTERCOM button (DPT/
IP-PT only)
To continue
(CO)
(CO)
OR
OR
(ICD Group)
(ICD Group)
OR
OR
tone type no.
*
OR
R.Tone
Press
PROGRAM.
(PDN)
(PDN)
OR
OR
(SDN)
(SDN)
OR
OR
INTERCOM
INTERCOM
Press CO, ICD Group,
PDN, SDN, or
INTERCOM button.
Enter tone type
number.
Press ENTER or
STORE.
Press CO, ICD Group,
PDN, SDN, or
INTERCOM button.
Press
PROGRAM.
•
•
* Available tone types vary depending on the telephone you are using:
– KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321)/KX-NT500 series/KX-DT300 series (except
KX-DT321)/KX-DT500 series/KX-T7600 series: Tone types "01" to "30" (01–20: tone,
21–30: melody) are available.
– KX-NT265/KX-NT321/KX-DT321: Only tone types "01" to "08" are available.
It is possible to enter a tone type number from "09" to "30", but you will hear tone type
"01".
– Other telephones: Only tone types "01" to "08" are available.
It is possible to enter a tone type number from "09" to "30", but you will hear tone type
"02".
Only one ringing tone can be selected for all PDN buttons on your extension.
To clear the button
To continue
2
OR
OR
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
298
Operating Manual
OR
PAUSE
PAUSE
Press desired
flexible button.
Enter 2.
Press ENTER or
STORE.
Press PROGRAM
or PAUSE.
Document Version 2014-08
3.2.1 User Programming
3.2 System Programming Using Web Maintenance
Console
3.2.1 User Programming
You can edit your personal information as well as limited extension and mailbox settings using Web
Maintenance Console. (You can view menus and setting items, but you can edit only a limited number of items.)
In addition, you can download the UM IMAP Session Controller for Microsoft Outlook. For details, refer to
IMAP" in "1.6.6 Other Features".
"
–
Accessing Web Maintenance Console for the First Time
–
Logging in to Web Maintenance Console
–
Edit User Screen
–
Editing Settings in Web Maintenance Console
Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager
–
–
Logout
•
The contents and design of the software are subject to change without notice.
Accessing Web Maintenance Console for the First Time
This step is required only when accessing Web Maintenance Console for the first time.
•
•
For the IP address of the PBX, login name, and password, ask your System Administrator.
If the configuration of the Web browser or PC changes, the certificate may need to be installed
again. Once a certificate has been installed, Web Maintenance Console will be displayed
after step 2.
1. Launch your Web browser and input the IP address of the PBX followed by the Web Maintenance Console
port number into the address bar, and then press Enter.
2. If you connect to Web Maintenance Console using SSL, a security alert window is displayed. Follow the
prompts to install a security certificate. The procedure may vary according to your browser.
Logging in to Web Maintenance Console
After establishing a connection to Web Maintenance Console, the login window is displayed, and a login name
and password must be entered.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
299
3.2.1 User Programming
•
If you attempt to log in, but enter an incorrect password three times, you may not attempt to
log in again for a 5 minute period.
CAUTION
•
•
•
•
For security, change the password the first time that you program the PBX.
It is strongly recommended that a password of 16 numbers or characters be used for
maximum protection against unauthorized access.
To avoid unauthorized access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes known
to others, the PBX may be misused.
Change the password periodically.
Edit User Screen
The Edit User screen is displayed when you login to Web Maintenance Console.
On this screen, you can edit various user settings.
To finish editing, click OK.
Editing Settings in Web Maintenance Console
Changing Your User Name and Displayed Language
You can change your account’s first name, last name, and displayed language in the User Information tab of
the Edit User screen. The information entered in First Name and Last Name are displayed on your telephone.
1.
In the User Information tab, edit your First Name (max.
20 characters) and Last Name (max. 20 characters),
and select the displayed language from the Change
Language drop-down list.
2.
Click OK.
Changing Your Contact Information
You can change your extension PIN and contact information (home number, mobile number, fax number, and
e-mail address) in the Contact tab of the Edit User screen. E-mail address(es) specified in Email 1–3 in the
Contact tab are used for e-mail notifications of missed outside calls.
300
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
3.2.1 User Programming
1.
In the Contact tab, edit Extension PIN (max. 10 digits),
Fax, Phone (Home), Phone (Mobile), and Email 1–3.
Note
Click Edit to edit the extension PIN.
Entry for the extension PIN is hidden and displayed
as dots "·".
2.
Click OK.
Changing Your Mailbox Password
You can change your mailbox password in the Unified Message tab of the Edit User screen.
1.
In the Unified Message tab, click Edit for Mailbox
Password.
To change your message client password, click Edit for
Mailbox Password (Message Client).
2.
Enter a password in Enter new password, and then
re-enter it in Confirm new password.
Note
Entry for the password is hidden and displayed as
dots "·".
3.
Click OK.
Registering a Prompt to the Mailbox
You can display, play, record or delete the following prompts:
Changing or Deleting Your Subscriber (Owner) Name")
• Mailbox Owner Name (refer to "
• Personal Greetings (refer to "
Changing or Deleting Your Personal Greeting Messages")
– No Answer Greeting, Busy Signal Greeting, After Hours Greeting, Caller ID Greeting*1, Temporary
Greeting and Absent Message
• Interview Mailbox Questions*2 (refer to "
Interview Mailbox")
• Personal Caller ID Name*1 (refer to "
Personal Caller Name Announcement")
• Personal Distribution List Voice Label*2 (refer to "
Personal Group Distribution Lists")
*1
*2
This feature may be disabled depending on your COS settings.
This feature may be disabled depending on your system programming settings or mailbox settings.
Document Version 2014-08
1.
In the Unified Message tab, click Prompt
Registration.
2.
In the Prompt Registration box, select a tab for the
desired type of prompt.
Operating Manual
301
3.2.1 User Programming
To record a prompt
Select a Prompt No., and click Play/Record.
When "Record from extension" is selected:
a. Specify the extension number of the telephone used
for recording, then click Connect.
b. When the specified extension rings, go off-hook.
c. Click Record, Stop, or Play to record or play a
system prompt.
d. Click Disconnect.
When "Import from recorded file" is selected:
a. Click Browse. The Open dialog box appears.
b. Navigate to the folder containing the WAV files you
wish to import.
c. Select the desired WAV file.
d. Click Open to import the file.
e. Click OK.
To start and stop prompt playback
a. Select the desired prompt.
b. Click Play/Record.
c. Click Play or Stop.
To delete a specific prompt
a. Select the desired prompt.
b. Click Delete.
c. Click OK.
Customizing your mailbox setting
You can change your mailbox setting in the Unified Message tab of the Edit User screen.
302
Operating Manual
1.
In the Unified Message tab, click Advanced setting.
2.
The Mailbox Settings box appears.
The following items are editable.
Document Version 2014-08
3.2.1 User Programming
Mailbox Parameters
Item
Description
Mailbox Password
Specifies the password needed to access the mailbox. If a default password
is programmed by an administrator, that password will be assigned
automatically when creating all mailboxes.
To change a password for a mailbox:
1. Click Edit.
2. In the window that appears, enter the new password (4–16 characters in
length) and then enter it again to confirm it.
3. Click OK
Mailbox Password
(Message Client)
Specifies the password needed to access the mailbox when using a client
software program. If a default password is programmed by an administrator,
that password will be assigned automatically when creating all mailboxes.
To change a password for a mailbox:
1. Click Edit.
2. In the window that appears, enter the new password (4–16 characters in
length) and then enter it again to confirm it.
3. Click OK.
Covering Extension
Enter a desired extension number you want to assign for transferring to your
Covering Extension in the box (1–8 digits).
Interview Mailbox
Enter an interview mailbox number you want to assign for your mailbox in the
box (2–8 digits [the maximum number of digits may be less than 8, depending
on system programming]).
All Calls Transfer to
Mailbox
Select Yes or No.
If Yes is selected, calls are automatically forwarded to your mailbox.
Call Transfer Sequence
(Selection), Call Transfer
Sequence (Other)
Specifies the Call Transfer Sequence used by the mailbox. Allows each
mailbox to be assigned its own Call Transfer Sequence (Personal Transfer
Sequence).
1. Select System or Other.
2. If "Other" is specified, enter a maximum of 16 characters consisting of
0–9, , # and special codes:
• D: Disconnecting
• F: Flash (Recall)
• R: Ringback Tone Detection
• T: Dial Tone Detection
• ,: Dial Pause (default 1 s)
• ;: Dial Pause (default 3 s)
• X: Extension Dialing
• 0–9, , #: Dial Code
No Answer Time
(Selection), No Answer
Time (Other)
Specifies the length of time that the Unified Messaging system waits before
handling unanswered calls to the extension.
1. Select System or Other.
2. If "Other" is selected, specify 10–60 s.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
303
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
304
Description
Call Transfer Status
Determines how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when it
reaches your extension.
1. Click Edit.
2. Select the setting from the following items.
• None: Rings your extension.
• Call blocking: Handles the call according to the Incomplete Call
Handling for No Answer setting for your extension. Your extension
will not ring.
• Call screening: The caller is prompted to record his or her name.
The Unified Messaging system then calls you and plays back the
caller name. You can choose whether to answer the call.
• Intercom Paging: Pages you by intercom.
• Transfer to Mailbox: Transfers the caller to the mailbox.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller
to the specified Custom Service.
• Transfer to specified telephone number 1–5: Transfers the caller
to one of the specified telephone numbers in numerical order of
priority.
3. Click OK to finish.
Incomplete Call Handling
for No Answer
Specifies how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when there is no
answer.
1. Click Edit.
2. Select the setting from the following items.
More than one option can be selected.
• Leave a Message: Allows the caller to record a message.
• Transfer to a covering extension: Transfers the caller to a covering
extension.
• Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging: Pages you by
intercom.
• Transfer to operator: Transfers the caller to an operator.
• Return to top menu: Lets the caller return to top menu and try
another extension.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller
to the specified Custom Service.
3. Click OK to finish.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Description
Incomplete Call Handling
for Busy
Specifies how the Unified Messaging system handles a call when the
extension is busy.
1. Click Edit.
2. Select the setting from the following items.
More than one option can be selected.
• Leave a Message: Allows the caller to record a message.
• Transfer to a covering extension: Transfers the caller to a covering
extension.
• Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging: Pages you by
intercom.
• Transfer to operator: Transfers the caller to an operator.
• Return to top menu: Lets the caller return to top menu and try
another extension.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller
to the specified Custom Service.
3. Click OK to finish.
Call Transfer Anytime in
Incomplete Handling
Menu
Specifies whether callers can input an extension number to transfer their call
while the Automated Attendant service is playing an Incomplete Call Handling
menu.
Advanced Call Transfer Setting
Item
Advanced Call Transfer
Setting
Description
By combining the settings for Call Transfer and Incomplete Call Handling,
you can create call handling "scenarios" for your extension. Up to 20
scenarios can be created, and a scenario can be assigned to each absent
message in Scenario Setting.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Edit for creating scenarios.
Select a Scenario number (1–20) from the drop-down list.
Type the scenario name in the Scenario Name box.
Assign the following options in each section. Click OK when finished.
Call Transfer Status
Determines how the Unified Messaging system will handle a call in the
selected scenario.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
305
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Description
Selection
Determines how the Unified Messaging system will handle a call in the
selected scenario.
Select the setting from the following items.
• None: Rings your extension.
• Call blocking: Handles the call according to the Incomplete Call
Handling for No Answer setting for your extension. Your extension
will not ring.
• Call screening: The caller is prompted to record his or her name.
The Unified Messaging system then calls you and plays back the
caller name. You can choose whether to answer the call.
• Leave a Message: Transfers the caller to the mailbox.
• Intercom Paging: Pages you by intercom.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller
to the specified Custom Service.
VIP Filter
If "Leave a Message" is selected for Selection and "Enable" is selected
for this setting, calls from certain phone numbers will be transferred
directly to your extension or specified telephone number.
• Telephone Number 1, 2, 3: Specifies the telephone numbers that
the VIP Filter setting will be applied to. When a call is received from
any of the numbers specified here, the call will be transferred
immediately to the destination specified in Transfer to (Selection).
• Transfer to (Selection): Specifies the transfer destination for calls
transferred according to the VIP Filter setting.
– Extension: The call is transferred to your extension.
– Other: The call is transferred to the telephone number that is
specified in Transfer to (Other).
Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu
Select a Custom Service from the drop-down menu if "Transfer to
specified Custom Service Menu" is selected for Selection.
Transfer to specified telephone number - 1
If "None" or "Call screening" is selected for Selection, specifying a
telephone number here will transfer the caller to that telephone number.
Enter a maximum of 32 characters consisting of 0–9, , and #.
Note
If "Call screening" is selected, the transfer destination will hear the
call screening prompt before the call is transferred.
306
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Description
Transfer to specified telephone number 2, 3, 4, 5 (Selection/Other)
If "None" or "Call screening" is selected for Selection, and the call could
not be transferred to the number specified in Transfer to specified
telephone number - 1, the call will be transferred according to these
settings for this scenario, in numerical order of priority.
Note
If "Call screening" is selected, the transfer destination will hear the
call screening prompt before the call is transferred.
1. Select Other, Extension, or Covering Extension.
2. If "Other" is specified, enter a maximum of 32 characters consisting
of 0–9,
, and #.
Incomplete Call Handling for No Answer
Specifies how the scenario handles a call when there is no answer.
More than one option can be selected.
• Leave a Message: Allows the caller to record a message.
• Transfer to a covering extension: Transfers the caller to a covering
extension.
• Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging: Pages you by intercom.
• Transfer to operator: Transfers the caller to an operator.
• Return to top menu: Lets the caller return to top menu and try another
extension.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller to the
specified Custom Service.
Incomplete Call Handling for Busy
Specifies how the scenario handles a call when the destination is busy.
More than one option can be selected.
• Leave a Message: Allows the caller to record a message.
• Transfer to a covering extension: Transfers the caller to a covering
extension.
• Page the mailbox owner by intercom paging: Pages you by intercom.
• Transfer to operator: Transfers the caller to an operator.
• Return to top menu: Lets the caller return to top menu and try another
extension.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller to the
specified Custom Service.
Scenario Setting
Document Version 2014-08
You can select scenarios set in Advanced Call Transfer Setting.
A scenario can be set temporarily, or scenarios can be selected for use
according to the Absent Message setting of your extension.
• Current Scenario: The scenario that is assigned to the absent message
currently set at your extension is displayed here.
• Temporary Scenario: Setting a scenario here will use that scenario
indefinitely. A scenario set here will be used regardless of your extension
status. Selecting "None" will remove the setting.
• Absent Message 1–9: The selected scenario will be used when the
corresponding Absent Message is set at your extension.
Operating Manual
307
3.2.1 User Programming
Notification Parameters
Item
Description
Message Waiting Lamp
If set to "Enable", the Message Waiting Lamp of your telephone turns on when
a new message is recorded.
Telephone
Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3
Specifies the Message Waiting Notification schedule for each device.
The following parameters can be specified for devices 1, 2, and 3.
Click Edit for the extension to change, set Device Notification for
Unreceived Message to "Yes", and set program the settings, then click
OK to finish.
Only Urgent Messages
Specifies if notifications will be sent only for messages designated as urgent.
Dial Number [0-9 * # T X , ;]
Assigns a telephone number to Device 1, 2, or 3. You can also specify the
number to be dialed by entering it from your telephone, allowing you to set
this feature on a case by case basis.
Enter a maximum of 32 digits consisting of 0–9, , # and special codes:
• ,: Dial Pause (default 1 s)
• ;: Dial Pause (default 3 s)
• T: Dial Tone Detection
• X: Callback Number Entry Code
• 0–9, , #: Dial Code
Note
If you are using a PRI line, you may need to enter # at the end of outside
telephone numbers.
No. of Retries
Specifies the number of times the Unified Messaging system will try to send
notification if the device is busy or if there is no answer.
Busy Delay Time (min)
Specifies the time (in minutes) the Unified Messaging system waits before
retrying message notification when the called device is busy.
No Answer Delay Time (min)
Specifies the time (in minutes) the Unified Messaging system waits before
retrying message notification when the called device does not answer.
308
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Description
Use Mode
Specifies if and how each device is used for message notification. You can
also specify the use mode from your telephone:
• Not use: The selected device is not used for message notification.
• Continuously: The device is called whenever a message is recorded in
the mailbox. If Only Urgent Messages is set to "Yes", the device is called
whenever an urgent message is recorded in the mailbox.
• Scheduled: The selected device is called only during the selected times.
Time Frame: If Scheduled is selected here, follow the steps below to specify
the time frame:
1. Click a day (Sunday – Saturday) tab.
2. Click Enable Time Frame No. 1 or 2.
3. Enter the start and end times in the "Start At (HH:MM)" and "End At
(HH:MM)" fields.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each day to be programmed, and then Click OK.
Telephone
Device—Device
Notification
Timer—Device Start
Delay Time (0-120 min)
Specifies the length of time the system waits after a new message is received
before sending message waiting notification.
Telephone
Device—Device
Notification
Timer—Device Interval
Time between Device 1, 2,
3 and Next Device
Specifies how long the PBX waits after sending Message Waiting Notification
to Device 1, 2, or 3 before sending notification to the next device.
E-mail/Text Message
Device—Device No. 1, 2, 3
You can be notified by e-mail when a new message is recorded in your
mailbox.
Click Edit for the extension to schedule, program the settings, and click OK
to finish.
Note
You can be notified by e-mail when an outside call is missed. For details,
refer to "Changing Your Contact Information" in "3.2.1 User
Programming").
User Name
Specifies the name of the user of the device.
E-mail Address
Specifies the e-mail address of the device.
Only Urgent Messages
Specifies if Message Waiting Notifications will be sent only for urgent
messages.
Title Order
Specifies the format of the title of the notification.
Title String
Specifies the text string to be included as part of the title of the notification.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
309
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Description
Callback Number
Specifies the callback number to be included in the notification (max. 32
digits).
Send Wait Time [0-120 min]
Specifies the delay between the message being left and the sending of the
Message Waiting Notification.
Attach Voice File
Specifies whether to attach a voice file of the voice message to the notification
e-mail.
Use Mode
Specifies if and how each device is used for message notification:
• Not use: The selected device is not used for message notification.
• Continuously: The device is called whenever a message is recorded in
the mailbox. If Only Urgent Messages is set to "Yes", the device is called
whenever an urgent message is recorded in the mailbox.
• Scheduled: The selected device is called only during the selected times.
Time Frame: If Scheduled is selected here, follow the steps below to specify
the time frame:
1. Click a day (Sunday – Saturday) tab.
2. Click Enable Time Frame No. 1 or 2.
3. Enter the start and end times in the "Start At (HH:MM)" and "End At
(HH:MM)" fields.
4. To specify if sent voice message is deleted from the Unified Message
system after they are sent by e-mail, select "Yes" for Delete After Send
(Voice File) or Delete After Send (Fax File).
5. Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each day to be programmed, and then Click OK.
External Message Delivery
Item
Description
External Message
Delivery Active
If set to "Yes", you are able to utilize the External Message Delivery feature.
External Message
Delivery Prompt Mode
When an external message is delivered, the receiver will be greeted by the
system in the specified language.
If set to "Primary", the default language will be used. If set to "Selective", the
receiver has a choice of prompts.
Auto Forwarding
Item
310
Description
Auto Forwarding Active
If set to "Yes", the Unified Messaging system automatically forwards
messages that have not been played for a specified length of time to another
mailbox.
Auto Forwarding Mailbox
Number
Specifies the mailbox to which the messages will be forwarded.
Operating Manual
Note
A Mailbox Group number cannot be specified as a destination.
Document Version 2014-08
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Auto Forwarding Delay
Time
Description
Specifies the length of time in hours and minutes that the system waits before
forwarding unplayed messages.
The maximum delay time is 99 h, 59 min.
Note
The delay time must be shorter than the New Message Retention Time,
or else messages will be deleted before being forwarded.
Auto Forwarding Mode
Specifies if forwarded messages are to be retained in the original mailbox.
When set to "Copy", copies of the messages are retained in the original
mailbox after forwarding. When set to "Move", messages are forwarded to
the receiving mailbox and are not retained in the original mailbox.
Auto Forwarding Mode Message Remains New
Specifies if the forwarded messages remain marked as new.
This setting is available only when Auto Forwarding Mode is set to "Copy".
Auto Forwarding Expires
Specifies the date and time of day for when forwarding of messages will
expire.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
311
3.2.1 User Programming
Personal Custom Service
Item
Personal Custom Service
Description
Specifies the Personal Custom Service.
Note
•
Make sure to add a CO line access number when you store an outside
telephone number.
• If you are using a PRI line, you may need to enter # at the end of
outside telephone numbers.
Follow the steps below to edit a Personal Custom Service.
1. Click Edit.
2. For each Key, specify an Assigned Operation.
3. For each Assigned Operation that is specified, specify a Value from the
following.
• Transfer to specified mailbox: Allow the caller to leave messages
in a specified mailbox.
• Transfer to specified extension: Transfers the caller to a specified
extension.
• Transfer to Voice Mail Service: Allows the caller to access Voice
Mail Service.
• Transfer to Automated Attendant Service: Allows the caller to
access Automated Attendant Service.
• Transfer to specified Custom Service Menu: Transfers the caller
to the Custom Service specified here.
• Transfer to operator: Connects the caller to an operator.
• Transfer to outside (specified number): Transfers the caller to a
specified outside telephone number. Enter the Outside Numbers list
index (1–4).
• Page the party: Pages you.
• Repeat greeting: Repeats the greeting.
• None: No operation assigned.
4. Click OK when finished.
Outside Numbers
312
Operating Manual
Specifies the outside telephone numbers that can be used for the "Transfer
to outside (specified number)" operation in the Personal Custom Service
settings.
1. Click Edit.
2. Enter Outside Number #1–#4: Max. 32 digits consisting of 0–9, , #, and
special codes:
• T: Dial Tone Detection
• ,: Dial Pause (default 1 s)
• ;: Dial Pause (default 3 s)
• 0–9, , #: Dial Code
3. Click OK when finished.
Document Version 2014-08
3.2.1 User Programming
Item
Description
No DTMF Input Operation
Specifies the operation taken when no DTMF input (a caller does not dial
anything) is received after the Personal Greeting:
• Recording: The caller will be guided to leave a message.
• Disconnect (All Day): The line will be disconnected, regardless of the
time of day.
• Disconnect (Only After Hours): The line will be disconnected only after
hours.
No DTMF Input Operation
Wait Time
Specifies the duration of time to wait for DTMF input before the action set in
No DTMF Input Operation is performed (0–10 s).
Personal Distribution List
Item
List 1–4 Members
Description
Personal Distribution Lists are used to send the same messages to several
mailboxes in a single operation. A maximum of 4 lists can be maintained with
each list containing a maximum of 40 mailboxes.
Specifies the mailbox numbers that belong to the list.
Follow the steps below to edit list members.
1. Click Edit for a Personal Distribution List (1–4) Members item.
2. Under Subscribers To Add, click the checkbox in No. for each mailbox
to add, referring to the mailbox numbers and mailbox owners’ names.
3. Click Add.
4. Click OK.
Follow the steps below to remove members from a list.
1. Click Edit for Personal Distribution Lists (1–4) Members item.
2. Under Distribution, click the checkbox in No. for each mailbox to add,
referring to the mailbox numbers and mailbox owners’ names.
3. Click Delete.
4. Click OK.
Remote Call
Item
Remote Call Telephone
Number 1, 2 [0–9, *]
Description
Specifies the telephone numbers of destinations to which callers are
forwarded when you set Remote Call Forwarding. 2 telephone numbers can
be specified per mailbox.
Make sure you begin the telephone number with a CO line access number
(to seize a CO line).
Note
This feature may be disabled by system programming for your mailbox.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
313
3.2.1 User Programming
Automatic Login
item
Description
Auto Login Extension
When this item is set to "Enable", you are able to access your mailbox directly
without entering the mailbox number. You can automatically log in from your
extensions, by calling from an outside telephone whose number is stored as
a Caller ID number, or by dialing a telephone number assigned to a specified
DID number or CO line. When logging in from outside telephones, the Toll
Saver feature is also available.
Auto Login Extension
Password Entry
Requirement
Specifies if a password is required for the Automatic Login Extension feature.
Auto Login Caller ID 1, 2
Specifies the telephone number from which you can automatically be logged
in from. When Caller ID information is received that matches one of these
numbers, the caller (you) is automatically logged in to the mailbox. Note that
this telephone number must be unique for each mailbox.
Auto Login Caller ID
Password Entry
Requirement
Specifies if a password is required for entry when automatic login is
performed using the Caller ID of the number set in Auto Login Caller ID 1
or Auto Login Caller ID 2.
Notice
If this is set to "No", ensure that unauthorized third-parties are not allowed
access to that mailbox.
Notice
If this is set to "No", ensure that unauthorized third-parties are not allowed
access to that mailbox using the number assigned to Auto Login Caller
ID 1 or Auto Login Caller ID 2.
Auto Login Toll Saver
314
Operating Manual
Allows you to call the Unified Messaging system and know whether or not
new messages have been recorded in your mailbox by the number of rings
you hear before the Unified Messaging system answers your calls. Toll Saver
is available under the same conditions as Automatic Login; you can use Toll
Saver when calling from an outside telephone whose number is stored as a
Caller ID number, or by dialing a telephone number assigned to a specified
DID number or CO line:
• Disable: Disables the Toll Saver feature.
• DID: Toll Saver functions when the system receives the preprogrammed
DID number from the PBX.
• Caller ID: Toll Saver functions when Caller ID information is received that
matches one of the preprogrammed numbers (Caller ID 1 or 2).
• Trunk: Toll Saver functions when the system receives a call on the
preprogrammed CO line.
Document Version 2014-08
3.2.1 User Programming
Direct Service
Item
Direct Service UM
Extension
Description
Specifies which features can be directly accessed by dialing a Unified
Messaging extension number:
• Record No Answer Greeting: You can record the greeting played when
there is no answer.
• Record Busy Greeting: You can record the greeting played when their
extension is busy.
• Record After Hours Greeting: You can record the greeting played when
the system is in night mode.
• Record Temporary Greeting: You can record a greeting that is used
exclusively until you disable it.
• Change Day Main Menu: Change the Day Main Menu greeting. Only the
Message Manager may make this change.
• Change Night Main Menu: Change the Night Main Menu greeting. Only
the Message Manager may make this change.
• Change Emergency Greeting: Change the Emergency Greeting. Only
the Message Manager may make this change.
Note
Automatic Login must be enabled for extensions to use this Direct Service
Access.
Announce Number of Messages
Item
Description
Subscriber Service - All
New Messages
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new messages
in your mailbox when you log in.
Subscriber Service - All
Messages
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of all messages in your
mailbox when you log in.
Subscriber Service - New
Voice Messages
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new voice
messages in your mailbox when you log in.
Subscriber Service - New
Urgent Messages
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new messages
marked as urgent in your mailbox when you log in.
Receiving Message
Service - All New
Messages
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new messages
in your mailbox when you have selected to listen to messages.
Receiving Message
Service - All Messages
Specifies if the system announces to you the number all messages in your
mailbox when you have selected to listen to messages.
Receiving Message
Service - New Voice
Messages
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new voice
messages in your mailbox when you have selected to listen to messages.
Receiving Message
Service - New Urgent
Messages
Specifies if the system announces to you the number of only new urgent
messages in your mailbox when you have selected to listen to messages.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
315
3.2.1 User Programming
Message Client
Item
Message Client Display
Language
Description
Specifies the language of information generated by the UM system for the
mail (IMAP) client.
Changing Forward/Do Not Disturb Setting
You can change your extension’s Forward/Do Not Disturb settings for outside and intercom calls in the
Telephony Feature tab of the Edit User screen.
1.
In the Telephony Feature tab, set Forward/Do Not
Disturb as follows:
• For Outside Calls:
To specify the forward type, select the desired type
from the For external calls drop-down list, then
enter the telephone number or select Phone
(Home)*1 or Phone (Mobile)*1 to specify the forward
destination.
• For Intercom Calls:
To specify the forward type, select the desired type
from the For internal calls drop-down list, then
enter the telephone number or select Phone
(Home)*1 or Phone (Mobile)*1 to specify the forward
destination.
*1
These phone numbers are set in the Contact tab of the Edit
User screen.
Note
To apply settings to both outside and intercom calls,
click For both internal calls and external calls.
When you select this, the setting of For external
calls is applied to both outside and intercom calls.
2.
Click OK.
Storing names and numbers in personal speed dialing
You can set frequently dialed numbers using two-digit speed dialing numbers (00–99). A maximum of 100
Personal Speed Dialing numbers can be programmed at your extension for your personal use.
316
Operating Manual
1.
In the Telephony Feature tab, click Speed Dialing
View/Edit.
2.
The available speed dialing numbers are shown in sets
of 20. Select the desired set from Index.
3.
Enter the name of the Personal Speed Dialing number
to call in Speed Dialing - Personal Name (max. 20
characters).
4.
Enter the number to be dialed by the Personal Speed
Dialing number in Speed Dialing - Personal Number
(max. 32 digits consisting of 0–9, , #, T [Transfer], [ ]
[Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]).
Document Version 2014-08
3.2.1 User Programming
5.
Click OK.
Customizing the Flexible Buttons
You can customize the flexible buttons on PTs, Add-on Key Modules, PSs, and KX-UT133/KX-UT136/
KX-UT248/KX-UT670 SIP phones. They can then be used to make or receive outside calls or as feature
buttons.
1.
In the Telephony Feature tab, click Flexible Button
View/Edit.
2.
To set the flexible buttons, specify each button on the
Flexible Button screen.
Follow the table below to set each parameter. When you
finish, click OK.
Button
Steps
Loop-CO (L-CO)
Select Loop CO from Type.
To specify the ring tone, select the ring tone type from Optional Parameter
(Ringing Tone Type Number).
Group-CO (G-CO)
Select Group CO from Type.
Then specify the CO line group number in Parameter Selection.
To specify the ring tone, select the ring tone type from Optional Parameter
(Ringing Tone Type Number).
Single-CO (S-CO)
Select Single CO from Type.
Then specify the CO line number in Parameter Selection.
To specify the ring tone, select the ring tone type from Optional Parameter
(Ringing Tone Type Number).
Direct Station Selection
(DSS)
Select DSS from Type.
Then enter the extension number in Extension Number.
Select One-touch from Type.
Then enter the desired number in Dial (max. 32 digits consisting of 0–9,
#, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]).
,
Note
•
If you store an outside party’s number, you should first store a line
access number.
If you need to enter an account code, you can enter the specified
account code before the line access number.
<Example>
One-touch Dialing
SECRET
•
Document Version 2014-08
49
1234
#
9
[ 123 4567 ]
Account code
feature no.
Account
code
Account code
delimiter
Automatic line
access number
Phone number
For KX-UT series SIP phone users:
Use only 0–9, , and # for One-touch Dialing buttons. If characters
other than these are stored, they will be considered invalid. Only the
digits up to an invalid character will be sent when using that
One-touch Dialing button.
Operating Manual
317
3.2.1 User Programming
Button
318
Steps
Incoming Call Distribution
Group (ICD Group)
Select ICD Group from Type.
Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number.
To specify the ring tone, select the ring tone type from Optional Parameter
(Ringing Tone Type Number).
Message
Select Message Waiting from Type.
Message for Another
Extension
Select Message Waiting from Type.
Then enter the extension number or incoming call distribution group
extension number in Extension Number.
Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do
Not Disturb (DND)—Both
calls
Select FWD/DND (Both) from Type.
FWD/DND—Outside calls
Select FWD/DND (External) from Type.
FWD/DND—Intercom calls
Select FWD/DND (Internal) from Type.
Group FWD—Both calls
Select Group Fwd (Both) from Type.
Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number.
Group FWD—Outside calls
Select Group Fwd (External) from Type.
Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number.
Group FWD—Intercom
calls
Select Group Fwd (Internal) from Type.
Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number.
Account
Select Account from Type.
Conference
Select Conference from Type.
Terminate
Select Terminate from Type.
External Feature Access
(EFA)
Select EFA from Type.
Call Park
Select Call Park from Type.
Then select Specific from Parameter Selection.
Specify the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in Optional
Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number).
Call Park (Automatic Park
Zone)
Select Call Park from Type.
Then select Automatic from Parameter Selection.
Call Log
Select Call Log from Type.
Call Log for ICD Group
Select Call Log from Type.
Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number.
Log-in/Log-out
Select Log-in/Log-out from Type.
Then select None from Parameter Selection.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
3.2.1 User Programming
Button
Steps
Log-in/Log-out of a
specified group
Select Log-in/Log-out from Type.
Then select Incoming Group from Parameter Selection.
And, enter the Incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number.
Log-in/Log-out for all
groups
Select Log-in/Log-out from Type.
Then select All from Parameter Selection.
Hurry-up
Select Hurry-up from Type.
Then enter the incoming call distribution group extension number in
Extension Number.
Wrap-up
Select Wrap-up from Type.
System Alarm
Select System Alarm from Type.
Time Service (Day/Night/
Lunch/Break)
Select Time Service from Type.
Then in Parameter Selection, select which time modes will be switched
manually.
In Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number), select the Time
Table (tenant number) to be used for changing time modes in Automatic
Switching mode.
Answer
Select Answer from Type.
Release
Select Release from Type.
Toll Restriction (TRS)
Select TRS Level Change from Type.
Then select the Toll Restriction (TRS) Level (1–7) from Parameter
Selection.
Calling Line Identification
Restriction (CLIR)
Select CLIR from Type.
Connected Line
Identification Restriction
(COLR)
Select COLR from Type.
Headset
Select Headset from Type.
Time Service Switching
Mode (Automatic/Manual)
Select Time Service - Automatic/Manual from Type.
Then in Parameter Selection, select the Time Table (tenant number) to be
used when Time Service Switching Mode is set to Automatic.
Network Direct Station
Selection (NDSS)
Select NDSS from Type.
Then enter the another PBX extension number in Dial (max. 16 digits
consisting of 0–9).
Note
The button may not be available depending on the networking method in
use or the settings of the PBX.
CTI
Select CTI from Type.
Primary Directory Number
(PDN)
Select PDN from Type.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
319
3.2.1 User Programming
Button
*1
Secondary Directory
Number (SDN)
Select SDN from Type.
Then enter the extension number in Extension Number.
In Parameter Selection, specify the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving
at an SDN button.
To specify the ring tone, select the ring tone type from Optional Parameter
(Ringing Tone Type Number).
Check-in
Select Check In from Type.
Check-out
Select Check Out from Type.
Cleaned-up
Select Cleaned Up from Type.
Two-way Record
Select Two-way Record from Type.
Then enter the UM group’s or the voice mail group’s floating extension
number in Extension Number. (The UM group’s and the voice mail group’s
default floating extension number is 500.*1)
Two-way Transfer
Select Two-way Transfer from Type.
Then enter the UM group’s or the voice mail group’s floating extension
number in Extension Number. (The UM group’s and the voice mail group’s
default floating extension number is 500.*1)
Specify the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record
conversations using One-touch Two-way Transfer in Ext No. of Mailbox.
(For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a
boss.) If the cell is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of
an extension each time.
One-touch Two-way
Transfer
Select Two-way Transfer from Type.
Then enter the UM group’s or the voice mail group’s floating extension
number in Extension Number. (The UM group’s and the voice mail group’s
default floating extension number is 500.*1)
Enter extension number or incoming call distribution group extension number
to Ext No. of Mailbox.
Live Call Screening (LCS)
Select LCS from Type.
Voice Mail Transfer
Select Voice Mail Transfer from Type.
Then enter the UM group’s or the voice mail group’s floating extension
number in Extension Number. (The UM group’s and the voice mail group’s
default floating extension number is 500.*1)
DN
Select DN from Type.
The UM group’s default floating extension number depends on system programming. For more information, consult your System
Administrator or System Manager.
•
•
320
Steps
For KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560 users: You can set the displayed text for
each flexible button for the phone’s Self Labeling feature in Label Name on the Flexible
Button screen.
For KX-UT248 and KX-UT670 users: You can set the displayed text (a maximum of 10
characters) for each flexible button for the phone’s Self Labeling feature in Label Name on
the Flexible Button screen.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
3.2.1 User Programming
Changing Your Password
You can change your password for the Web Maintenance Console in the Login Account tab of the Edit
User screen.
1.
In the Login Account tab, Password (4–16 characters
in length) can be edited.
Note
Entry for the password is hidden and displayed as
dots "·".
2.
Click OK.
Automatic Two-way Recording for Manager
If you are designated as a supervisor for Automatic Two-way Recording, you can set the recording for
extensions you are supervising and listen to the recorded conversations as messages through Web
Maintenance Console. Calls to and from specified extensions can be automatically recorded to a mailbox. For
each targeted extension, the following types of calls can be recorded:
• Intercom (internal) calls
• Outside (external) calls
• Incoming ICD group calls only (i.e., when recording outside calls, limit recording to incoming ICD group
calls only)
•
•
•
•
•
This screen is accessible only by users designated as Automatic Two-way Recording
supervisors.
Forwarded calls and calls retrieved from being on hold will also be automatically recorded.
However, conference calls will not be recorded.
Recording will automatically stop when the mailbox reaches its capacity. Delete older
messages in order to use this feature again.
If the enabled extension has a Two-way Record button assigned to it, the button will flash
during recording. However, that button cannot be used to cancel this feature.
An extension whose conversation is being recorded cannot be the target of the following
features:
– Executive Busy Override
– Call Monitor
– Whisper OHCA
Note
You should inform the other party that the conversation will be recorded.
Editing Recording Settings
On this screen, a user designated as a supervisor may change Automatic Two-way Recording settings for
extensions they are supervising. Information for each extension, including the extension’s supervisor, UM
Group number, and Automatic Two-way Recording destination mailbox is displayed. You can specify which
types of calls will recorded for each extension.
1. On the left side of the screen, click Users ® Automatic Two-way Recording ® Edit a Recording.
2. For an extension, click the setting for Internal call, External Call, or ICDG Incoming Only.
• Internal call: Extension-to-extension calls are recorded.
• External Call: Calls with outside parties are recorded.
• ICDG Incoming Only: Only calls that are received by the extension through an incoming call
distribution group are recorded.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
321
3.2.1 User Programming
Note
To set ICDG Incoming Only to "On", External Call must first be set to "On".
3. Select On or Off for that setting.
4. Click OK when finished.
Viewing and Playing Messages
Users designated as supervisors can view and play messages recorded using the Automatic Two-way
Recording feature.
1. On the left side of the screen, click Users ® Automatic Two-way Recording ® Record List.
2. Select a UM group number from the Select a Destination UM-Group No. drop-down list.
3. Click List View to display a list of the Automatic Two-way Recording mailboxes of the selected UM group.
4. Select one or more mailboxes, and click OK.
5. Messages recorded in the selected mailbox(es) will be displayed. You can filter the list of messages
displayed or play a message.
To filter the list of messages:
Specify any number of the following conditions, and then click Search to display the messages that match
those conditions.
• Mailbox: Specify an Automatic Two-way Recording mailbox, or select ALL.
• Extension: Specify an extension to view all calls that were recorded using Automatic Two-way
Recording for that extension, or select ALL.
• Status: Specify the status for the recorded messages in the mailbox.
• Internal/External: Specify whether the recorded conversations were intercom calls or external calls,
or specify both.
• Call Type: Specify whether the recorded conversations were incoming calls or outgoing calls, or specify
both.
– If Internal/External is set to "Internal" or "Both", Call Type will be set to "Both".
– If Internal/External is set to "External", Call Type can be set to "Incoming", "Outgoing", or
"Both".
• Phone Number: Specify the phone number of the party calling the recorded extension.
• Caller Name: Specify the name of the party that called the recorded extension (may not be available
for all recorded messages).
• Length: Specify the length of the recorded conversations.
• Period: Specify a time period in which calls were recorded.
To play a message:
For playback on the PC:
1. Select the check box of a message to play.
2. At the bottom of the screen, select PC.
(play) button.
3. Click the
The message will be downloaded as an audio file for playback on the PC being used to connect to
Web Maintenance Console.
For playback using the supervisor’s designated extension:
1. In the Mailbox filter, select the mailbox whose messages you want to display, and then click Search.
2. Select the check boxes for one or more messages to play.
3. At the bottom of the screen, select Phone.
(play) button.
4. Click the
Note
If ALL has been selected for the Mailbox filter, the
specific mailbox to enable the
(play) button.
322
Operating Manual
(play) button will be disabled. Select a
Document Version 2014-08
3.2.1 User Programming
5. In the window that appears, enter the extension number in Specify Extension of the extension at which
to play back the messages, and then click Connect.
6. Go off-hook when the extension rings to establish a call with the UM message playback system.
7. During the call, click Play to listen to the currently selected message. If multiple messages were
selected in step 1, you can click Prev and Next to cycle through and listen to the selected messages.
8. When you are finished listening to messages, click Disconnect or go on-hook.
Logout
To logout of Web Maintenance Console, click the
(logout) button to end the programming session and
return to the Login screen. When this option is chosen, system data is automatically backed up from the PBX
to the System Memory.
(logout) button.
1. Click the
A confirmation message will be displayed.
2. Click Yes.
•
If the computer running the Web browser that is connected to Web Maintenance Console is
shut down, or the Web browser is closed, any changes that have not been saved will be lost.
Always end your programming session by clicking the
(logout) button. For more
information, consult your System Administrator.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
323
3.2.1 User Programming
324
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
Section 4
Customizing Extensions and the System–for
Managers
This section shows managers how to customize the
PBX’s extension and system settings according to their
needs. Find the desired setting and program as
necessary.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
325
4.1.2 Manager Programming
4.1 Manager Programming
4.1.1 Programming Information
The manager can program the following item.
• Other Extensions Control
Available Extension
The extension assigned as a manager
Required Telephone
A Panasonic Proprietary Telephone with display (2 lines or more)
(e.g., KX-NT343, KX-NT546, KX-DT346, KX-DT546, KX-T7636)
Manager Password
To enter programming mode, the manager password (max. 10 digits) is required. (Default: 1234)
CAUTION
•
•
•
•
The PBX has a default password preset. For security, change the password the first time that you
program the PBX.
It is strongly recommended that a password of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum
protection against unauthorized access. For a list of numbers and characters that can be used in the
password, refer to "1.3.14 Character Entry".
To avoid unauthorized access to the PBX, keep the password secret. If it becomes known to others,
the PBX may be misused.
Change the password periodically.
Conditions
The programming extension must be idle, on-hook and holding no calls.
4.1.2 Manager Programming
Changing the Settings and Extension Control
To enter the program mode
To program
To exit
To continue
PAUSE
Press PAUSE.
1
Enter
1.
manager
password
Enter manager
password.
PAUSE
programming
input
Follow
programming
input.
Press
HOLD.
Item
Changing the manager password.
326
Operating Manual
Press PAUSE.
Programming Input
0
0
+
+ Password (max. 10 digits) +
Document Version 2014-08
4.1.2 Manager Programming
Item
Programming Input
9
Locking/unlocking other extensions.
(Remote Extension Dial Lock)
0
0
+
+ Extension no. +
1
(to unlock) +
Clearing the PIN and PIN lock for
extensions.
9
1
+
+ Extension no. +
Clearing the PIN and PIN lock for
verification codes.
9
2
+
+ Verification code +
9
3
+
Setting the verification code PIN.
(to lock)/
+ Verification code + PIN (max. 10 digits)
+
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers your
password (verification code PIN).
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping your PIN secret.
b. Selecting a complex, random PIN that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing your PIN regularly.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
327
4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
<Programming Example: Changing the manager password>
[Initial Display]
OCT.27
03:13PM
PROG
INFO
RING
THU
4
Enter the programming input
( 0
0 ).
MENU
SHIFT
1
PROG
PAUSE
Press
Manager Password
EXIT ENTER NEXT
or
5
Press
or
ENTER
Program No?->
EXIT CONT NEXT
SHIFT
2
Enter
->
1234
CLEAR NEXT
The current manager password appears.
1
6
Enter a new manager password
(max. 10 digits).
Enter Password
EXIT
ENTER
3
SHIFT
->
1117
CLEAR NEXT
Enter the current manager password.
Mngr-Pgm No?->
SHIFT EXIT
NEXT
7
Press
to store.
4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
–
–
328
Monitor Control & Execute
ACD Report Analysis
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
Note:
The Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control feature cannot be used at the same time as Hospitality
features. (Refer to "1.3.34 HOSPITALITY FEATURES".) For details, consult your system
administrator.
By specifying an ACD Supervisor for extension users, the ACD Supervisor can check and analyze the operating
conditions of an ICD group. This is done by monitoring the current condition of the ICD group, and by collecting
and analyzing statistical ACD report information.
ICD group monitoring enables recording of ACD report data and allows various analyses based on that data.
To analyze the ACD report, there are three filters: "Group", "Agent", and "Call". The filtered ACD report data
can be printed out and exported in a CSV format. You can also create graphs (pie charts or bar charts) to easily
analyze ACD reports. The flow from ACD report data collection to analysis is shown below:
ICDG-A
Start ACD logging*
ICDG-B
ACD supervisor
Start Monitor
Start Monitor
[Group Monitor Example]
Standard Mode
Start ACD logging*
Real-time ICDG information
Real-time ICDG information
View ACD report
Desired Filter set
ACD report
Print
Export (CSV only)
Graph
[Graph Example]
*Recording ACD report data is enabled at the same time the Group monitor starts.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
329
4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
Monitor Control & Execute
A user designated as an ACD Supervisor or Administrator can specify certain ICD groups to monitor and
configure the monitoring settings. Finally, the user can start the monitor.
To configure the monitor settings and start monitoring
You can configure the monitor control settings in the Group Monitor of the ICDG Management in Web
Maintenance Console.
1. On the left side of the screen, click Users ® ICDG Management ® Group Monitor.
2. Select an ACD Supervisor from the Supervisor selection drop-down list.
3. On the Layout of the Basic Settings, select the layout for showing the monitor results.
4. Select the ICD Group that you want to monitor from the Select ICD Group drop-down list.
5. On the Options, you can change the following settings for the monitor screen:
Item
6.
7.
8.
9.
Description
Value
Member Status View Mode
Select the display mode for
members’ status.
Standard, Simple
Highlighted
Display
Settings
Number of Current
Waiting Calls (1-30)
Specify the number of waiting
calls at which the Current
Waiting Calls display is
highlighted.
1–30
Waiting Time (0-10
min/10 sec)
Specify the waiting time at
which the Longest Waiting
Time display is highlighted.
0–10 minutes
Color Mode
Select the color to use to
highlight items on the screen.
Mode 1, Mode 2,
Mode 3
Blinking
Select whether items that are
highlighted on the screen
blink.
Enable, Disable
Click Apply.
When you finish configuring the settings, click Start Monitor to start monitoring the selected ICD group.
Click Close.
Click OK.
ACD Report Analysis
You can specify which items to include in the monitor result report, the style in which to display the report
profile, and the output format.
1. On the left side of the screen, click Users ® ICDG Management ® ACD Report.
2. Select an ACD Supervisor from the Supervisor selection drop-down list.
To load an ACD report
a. Click Report Profiles.
b. Select the Profile Name.
c. Click Load.
To save an ACD report
a. Click Report Profiles.
b. Name the Profile Name (max. 32 characters).
c. Click Save.
330
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
To select ACD report options
a. Click Option.
b. In ACD Report - Export CSV File Format, select either Comma(,) or Semicolon(;) as the data
separator.
c. Click OK.
You can make an ACD report through 3 types of filters: Group, Agent, and Call. On the ICD screen, select
the target tab, configure the settings as necessary and then click Apply.
For Group
1. On the Group tab under Filter Settings, select one of the following items in the View Mode drop-down
list:
Group, Hour, Day, Date, Month, Trunk, Caller ID/CLIP
Note
If you select Hour, specify the time range (0:00–23:59) in Range.
2. On the Group—Filter Settings—Select Group screen, set the groups to analyze as follows:
a. Click Select.
b. Click the ICD group name you want to analyze from the ICD group names displayed on the Available
Group for ACD Report window. (Maximum 64 groups displayed)
c. Click ==> to move the ICD group you selected in step b. to the Selected Group for ACD Report
window. (Maximum 64 groups)
To delete an ICD group from the Selected Group for ACD Report window, click the ICD group name,
and then click <==.
d. Click OK.
3. Select the target time period for the ACD report on Group—Filter Settings—Select Period.
4. To show the report on a group basis, perform the following steps:
a. Click View Report.
The ACD Report - Group Report screen is displayed.
The filtered data is shown as follows:
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
331
4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
Group
Incoming Calls
Talk Time
Wait Time
(Answered)
Wait Time (Lost)
Max. Waiting Calls
Total
The number of incoming calls
received by the target ICD group.
Answered
The number of incoming calls
answered by the target ICD
group.
Lost
The number of incoming calls to
the target ICD group canceled by
the caller.
Overflow
The number of overflowed
incoming calls from the target
ICD group.
Total
The total talking time of
answered calls for the target ICD
group. (HH:MM:SS)
Average
The average talking time of
answered calls for the target ICD
group. (HH:MM:SS)
Max.
The longest talking time of
answered calls for the target ICD
group. (HH:MM:SS)
Total
The total waiting time of
answered calls for the target ICD
group. (HH:MM:SS)
Average
The average waiting time of
answered calls for the target ICD
group. (HH:MM:SS)
Max.
The longest waiting time of
answered calls for the target ICD
group. (HH:MM:SS)
Total
The total waiting time of canceled
calls for the target ICD group.
(HH:MM:SS)
Average
The average waiting time of
canceled calls for the target ICD
group. (HH:MM:SS)
Max.
The longest waiting time of
canceled calls for the target ICD
group. (HH:MM:SS)
The maximum number of calls
waiting in the queue of the target
ICD group.
When View Mode is "Group", a pie graph will be created.
When View Mode is "Caller ID/CLIP", a graph report cannot be created.
In other modes, a bar graph will be created.
b. The results report can be output in one of the following 3 ways:
• Graph: Click Graph, open the ACD Report - Group Graph screen, and display the graph of the
report. Click Print to print the graph.
332
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
•
•
Export: Click Export, and save the report file.
Print: Click Print to print the report.
c. Click Close.
For Agent
1. On the Agent tab under Filter Settings, select one of the following items in the View Mode drop-down
list:
Agent, Hour, Day, Date, Month
Note
If you select Hour, specify the time range (0:00–23:59) in Range.
2. On the Agent—Filter Settings—Select Agent screen, set the groups to analyze as follows:
a. Click Select.
b. Click the agent name you want to analyze from the displayed agent names on Available Agent for
ACD Report window.
c. Click ==> to move the agent you selected in step b. to the Selected Agent for ACD Report window.
(Maximum 128 agents)
To delete an agent from the Selected Agent for ACD Report window, click the agent name, and then
click <==.
d. Click OK.
3. Select the target time period for the ACD report on Agent—Filter Settings—Select Period.
4. To show the report on an agent basis, perform the following steps:
a. Click View Report.
The ACD Report - Agent Report screen is displayed.
The filtered data is shown as follows:
Agent
Total Answer
Talk Time
The number of calls that the target
agent answers.
Total
The total talking time for the target
agent. (HH:MM:SS)
Average
The average talking time for the
target agent. (HH:MM:SS)
Max.
The longest talking time for the
target agent. (HH:MM:SS)
Login Time
The total login time for the target
agent. (HH:MM:SS)
Not-ready Time
The total not-ready time for the
target agent. (HH:MM:SS)
Wrap-up Time
The total wrap-up time for the target
agent. (HH:MM:SS)
b. The results report can be output in one of the following 3 ways:
• Graph: Click Graph, open the ACD Report - Agent Graph screen, and display the graph of the
report. Click Print to print the graph.
Export: Click Export, and save the report file.
Print: Click Print to print the report.
c. Click Close.
•
•
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
333
4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
For Call
1. On the Call—Filter Settings—Select Group screen, set the group to analyze as follows:
a. Click Select.
b. Click the ICD group name you want to analyze from the ICD group names displayed on the Available
Group for ACD Report window. (Maximum 64 groups displayed)
c. Click ==> to move the ICD group you selected in step b. to the Selected Group for ACD Report
window. (Maximum 64 groups)
To delete an ICD group from the Selected Group for ACD Report window, click the ICD group name,
and then click <==.
d. Click OK.
2. Select the target time period for the ACD report on Call—Filter Settings—Select Period.
3. Select the target for an ACD report from the following, and then configure the filter settings on the
Call—Call Filter Mode screen.
• Caller ID/CLIP Filter: You can filter by Caller ID or CLIP.
a. Click Caller ID/CLIP Filter.
b. Enter the caller ID or CLIP as the target to analyze (maximum 10).
• Talk/Wait Duration Filter: You can filter by continuous talk time or wait time.
a. Click Talk/Wait Duration Filter.
b. Select Talk Time or Wait Time from the Mode drop-down list.
c. Set the target time range to filter.
To set the minimum time duration, click Min., and set the time (0:00–23:59).
To set the maximum time duration, click Max., and set the time (0:00–23:59).
• Lost Call Filter: You can filter by lost calls.
a. Click Lost Call Filter.
4. To show the report on a group basis, perform the following steps:
a. Click View Report.
The ACD Report - Call Report screen is displayed.
The filtered data is shown as follows:
Call
ACD Report
- Call Report
Start Date
The start date of the call.
Start Time
The start time of the call.
(HH:MM:SS)
End Date
The end date of the call.
End Time
The end time of the call.
(HH:MM:SS)
Result
The processing result. (Answered/
Abandoned/Overflowed)
ICDG
The incoming ICD Group number.
Answering
Agent
The answering member. (Extension
Name/Extension Number)
Talk Time
The talking time. (HH:MM:SS)
Wait Time
The waiting time. (HH:MM:SS)
Trunk
The incoming trunk group number.
Caller ID/
CLIP
The caller’s number.
No graphical data is supported for Call Report.
Abandoned calls are included in the ACD report, depending on what filter is selected.
334
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
If it is necessary to show results without abandoned calls, then export the CSV and delete that type of
call from the data.
b. The results report can be output in one of the following 2 ways:
• Export: Click Export, and save the report file.
• Print: Click Print to print the report.
c. Click Close.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
335
4.1.3 Supervisory Monitor (ACD) Control
336
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
Section 5
Appendix
This section provides the List of Operations by
Telephone Type, the Troubleshooting, the Feature
Number Table and Tone List. Check the
Troubleshooting section before consulting your dealer.
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
337
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
5.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
The features that each type of telephone supports are marked with a ü. Features without a ü for a certain
telephone type are not supported for that telephone type.
•
Some operations of these features may not be supported by a certain telephone type. For
details, refer to the each section’s operations.
Telephone Type
SIP phone
Features
PT
PS
SLT
KX-UT
series
NonKX-UT
series
Intercom Call
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Operator Call
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Calling an Outside Party
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.2.2 Answering Calls
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.3.1 Absent Message
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.3.2 Account Code Entry
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.3.3 Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice
ü
ü
ü
1.3.4 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
ü
ü
ü
1.3.5 BGM (Background Music)
ü
1.3.6 Call Hold
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.3.7 Call Monitor
ü
ü
ü
To set
ü
ü
ü
ü*1
Call Park Retrieve
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Call Pickup
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Call Pickup Group Monitor
ü*2
Call Pickup Deny
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.2.1 Making Calls
1.3.8 Call Park
1.3.9 Call Pickup
1.3.10 Call Splitting
1.3.11 Call Transfer
338
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
Telephone Type
SIP phone
Features
PT
PS
SLT
KX-UT
series
NonKX-UT
series
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Transferring to an Outside Party Using the
PBX Service
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Transferring to an Outside Party Using the
SIP Service
ü
ü
ü
Call Waiting (BSS [Busy Station Signaling])
ü
ü
ü
Answering Call Waiting in the PBX
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Conference
ü
ü
ü
ü
Leaving Three-party Conference
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Conference Mode
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Broadcast Mode
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Join After Time Out
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
DND (Do Not Disturb)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
DND Override
ü
ü
ü
Transferring to an Extension in the PBX
1.3.12 CALL WAITING FEATURES
Answering Call Waiting from the Telephone
Company
1.3.13 Call Waiting Tone
ü
1.3.15 Conference
1.3.16 Conference, Unattended
1.3.17 Conference Group Call
1.3.18 Data Line Security
1.3.20 DND (Do Not Disturb)
Switching FWD/DND Status Using Fixed
FWD/DND Button
ü
ü*3
1.3.21 Door Open
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.3.22 Doorphone Call
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.3.23 EFA (External Feature Access)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.3.24 Executive Busy Override
Executive Busy Override
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
339
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
Telephone Type
SIP phone
Features
PT
PS
SLT
KX-UT
series
NonKX-UT
series
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
To lock
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
To unlock
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
To make an outside call while your extension is
locked
ü
ü
ü
1.3.26 Extension Feature Clear
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.3.27 Extension PIN (Personal Identification
Number)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
FWD (Call Forwarding)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Remote FWD
ü
Executive Busy Override Deny
1.3.25 Extension Dial Lock
1.3.28 External Relay
To switch on the relay
1.3.29 External Sensor
To answer a sensor call
1.3.30 FWD (Call Forwarding)
FWD/DND Settings Using Fixed FWD/DND
Button
ü
ü*3
1.3.31 Hands-free Answerback
ü
1.3.32 Hands-free Operation
ü
ü
Headset Operation
ü
ü
Answer/Release Button
ü
ü
ü
1.3.33 Headset Operation
1.3.35 Hot Line
ü
1.3.37 ICD Group Features—Call Log History for
ICD Group
ü*4
1.3.38 ICD Group Features—Incoming Call Queue
Monitor
ü*4
1.3.39 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
ü
1.3.40 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Monitor and Remote Control
ü*4
340
Operating Manual
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Document Version 2014-08
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
Telephone Type
SIP phone
Features
PT
PS
SLT
1.3.41 ICD Group Features—Manual Queue
Redirection
ü
ü
1.3.42 ICD Group Features—Supervisory
ü*4
1.3.43 Message Waiting
ü
ü
1.3.44 Mute
ü
ü
1.3.45 Off-hook Monitor
ü
1.3.46 OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement)
ü*5
1.3.47 One-numbered extension
ü
1.3.48 One-touch Dialing
ü
ü
Group Paging
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Paging and then Transferring a Call
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Paging Deny
ü
1.3.50 Paralleled Telephone
ü*6
1.3.51 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN
(Secondary Directory Number) Extension
ü
1.3.52 Printing Message
ü
1.3.53 Privacy Release
ü
ü
1.3.54 Private Network Features—CLIP (Calling
Line Identification Presentation)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.3.55 Private Network Features—CLIR (Calling
Line Identification Restriction)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.3.56 Private Network Features—COLP
(Connected Line Identification Presentation)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.3.57 Private Network Features—COLR
(Connected Line Identification Restriction)
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.3.58 Private Network Features—TIE Line Access
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.3.59 Quick Dialing
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.3.60 Redial, Last Number
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.3.61 Room Status Control
ü*4
1.3.62 Self Labeling (KX-NT366/KX-NT553/
KX-NT556/KX-NT560/KX-UT248/KX-UT670 only)
ü*7
ü
KX-UT
series
NonKX-UT
series
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü*1
1.3.49 Paging
Document Version 2014-08
ü
ü
ü
ü*8
Operating Manual
341
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
Telephone Type
SIP phone
Features
PT
PS
SLT
KX-UT
series
NonKX-UT
series
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
1.3.63 Speed Dialing, Personal
ü
1.3.64 Speed Dialing, System
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
Redirecting Your Calls to Your Message Box
ü
ü
ü
Leaving Voice Messages
ü
ü
ü
Listening to Voice Messages Left by Callers
ü
ü
ü
Accessing the Message Box of Another
Extension from Your Extension
ü
ü
ü
1.3.66 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station)
ü
ü
ü
1.3.67 Timed Reminder
ü
1.3.68 Time Service
ü
1.3.69 Verification Code Entry
ü
ü
1.3.71 Voice Mail Features—LCS (Live Call
Screening)
ü
ü
1.3.72 Voice Mail Features—Two-way Record
ü
ü
1.3.73 Voice Mail Features—Voice Mail Integration
ü
ü
ü
1.3.74 Wake-up Call
ü
1.3.75 Walking COS
ü
ü
ü
1.3.76 Walking Extension
ü
ü
1.3.77 Walking Extension, Enhanced
ü
ü
1.3.78 Whisper OHCA
ü*9
1.3.65 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Recording a Normal Greeting Message
Recording a Greeting Message for Each
Time Mode
Accessing Your Message Box from an
Outside Telephone
1.3.79 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
ü
1.4.1 Call Log, Incoming
ü
ü
ü
1.4.2 Call Log, Outgoing
ü
ü
ü
1.4.3 Directories
ü
ü
342
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
5.1.1 List of Operations by Telephone Type
Telephone Type
SIP phone
Features
PT
1.4.4 System Feature Access
PS
SLT
ü*10
KX-UT
series
NonKX-UT
series
ü
1.6 Unified Messaging Features*11*12
ü
ü
2.1.1 Dial Tone Transfer
ü
ü
2.1.2 External BGM (Background Music)
ü
ü
2.1.3 OGM (Outgoing Messages)
ü
2.1.4 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network
Direct Station Selection) Monitor Release
ü
ü
2.1.5 Remote Extension Dial Lock
ü
2.1.6 Time Service Mode Control
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
2.2 Configuring Unified Messaging Features*13
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
3.1.2 Personal Programming
ü
ü
3.1.3 Programming Feature Clear
ü
ü
3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
ü
ü
4.1 Manager Programming
Changing the Settings and Extension Control
*1
*2
Only available for the KX-UT133, KX-UT136, KX-UT248, and KX-UT670.
Available telephones are as follows:
•
•
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
*10
ü
IP-PTs (except models with a single line display)
DPTs (except models with a single line display)
Not available for the KX-UT670.
Only available for 6-line display PTs.
Only available for certain DPTs.
Only available for DPTs.
Only available for the KX-NT366/KX-NT553/KX-NT556/KX-NT560.
Only available for the KX-UT248 and KX-UT670.
Only available for IP-PTs and certain DPTs.
Only available for the KX-NT300 series, KX-NT500 series, KX-DT300 series, KX-DT500 series, and KX-T7600 series.
*11
"
Live Call Screening (LCS)" and "
*12
"
Setting the Alarm (Timed Reminder)" is only available for PTs, SLTs and SIP phones.
*13
"
Setting the Timed Reminder" is only available for PTs, SLTs and SIP phones..
Document Version 2014-08
Recording Your Conversation" are only available for PTs and PSs.
Operating Manual
343
5.2.1 Troubleshooting
5.2 Troubleshooting
5.2.1 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Problem
The telephone does not work properly.
Remedy
•
•
The telephone does not respond when
buttons are pressed.
•
The telephone is locked.
Unlock your telephone. (
1.3.25 Extension
Dial Lock, 2.1.5 Remote Extension Dial Lock)
Some features do not work.
•
System management may restrict certain features.
Consult your manager.
The feature numbers have changed.
Confirm the revised number and try again.
•
Even though following the manual
instructions, none of the operations work
when using a proprietary telephone.
•
The Intercom line was not seized. The seized line,
when going off-hook, was changed by personal
setting. (
3.1.2 Personal Programming)
In the manual, going off-hook means an Intercom
line is seized.
If the setting has been changed, press the INTERCOM
or PDN button after going off-hook and follow the
instructions.
The paralleled single line telephones do
not ring.
•
"No ring" may be selected.
Change the setting to ring. (
Telephone)
My proprietary telephone does not have a
feature button.
•
Some models do not have the feature button.
Change a flexible button to the desired button.
(
3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons)
Enter the specified feature number instead of the
1.1.6 Before Operating the
feature button. (
Telephones)
A reorder tone is audible or "Restricted" is
displayed.
•
The telephone is locked.
Unlock your telephone. (
1.3.25 Extension
Dial Lock, 2.1.5 Remote Extension Dial Lock)
Toll restriction is activated.
Consult your manager or dealer.
1.3.2 Account
An account code is required. (
Code Entry, 1.3.69 Verification Code Entry,
1.3.75 Walking COS)
•
•
344
Confirm with your manager that your settings are
correct.
If the problem persists, consult your dealer.
Operating Manual
1.3.50 Paralleled
Document Version 2014-08
5.2.1 Troubleshooting
Problem
Remedy
I cannot make an outside call using the
One-touch Dialing button or speed dialing.
•
A line access number was not stored.
A line access number is required for outside calls.
(
1.2.1 Making Calls, 3.1.4 Customizing the
Buttons)
I cannot remember the feature numbers.
•
If the feature numbers have been changed from
the default values, write the new feature numbers in
the table in "5.3.1 Feature Number Table".
Ask your dealer to change the feature numbers for
easier use.
•
While talking to an outside party, the line
is disconnected.
•
The time limit has run out. (
1.3.11 Call
Transfer, 1.3.16 Conference, Unattended)
Consult your dealer to extend the time limit, if
necessary.
Redialing does not function.
•
The dialed number was more than 32 digits. (
1.3.60 Redial, Last Number)
I cannot have a conversation using the
Bluetooth headset.
•
Make sure that the headset is properly registered
to the module.
Make sure that the headset is properly charged
according to the manual of the headset.
Remove the wired headset from the headset jack.
Priority is given to the wired headset when both are
connected.
•
•
I cannot register, de-register, or confirm
the ID of the Bluetooth headset.
•
Make sure that the module is properly installed in
the IP-PT/DPT.
The PC and fax machine communication
failed.
•
An indication tone may have interrupted
communication. (
1.3.18 Data Line Security)
I do not want to show my telephone
number to the calling or called party’s
telephone.
•
1.3.55 Private Network Features—CLIR (Calling
(
Line Identification Restriction), 1.3.57 Private Network
Features—COLR (Connected Line Identification
Restriction))
I want to show my telephone number to the
calling or called party’s telephone.
•
(
1.3.54 Private Network Features—CLIP (Calling
Line Identification Presentation), 1.3.56 Private
Network Features—COLP (Connected Line
Identification Presentation))
I cannot send a call waiting tone to the
dialed extension.
•
The other party has not set the Call Waiting feature.
1.3.13 Call Waiting Tone, 1.3.46 OHCA
(
(Off-hook Call Announcement), 1.3.78 Whisper
OHCA)
The other party has set Data Line Security.
1.3.18 Data Line Security)
(
•
I forgot the password.
Document Version 2014-08
•
Ask the manager to assist you.
2.1.1 Dial Tone Transfer)
(
Operating Manual
345
5.2.1 Troubleshooting
Problem
Remedy
The background music started suddenly.
•
Turn off the music.
(
1.3.5 BGM (Background Music), 2.1.2 External
BGM (Background Music))
I do not want to display a number which is
stored in memory.
•
Conceal the number.
(
Storing New Names and Numbers,
3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons)
I want to confirm my extension number.
•
(
Your Extension Number in 1.1.6 Before
Operating the Telephones)
The date and time are not correct.
•
Set the date and time by system programming.
Consult your dealer.
The visibility of the display is poor.
•
(
346
Change the Display contrast level.
3.1.2 Personal Programming)
I want to specify the ringing tones.
•
(
To specify the ringing tones for each CO, ICD
Group, PDN, SDN, or INTERCOM button (DPT/IP-PT
only), 3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons)
The MESSAGE button light has lit up.
•
Another extension left you a message waiting
indication or someone left a message in your
mailbox while you were on the phone or away from
your desk.
An SDN button on my extension does not
work.
•
A PDN button is not assigned on the extension
corresponding to your SDN button.
Create a PDN button on the desired extension.
(
3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons)
I cannot use the secondary Ethernet port.
•
If you are using a KX-NT500 series telephone,
check whether ECO mode is enabled (
Display in 1.1.6 Before Operating the Telephones). If
it is enabled, ask your dealer to disable ECO mode.
For other types of IP-PTs, contact your dealer.
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
5.3 Feature Number Table
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Numbers listed below are the default settings. There are flexible feature numbers and fixed feature numbers.
If you change the flexible feature numbers, fill in your assigned numbers (new) in the list for future reference.
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
Default
(New)
Additional digits/buttons
1.2.1 Making Calls
Operator Call
0
( )
Automatic Line Access
9
( )
outside phone no.
CO Line Group Access
8
( )
CO line group no. (2 digits) + outside phone
no.
1.3.1 Absent Message
750
( )
– To set
– To cancel
1.3.2 Account Code Entry
1–9 (+ parameter) + #
0
49
( )
account code + # + outside phone no.
1.3.4 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
Automatic Callback Busy Cancel
46
( )
1.3.5 BGM (Background Music)
751
( )
– To select
– To cancel
BGM no. (1 digit)
0
1.3.6 Call Hold
Call Hold/Call Hold Retrieve
50
( )
Call Hold Retrieve
– Specified with a held line number
53
( )
CO line no. which is held (3 digits)
– Specified with a holding extension
51
( )
extension no. which has a held call
number
1.3.8 Call Park
– To set
– To retrieve
52
( )
parking zone no. (2 digits)/
stored parking zone no. (2 digits)
1.3.9 Call Pickup
Call Pickup
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
347
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
Default
(New)
Additional digits/buttons
– Group
40
( )
group no. (2 digits)
– Directed
41
( )
extension no.
Call Pickup Deny
– To deny
720
( )
– To allow
1
0
1.3.11 Call Transfer
Transferring to an Outside Party Using
the SIP Service
– Blind Transfer
61
( )
phone no. + #
1.3.12 CALL WAITING FEATURES
Answering Call Waiting in the PBX
Answering Call Waiting from the
Telephone Company
50
( )
60
( )
1.3.13 Call Waiting Tone
1.3.46 OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement)
1.3.78 Whisper OHCA
– For intercom calls
731
( )
0 (No call)/1 (Tone)/2 (OHCA)/3 (Whisper
OHCA)
– For outside calls
732
( )
0 (No tone)/1 (Tone)
1.3.17 Conference Group Call
32
( )
(No call/Tone/OHCA/Whisper OHCA)
– To call and start a conversation
conference group no. (1 digit) + entry code
+#
– To call and make an announcement
conference group no. (1 digit) + entry code
+#
Join After Time Out
– To make a conference group call with an
conference group no. (1 digit) + entry code
+#
entry code
– To join a conversation with an entry code
1.3.18 Data Line Security
– To set
– To cancel
# + conference group no. (1 digit) + entry
code + #
730
( )
1
0
1.3.19 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
348
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
Default
(New)
Additional digits/buttons
Calling through DISA
– To an extension
(In All Security Mode only)
47
( )
– To an outside party
your extension no./( + verification code) +
extension PIN/verification code PIN +
extension no.
your extension no./( + verification code) +
extension PIN/verification code PIN +
outside phone no.
(In Trunk Security Mode/All Security
Mode only)
1.3.20 DND (Do Not Disturb)
– Both Calls
– Outside Calls
– Intercom Calls
710
( )
711
( )
712
( )
0 (Cancel)/
1 (Set)
1.3.21 Door Open
55
( )
doorphone no. (2 digits)
1.3.22 Doorphone Call
31
( )
doorphone no. (2 digits)
1.3.23 EFA (External Feature Access)
60
( )
service code
733
( )
1
77
( )
1
1.3.24 Executive Busy Override
Executive Busy Override Deny
– To prevent
– To allow
0
1.3.25 Extension Dial Lock
– To lock
– To unlock
– To make an outside call while your
extension is locked
0 + extension PIN
47
( )
1.3.26 Extension Feature Clear
790
( )
1.3.27 Extension PIN (Personal
Identification Number)
799
( )
your extension no. + extension PIN + phone
no.
– To set
1 + extension PIN + # + same extension + #
– To cancel
0 + stored extension PIN
1.3.28 External Relay
Document Version 2014-08
56
( )
relay no. (2 digits)
Operating Manual
349
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
Default
(New)
Additional digits/buttons
710
( )
711
( )
712
( )
0 (Cancel)/
2 (All calls) + phone no. + #/
3 (Busy) + phone no. + #/
4 (No Answer) + phone no. + #/
5 (Busy/No Answer) + phone no. + #/
7 (Follow Me) + your extension no./
8 (Follow Me Cancel) + your extension no.
1.3.30 FWD (Call Forwarding)
– Both Calls
– Outside Calls
– Intercom Calls
– To set the timer for "No Answer" and
"Busy/No Answer"
713
( )
00–99 (second)
Call Forwarding (FWD) for your Incoming
Call Distribution Group
– Both Calls
– Outside Calls
– Intercom Calls
1.3.35 Hot Line
– To store
714
( )
715
( )
716
( )
740
( )
1 (Set) + ICD group extension no. + phone
no. + #/
0 (Cancel) + ICD group extension no.
2 + phone no. + #
– To set
1
– To cancel
0
1.3.38 ICD Group Features—Incoming Call
Queue Monitor*1
739
( )
ICD group extension no.
736
( )
1 + ICD group extension no./
735
( )
1 (Not Ready)/0 (Ready)
1.3.39 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Log-in
Log-out
To enter/leave Not Ready mode
0 + ICD group extension no./
1.3.43 Message Waiting
For an extension leaving a message waiting
indication
70
( )
– To leave/cancel
1/0 + extension no.
For an extension receiving a message
waiting indication
– To call back
2
– To clear
0 + your extension no.
1.3.47 One-numbered extension
350
Operating Manual
48
( )
Document Version 2014-08
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
Default
(New)
– To set
– To cancel
To pickup the call
Additional digits/buttons
1 + paired wired extension no.
0
41
( )
paired wired extension no.
33
( )
paging group no. (2 digits)
1.3.49 Paging
Group Paging
– To answer
43
( )
– To deny
721
( )
1
39
( )
1
1.3.52 Printing Message
761
( )
message no. (+ parameter) + #
1.3.54 Private Network Features—CLIP
(Calling Line Identification Presentation)
7 2
( )
– To allow
0
1.3.50 Paralleled Telephone
– Ring
– No Ring
0
– Public
1
– Your extension
2
1.3.55 Private Network Features—CLIR
(Calling Line Identification Restriction)
7 1
( )
– To show
1
– To prevent
2
1.3.56 Private Network Features—COLP
(Connected Line Identification Presentation)
7 2
( )
– Public
1
– Your extension
2
1.3.57 Private Network Features—COLR
(Connected Line Identification Restriction)
7 0
( )
– To show
1
– To prevent
2
1.3.58 Private Network Features—TIE Line
Access
7
( )
1.3.60 Redial, Last Number
#
( )
private phone no.
1.3.63 Speed Dialing, Personal
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
351
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
– To store
– To dial
Default
(New)
30
( )
Additional digits/buttons
personal speed dialing no. (2 digits) +
outside phone no. + #
+ personal speed dialing no. (2 digits)
( )
1.3.64 Speed Dialing, System
– To dial
system speed dialing no. (3 digits)
( )
1.3.65 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Recording a Normal Greeting Message
– To record
– To play back
38
( )
– To clear
1
2
0
Recording a Greeting Message for Each
Time Mode
– To record
8 + 0 (Day)/1 (Night)/2 (Lunch)/3 (Break) + 1
– To play back
8 + 0 (Day)/1 (Night)/2 (Lunch)/3 (Break) + 2
– To clear
8 + 0 (Day)/1 (Night)/2 (Lunch)/3 (Break) + 0
To leave a voice message directly to another
extension’s message box
# + 6 + extension no.
Listening to Voice Messages Left by
Callers
3
Redirecting Your Calls to Your Message
Box
– Both Calls
710
( )
0 (Cancel)/
– Outside Calls
711
( )
2 (All Calls) + floating extension no. for the
SVM feature*7 + #/
– Intercom Calls
712
( )
3 (Busy) + floating extension no. for the SVM
feature*7 + #/
4 (No Answer) + floating extension no. for the
SVM feature*7 + #/
5 (Busy/No Answer) + floating extension no.
for the SVM feature*7 + #
42
( )
external pager no.
1.3.66 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any
Station)
– Calls through an external speaker
352
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
1.3.67 Timed Reminder
– To set
Default
(New)
760
( )
– To cancel
1.3.69 Verification Code Entry
Additional digits/buttons
12H: 1 + time (hour/minute) + 0 (AM)/1 (PM)
+ 0 (once)/1 (daily)
24H: 1 + time (hour/minute) + 0 (once)/1
(daily)
0
47
( )
+ verification code + verification code PIN
+ phone no.
710
( )
711
( )
712
( )
0 (Cancel)/
2 (All calls)/
3 (Busy)/
4 (No Answer)/
5 (Busy/No Answer) + voice mail floating
extension no. + #
1.3.73 Voice Mail Features—Voice Mail
Integration
– Both Calls
– Outside Calls
– Intercom Calls
1.3.74 Wake-up Call*2
– To set
76
( )
12H: 1 + extension no. + hour/minute + 0
(AM)/1 (PM) + 0 (once)/1 (daily)
24H: 1 + extension no. + hour/minute + 0
(once)/1 (daily)
– To cancel
0 + extension no.
– To confirm
2 + extension no.
1.3.75 Walking COS
– To make a call or set features from
another extension
47
( )
your extension no. + extension PIN + phone
no./feature no.
727
( )
your extension no. + extension PIN
– To make a call or set features through
DISA
1.3.76 Walking Extension
1.3.77 Walking Extension, Enhanced
– To set an extension status to Service-out
727
( )
#
– To set an extension status to Service-in
1.3.79 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
– To set
– To cancel
+ your extension no. + extension PIN
48
( )
1 + paired wired extension
0
1.6 Unified Messaging Features
1.6.5 Transferring Calls
Voice Mail Transfer
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
353
5.3.1 Feature Number Table
Default
(New)
Feature (While dial tone is heard)
– Both Calls
– Outside Calls
– Intercom Calls
2.1.2 External BGM (Background Music)*4
– To start
710
( )
711
( )
712
( )
35
( )
– To stop
2.1.3 OGM (Outgoing Messages)*4
– To record
Additional digits/buttons
0 (Cancel)/
2 (All calls)/
3 (Busy)/
4 (No Answer)/
5 (Busy/No Answer) + UM group’s floating
extension no.*3 + #
external pager no. + BGM no. (1 digit)
BGM no. (1 digit)
external pager no. + 0
36
( )
+
+0
1 + OGM floating extension no.*5
– To play back
2 + OGM floating extension no.*5
– To record from an external BGM (MOH)
3 + BGM port no. (1 digit) + OGM floating
extension no.*5
port
– To clear
2.1.4 Private Network Features—NDSS
(Network Direct Station Selection) Monitor
Release
0 + OGM floating extension no.*5
784
( )
another PBX extension no. + #
– To unlock
782
( )
extension no.
– To lock
783
( )
extension no.
2.1.6 Time Service Mode Control*6
780
( )
2.1.5 Remote Extension Dial Lock
– Day/Night/Lunch/Break
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
0/1/2/3
Supervisor only
Hotel operator only
The UM group’s default floating extension number depends on system programming. For more information, consult your System
Administrator or System Manager.
Manager only
The default of OGM floating extension numbers depends on system programming. For more information, consult your System
Administrator or System Manager.
Manager and preprogrammed extension user only
The default floating extension number (591) for the SVM feature depends on system programming. For more information, consult
your System Administrator or System Manager.
Feature
(While busy, DND or call tone is heard/after dialing)
Call Waiting (BSS [Busy Station Signaling])
Default
1
DND Override
354
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
5.4.1 Tone
Feature
(While busy, DND or call tone is heard/after dialing)
Default
1.3.3 Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice
1.3.4 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
6
1.3.7 Call Monitor
5
1.3.24 Executive Busy Override
3
1.3.43 Message Waiting
4
Feature
(While dialing or talking)
Fixed Number
3
Conference
1.3.21 Door Open
From any extension while talking to the doorphone
5
5.4 Tone
5.4.1 Tone
While on-hook
Ring Tones
The following tones are
programmable allowing
recognition of call type (Outside,
Intercom or Doorphone).
Tone 1
1s
Tone 2
1s
Tone 3
1s
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
355
5.4.1 Tone
Tone 4
1s
When going off-hook
Dial Tones
Tone 1
Normal
•
For KX-UT series SIP phone users: Tone 1 will be heard when any of the following features are set.
• Absent Message
• Call Pickup Deny
• Call Waiting
• Extension Dial Lock
• Executive Busy Override Deny
Tone 2
• When there are messages that
have previously been listened to
and no new messages recorded
by the SVM feature.
• When any of the following
features are set:
• Absent Message
• Background Music
• Call Forwarding
• Call Pickup Deny
• Call Waiting
• Do Not Disturb
• Extension Dial Lock
• Executive Busy Override
Deny
• Hot Line
• Timed Reminder
•
356
1s
1s
For KX-UT series SIP phone users: Tone 2 will be heard when any of the following features are set.
• Display Lock
• Call Forwarding
• Do Not Disturb
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
5.4.1 Tone
Tone 3
• When answering an external
sensor call
1s
(Not available for KX-UT series SIP
phones)
• After pressing TRANSFER or
Recall/hookswitch to hold a call
temporarily (e.g., Call Splitting)
• While a called PS is being
searched
• When Account Code Entry is
performed
• When answering a Timed
Reminder call with no message
Tone 4
Message waiting indication was
received.
1s
When you make calls
Busy Tone
Reorder Tone
The CO line you tried to seize is not
assigned or denied.
1s
1s
Ringback Tones
Tone 1
1s
Tone 2
(Not available for KX-UT series SIP
phones)
1s
Do Not Disturb (DND) Tone
(Not available for KX-UT series SIP
phones)
The dialed extension is refusing
incoming calls.
1s
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
357
5.4.1 Tone
While off-hook
Indication Tones
Tone 1
Call waiting tone
15 s
Tone 2
A call is on hold longer than the
specified time
15 s
When talking to an outside party
Warning Tone
This tone is sent 15, 10 and 5
seconds before the specified time for
disconnection.
For KX-UT series SIP phones, this
tone is sent only once 15 seconds
before the specified time for
disconnection.
1s
When setting the features or programming
Confirmation Tones
358
Tone 1
• The feature setting was set
successfully.
• A call is received in Voice-calling
mode.
1s
Tone 2
• Before receiving a page through
an external speaker
• You receive a call in Hands-free
mode.
• You established a call with a
KX-UT series SIP phone that
has Hands-free Answerback
enabled.
1s
Operating Manual
Document Version 2014-08
5.4.1 Tone
Tone 3
• Before the following features
activate:
• Retrieving a held call
• Picking up another call
• Paging/Answering a paging
announcement
• Answering the call through a
speaker
• You establish a call with an
extension in the following cases:
• The called extension has
hands-free Answerback
enabled and is not a KX-UT
series SIP phone.
• Voice-calling mode
• When making a call to or from a
doorphone.
1s
Tone 4
Establishing or leaving a conference
1s
Tone 5
A call has been put on hold.
1s
Document Version 2014-08
Operating Manual
359
When you ship the product
Carefully pack and send it prepaid, adequately insured and preferably in the original carton. Attach a
postagepaid letter, detailing the symptom, to the outside of the carton. DO NOT send the product to the
Executive or Regional Sales offices. They are NOT equipped to make repairs.
Product Service
Panasonic Factory Service Centers for this product are listed in the service center directory. Consult your
certified Panasonic dealer for detailed instructions.
For Future Reference
Please print, record, and retain the following information for future reference.
Note
The serial number of this product can be found on the label affixed to the unit. You should record the
model number and the serial number of this unit as a permanent record of your purchase to aid in
identification in the event of theft.
MODEL NO.
SERIAL NO.
DATE OF PURCHASE
NAME OF DEALER
DEALER'S ADDRESS
DEALER'S TEL. NO.
Two Riverfront Plaza, Newark, NJ 07102-5490
http://www.panasonic.com/bts
Copyright:
This material is copyrighted by Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal
use only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic
System Networks Co., Ltd.
© Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd. 2014
PNQX6960ZA DD0814AH0
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement